Chief Architect Premier X16
Professional 3D Home Design Software

Tutorial Guide
A step-by step introduction to drawing a modeland creating construction documents.

Chief Architect, Inc
6500 N. Mineral Dr
Coeur d'Alene, ID 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com

7/31/2024

Contents
Floor Plan Tutorials

3

Exterior Walls
Interior Walls
Multiple Floors
Interior Stairs
Doors and Windows
Decks and Porches

4
30
48
64
87
111

Roof Tutorials
Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles
Hip Roofs
Gable Roofs
Dutch Gable Roofs
Shed Roofs
Offset Gable Roofs
Gambrel Roofs
Gull Wing Roofs
Half Hip Roofs
Mansard Roofs
Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch
Chic Cottage Roof
Dormers

Interior Design Tutorials
Custom Ceilings
Finish Materials
Room MoldingsInterior Furnishings

Kitchen and Bath Tutorials
Cabinet Styles
Cabinet Layout
Appliances and Fixtures
Light Fixtures
Electrical Objects

Framing Tutorials

133
134
136
136
137
138
138
139
140
141
142
142
143
168

188
189
204
226
238

254
255
279
299
324
345

358

Floor Framing
Wall Framing
Roof and Ceiling Framing

359
377
393

Landscaping Tutorials

411

Plot Plans
Terrain Elevation
Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads
Landscaping Design

Layout Tutorials
Layout Page Templates
Title Blocks and Borders
Sending Views to Layout

412
434
452
466

484
485
495
520

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Plan Tutorials

Floor Plan Tutorials

Chapter 1

The Floor Plan Tutorials describe best practices for drawing a building’s floor plan in Chief Architect.
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Exterior Walls
Interior Walls
Multiple Floors
Interior Stairs
Doors and Windows
Decks and Porches

4
30
48
64
87
111

3

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Exterior Walls
The first step in creating a structure in Chief Architect is to draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 of the plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for beginning a new plan and laying out the exterior, or perimeter,
walls of a structure. Concepts introduced include:
File Management

4

Saving Your Work

5

Productivity Tips

5

Using Plan Views

6

Drawing Walls

8

Zooming and Panning

9

Working with Wall Type Definitions

10

Setting the Defaults

13

Drawing Exterior Walls

16

Creating Room Definition

17

Creating 3D Views

18

Creating Dimension Lines

20

Adjusting Wall Positions

23

Adding Annotations

26

Creating File Revisions

28

FILE MANAGEMENT
Regardless of the kind of work you do on your computer, good file management is a useful skill. The first step in starting a
new project in any application is to specify a save location and a name for the file.

Save Location
It is important to know where your files are saved. By default, most programs will save to your Documents folder because
this is the location that Windows and macOS operating systems prefer. You might instead prefer your Desktop, which isanother location acceptable to your operating system. You should, however, avoid saving your files in any location that is
intended for software installation or for files that the operating system uses. You should also avoid saving your files at a
network location or on a removable device, as this can cause program slowness and may introduce the risk of data loss.

Folders and Subfolders
While you can save all of your files directly into the Documents folder, it will become more and more difficult to find thefiles you need as their numbers increase. To avoid this, organize your files into folders.
Folders may be created for a variety of purposes; for organizing Chief Architect files, an effective approach is to create afolder for each of your projects. Projects can be identified by client name, site address, a design name, or even an accountnumber - choose one that allows you to find a specific project quickly.

4

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

You can also organize projects into subfolders. If you have a client who has multiple projects, consider creating a folder
identified by the client name or their account number, and inside it adding folders named after the site addresses or design
titles.
Always remember, though, that both Windows and macOS operating systems place a limit of 255 total characters on eachfile’s total pathname, so folder names should be kept as short as possible and the use of subfolders should be limited to one
or two levels.

Naming Convention
Choosing an effective naming convention is important in Chief Architect in large part because of the need to manage
multiple file revisions. Each revision’s name should give an indication of its contents, but must also be short enough that its
pathname does not exceed 255 characters.
l

Avoid unnecessary information in file names. For example, the title block on a project’s construction documents mightstate “Johnson Family Primary Residence”, but your plan file name can be limited to just “Johnson Home”.

lUse abbreviations instead of full words. For example use “kit” instead of “kitchen”.

lIndicate dates using numbers. For example, “112320” can be used instead of “November 23 2020”.

It is important to distinguish your working drawing from your revisions. One way to do this is to name your working
drawing in all capital letters while naming revisions using lower case.

To save a new plan file
1. Begin by selecting File> New Plan from Templatelto open a new, blank plan.

If a plan file is already open, instead select File> Templates> New Plan from Template.

2. In the Choose Template File dialog, select the “Residential Template” file and click Open. A new, blank plan file iscreated.
3. Select File> Save As. In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

4. Create a new folder for this project and name it Chic Cottage.
5. Navigate into the newly created Chic Cottage folder so that it becomes the Save location for your plan file.
6. For the File name, type CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT. You have now created the main working drawing for thisproject.
The full pathname for this new plan file is C:\Users\<your user account name>\Documents\Chic Cottage\CHIC COTTAGECURRENT.plan in Windows, which has a total of 58 characters not including the characters in your User Account name.
This is a good starting pathname that will give you flexibility later on as you save revisions and possibly need to create
additional subfolders.

SAVING YOUR WORK
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide will remind you to do so regularly. It is also agood idea to implement a revision strategy. See Creating File Revisions on page 28, below.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to lay out the exterior walls of a project, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

5Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Drawing and EditinglSetting defaults before you draw saves time and reduces the chance of error.

lDraw exterior walls with Grid Snaps enabled.

lDraw walls to an approximate length and then position them with accuracy using dimensions.

Contentl

A selection of name brand siding material catalogs are available for download in the “Materials and Surfaces”
category of the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser
to that page.

lCreate template plans that have your custom wall types set as defaults, and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

lWall types that have been customized can be imported into other plans.

lCustomized wall types can also be saved in the Library for future use.

Interfacel

The Status Bar at the bottom of the program window reports useful information about the active tool, the selected
object, and more.

l

Use the middle mouse button to pan and zoom the current view.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslF6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close Viewl

Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

Although Temporary Dimensions are toggled off in most of images in this tutorial, it is assumed that they are on for the
purposes of following the steps. Select View> Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower
right corner of the tool icon.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views,
each with customized settings for a range of purposes, and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for eachtask.
This functionality of plan views will be explored throughout this guide; however, to get started, the currently active
Working Plan View will be used.
To see examples of Saved Plan Views and their settings, as well as other types of views saved with a plan file, open the
Project Browser.

6

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

To examine a saved plan view’s settings
1. The Project Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window.
l

Click on its tab to bring it to the front of the other side windows docked at that location.

l

If you do not see the Project Browser, select View> Project Browser.

2. Under the CHIC COTTAGE - CURRENT line item are a set of folders. Click the arrow to the left of “Plan Views”.
3. Notice that:l“Working Plan View” has an icon that indicates that it is Open.

l

There are a number of other Saved Plan Views created for various tasks.

4. Right-click on “Working Plan View” and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

5. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, you can see that a variety of settings can be saved with a view,
including:l

The current Floor.

l

The current Default Set, which can be used to select a pre-set collection of Layer settings and Saved Defaults,
also found in this dialog.

l

The current Layer Set, which controls which objects display, and their appearance.

l

The active Saved Defaults, which determine the attributes of dimensions, text and other objects used toannotate plan views.

l

The Reference Floor and its attributes, which allows you to display information from other floors for reference,along with the current Floor.

6. Click OK to close the dialog.
Saved Plan Views are convenient and powerful, but you don’t have to master everything about them right now. Choosing anappropriate plan view is simply a good step to take before you begin any drawing task.

7

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

Note: When a new plan is created using the Residential Template, both
exterior dimensions and roof planes are generated as soon as walls are
drawn to enclose a room area. By default, the Reference Grid andCrosshairs are also toggled on. To improve the clarity of illustrations inthis tutorial, these are turned off.

DRAWING WALLS
Walls are arguably the most important type of object in Chief Architect because they define most of every building’s
structure. Walls are structural elements in and of themselves; but they are also used to define rooms, which are required inorder to create floor and ceiling platforms.
Note: Whenever possible, default settings should be specified before
objects of that type are drawn. As this is the case, most lessons in thisguide begin with a Setting the Default section. This lesson is unique inthat it begins with drawing an object in order to demonstrate what
defaults do.

When a new plan is created using the Residential Template, the Reference Grid displays and both exterior dimensions androof planes are generated as soon as walls are drawn to enclose a room area. For the purposes of this tutorial, these areturned off.
l

To turn on/off the Reference Grid, select View>Reference Grid.

l

To turn off/on Auto Exterior Dimensions, see To set dimension defaults for locating walls on page 20, below.

l

To turn off/on Auto Rebuild Roofs, see Auto Rebuild Roofs on page 136.

l

To turn on/off the Crosshairs, select View> Crosshairs.

To draw a wall
1. When drawing a structure’s perimeter walls, it is recommended that you select Edit> Snap Settings> make sure
Grid Snaps are turned on. You may choose to disable them, though, once the shell walls are in position.
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wallfrom the menu or click the corresponding toolbar button, thenclick and drag to draw a line from right to left.
3. As you draw a wall, its length displays in two places: below the wall and in the Status Bar at the bottom of thescreen:8

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. The wall’s angle is also shown in the Status Bar. Wall angles are restricted to 15° increments, which makes drawing
straight walls easy; however, you can toggle Angle Snaps on and off by selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
Snaps
or pressing the F10 key.
5. When the wall is between 13 and 14 feet long and its angle is described as 180°, release the mouse button to create
the wall.
6. As you draw walls, do not worry about their exact length. In Chief Architect, walls can be sketched out at theirapproximate lengths, allowing you to think creatively rather than focus on entering exact values. Once walls are inplace, they can be positioned precisely using dimensions, which will be described later.

ZOOMING AND PANNING
Chief Architect plans can vary considerably in size, and often contain objects that are very large and those that are verysmall. You can control what objects are on-screen and how much detail is visible at any time by zooming and panning.
There are a number of ways to zoom and pan in the program, but one of the easiest is to use the scroll wheel on yourmouse: scroll to zoom in or out, click and drag to pan.

To use the Zoom and Undo Zoom tools
1. For a closer view of a certain area, click the Zoom

tool, click and drag a box around the area you want to see indetail, and release the mouse button. That area fills the screen.
2. To return to the previous zoom factor, select Window> Undo Zoom
3. Select Window> Fill Window Building Only.

to center your plan on screen.

4. To center all objects in the current view on screen, including the Living Area label and dimensions, select Window>
Fill Window.

9Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

WORKING WITH WALL TYPE DEFINITIONS
Zoom in on the wall in your plan so you can see its layers and notice its appearance. The lines and colors represent thelayers of the wall assembly, including its siding, sheathing, framing, and drywall. All of these characteristics are part of thewall’s Wall Type Definition.

To specify a wall’s Wall Type
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the wall to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button and go to the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog. Notice:l

The Wall Type name, “Siding-6”.

l

The 3D preview. Click and drag in the preview window to rotate its contents.

l

Click the Show Plan View

button above the preview.

3. Click the Wall Type drop-down and note that there are numerous other wall types available. Select a different wall
type and notice the object preview, which changes to show the new wall type. Switch back to “Siding-6”.
4. Click the Define button to open the Wall Type Definitions dialog. Notice that the wall type is composed of multiple
layers with different materials and specific thicknesses.
5. Click the Cancel button to close both dialogs without making any changes.
The Wall Type Definitions dialog can also be accessed from the program menu.

To create a new Wall Type1. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types, then select “Siding-6” from the drop-down list at the top left corner ofthe dialog.
2. Click the Copy button, then type a short, descriptive Name for the new Wall Type. Here, “Stone-6” is used.
3. Specify a new Thickness for Layer 1 of this Wall Type:l

Click in the Thickness cell for Layer 1.

lType 3" in the text field, then press the Tab key.

4. Specify a new Material for Layer 1 of this Wall Type: click in the Material, Pattern, or Texture cell for Layer 1 toopen the Select Material dialog.

10Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser. In the
Browser, a wide variety of items useful for creating a detailed design can be found. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS
panel, however, the content is filtered to list materials only.
lWhen accessed from a specification dialog, the content is further filtered to show the folder that the selectedmaterial is found in. Active filters are listed in rectangular shapes directly under the Search field at the top of
the panel.

lHere, the Lap siding folder is used as a filter. You can mouse over its shape to see its location in the Folders
list in a tool tip. To search for materials in other folders, click on the Lap filter shape to remove it.

l

In the Search field, type "Stone" and notice that a drop-down list finds numerous items that match this search
word, including downloadable Manufacturer
catalogs. You can click on any of these items to use it as afilter. Here, though, press the Enter key to search for what you've typed as a Textlfilter.

In the Folders panel, navigate the tree list to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Masonry & Stone.

11Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Wallsl

Scroll down as needed to find the "Stacked Stone" material. Click on it to select it and click OK.

6. Remove the Fill from Layer 1 of this Wall Type:l

Click in the Fill cell for Layer 1.

l

In the Layer Fill Style dialog, select “No Pattern” from the Type drop-down list, then click OK.

7. With the “Stacked Stone” layer still selected, click the Insert Below button. A copy of the selected layer is createddirectly below the original. Specify “Thinset Mortar” as the Material, a Fill of “No Pattern”, and a Thickness of 3/8".
8. Repeat step 6 to create a new layer below the “Thinset Mortar”. Specify a Material of “Metal Lath”, a Fill of “No
Pattern”, and a Thickness of 1/16".
lCreate one more layer below the “Housewrap” layer. Specify a Material of “Insulation Sheet”, a Fill of “No
Pattern”, and a Thickness of 1".

l

To help distinguish your new custom wall type from other walls, you can give its Main Layer a "Solid" Fillwith a distinct color, such as yellow.

12Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

9. Specify how this Wall Type bears on foundation walls:l

Under the wall layer table, select the Wall Properties tab.

l

Select "1 - Stacked Stone" from the Foundation to Exterior of Layer drop-down list.

10. Click OK to close the dialog and create your new Wall Type.
11. When you are finished, select File> Save.

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whendrawing the shell of a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.

To change the Default Exterior Wall Type1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of “Walls” toexpand the category, select "Exterior Wall", then click the Edit button.

2. On the WALL TYPES panel of Exterior Wall Defaults dialog:lNote that the selected Wall Type is “Siding-6”.

lSelect “Stone-6” from the drop-down list, then click OK.

3. Click the Done button to close the Default Settings dialog.
4. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Walland draw another wall connected to the left end of the existing

wall, dragging in an upward direction about 10 feet. Notice:13

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. The two walls snap together, forming an intersection.
6. Even though this wall and the wall to its right were drawn using the same tool, they have different Wall Types
because a change was made to the default settings after the first wall was drawn.
7. Select the vertical “Siding-6” wall and click the Open Object

edit button. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall

Specification dialog, select “Stone-6” from the Wall Type drop-down list and click OK.
The Exterior Wall tool is used to draw a single wall type, like Siding-6 or Stone-6. Occasionally, though, walls are made oftwo different wall types: one built above the other. In Chief Architect, this kind of wall configuration is referred to as a
Pony Wall.

To specify the Default Pony Wall
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, expand the “Walls” category, select “Pony Wall”, and click the Edit button.

2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Pony Wall Defaults dialog, select “Siding-6” as the Upper Wall Type and “Stone6” as the Lower Wall Type.
3. Specify the Elevation of Lower Wall Top as 20".
4. Specify how you would like these walls to display in plan view. Here, the Upper Wall is used.
5. Click OK.
The default floor structures can be set for different categories of rooms in the Room Defaults dialogs. These are considered
critical because they influence the overall height of a structure. While not critical, the default floor and ceiling finishes canalso be set in these dialogs. See "To set flooring defaults" on page 218 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

To set the default floor structures
1. In the Default Settings dialog, expand the “Floors and Rooms” category, select “Floor/Ceiling Platform”, and click
the Edit button.
2. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, click the Edit button to the right of the Floor Structure label.

14

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. In the Floor Structure Specification dialog:l

Notice that Layer 1 is composed of 3/4" OSB sheets.

l

Click on the Layer 2 line item and notice that under the Structure heading below, is composed of a fir framingmaterial and that its structure Type is "I-Joist".

lChange Layer 2’s Type to “Lumber” and in the layers table, change its Thickness 11 1/4" to represent floor
joists of conventional 2x12 lumber, then click OK.

4. The Ceiling Structure can be edited in a similar manner; however, it will not be changed in this example.
5. Click OK to return to the Default Settings dialog, then select "Room Types" and click the Edit button to open the
Room Types dialog.
6. Notice the many Available Room Types that can be assigned to rooms in a plan. Room Types will be explored in"Room Types" on page 34 of the Interior Walls Tutorial.
7. For example, select “Garage” from the list of room types and click the Edit button.
8. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Garage Room Type Defaults dialog:l

The default floor structure for Garage, Porch, and Slab room types can be set here.

l

In this example, 4" of concrete will be used so no changes are needed.

9. Click Cancel and to return to the Default Settings dialog.
When the exterior walls are finished, they will form the shell of Floor 1; so now is also a good time to set up important
structural default settings in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog.

15

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

To set the 1st Floor Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow next to "Floors and Rooms";lClick the arrow next to Floor Levels".

lSelect "1st Floor", and click the Edit button.

2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the 1st Floor Defaults dialog:
3. Specify the Ceiling Height as 97 1/8".
4. Notice that the Floor Structure of 12" is drawn from the floor structure set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults
dialog.
5. Click OK and then Done to apply your change and close both dialogs.
6. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

Note: The default Floor Height for Floor 1 cannot be changed. It isalways 0.

Although dimensions are not structural objects, it is a good idea to set up how they locate structural objects as well. See "Tocreate automatic exterior dimension lines" on page 22 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial, below.

DRAWING EXTERIOR WALLS
When drawing walls, do not try to size or position them precisely - they can be more easily positioned after they are created.
Note: The “Auto Rebuild Roofs” and "Auto Refresh Exterior
Dimensions" options have been turned off in this tutorial to simplify thedisplay of the building in plan view.

The first two walls drawn in this plan were created using the Exterior Wall tool and the remaining walls will be Pony Walls

To draw exterior walls
1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Pony Wall, then click and drag a wall from the top of the vertical wall, extending

about 28’ to the left.
2. Walls can be drawn in two ways:lLeft-click, drag, and release to draw a wall. Place the pointer over an existing wall end and repeat to create a
new wall section connected to the previous one.

l

Right-click, drag, and release. Move the pointer to a new location and click once to draw a new wall section
connected to the previous one. Continue clicking to create more walls.

16Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. Continue drawing walls, creating a rough outline of the building’s exterior, as shown in the following image:l

Exact dimensions are not important yet, but keep the final size of the structure in mind as you draw. The
overall lengths of this building’s sides are approximately 40’.

l

It is helpful to draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction to ensure the proper orientation of wall surfaces.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CREATING ROOM DEFINITION
When the exterior walls completely enclose an area, room definition is established and:l

A Living Area label that states the enclosed area’s size is created.

lA set of Auto Exterior Dimensions is created around the exterior walls.

l

A roof is automatically generated.

When a room is defined, floor and ceiling platforms are also automatically created within it.

To confirm a room’s structure
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in an empty space in the room to select it. When a room is selected, it

will become highlighted.
2. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the STRUCTURE panel, notice that the Ceiling Height is 97 1/8": the value set in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog.
4. Also note that the Floor Structure matches what was set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, then click
Cancel.
It is important to remember that in order for a room to be created, there can be no gaps in the walls that surround it. There
are a number of ways to create openings in walls, however, and these will be discussed in the Doors and Windows tutorial.
See also: Interior Walls on page 30.
Rooms are discussed in further detail in the Interior Walls and Interior Design Tutorials. See "Room Types" on page 34 of
the Interior Walls Tutorial and "Interior Design Tutorials" on page 188 of the Interior Design Tutorials Tutorial.

17Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

CREATING 3D VIEWS
As you draw walls in plan view, a 3D model is also being developed. Create a 3D view of the model to see how it looks sofar.

To create a camera view
1. Select Window> Fill Window

to zoom out as needed to fill the view window with the entire drawing.

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera, then click and drag to draw a camera inside the area

enclosed by walls.

l

The point where you click (A) defines the location of the camera.

l

The line created as you drag (B) defines the direction of perspective.

l

The point where the mouse is released (C) is the camera’s focal point.

3. Release the mouse button to create the 3D camera view and notice that the program has automatically generated afloor platform and a ceiling in the area enclosed by the walls.

18

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. Notice, too, the mouse pointer icon

. This indicates that the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool is active.

l

Click and drag the mouse in a circular direction and notice that the camera’s direction rotates in response.

l

If you select a different tool, Mouse Orbit Camera will become disabled. Select 3D> Move Camera With
Mouse> Mouse-Orbit Camera
to enable it again.

5. To return to plan view, select File> Close View.
The structure of this room can be examined in more detail in a different type of camera view: a Back Clipped Cross Section.

To create a Back Clipped Cross Section
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section, then:l

Click and drag vertically to create a camera inside the bump out at the bottom right of the drawing.

lLimit the length of the camera line to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera either
straight up or straight down on-screen.

19Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. Zoomin on the bottom left corner of the structure so the wall and floor layers can be seen.

3. Select CAD> Dimension> Tape Measure, then click and drag to draw temporary dimension lines that measure

the depths of these layers.

4. The distances between lines in the wall correspond to the layers of its Wall Type Definition.
5. The distances between lines in the floor correspond to the layers of the Floor Structure and Floor Finish Definitions
set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog
6. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

CREATING DIMENSION LINES
Dimension lines can be used to measure and position a wide variety of objects, including walls. A selection of automaticallygenerated and manually drawn dimensions is available.

To set dimension defaults for locating walls
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click the arrow next to “Dimension” to expand the category, then select“Dimensions” and click the Edit button.

20

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. Dimensions are an example of annotation tools that support multiple saved defaults. This guide will regularly
explore multiple saved defaults and how they can be used, but for now note that "Plan Dimension Defaults" isselected and click the Edit button.
3. On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, under the "Exterior" heading, the Auto Refresh
check box allows Auto Exterior Dimensions to stay up-to-date as changes are made to the model. For clarity, Auto
Refresh is not used in the illustrations in this tutorial.
4. On the LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR panel, note that there two options for locating Walls: at their Surfaces and at theirWall Dimension Layer.

l

The Surfaces option directs Auto Exterior Dimensions to locate wall surfaces, which is helpful when drawing
an existing structure.

l

The Wall Dimension Layer option allows you to specify a particular layer in each Wall Type for dimensions
to locate.

5. Leave Wall Dimension Layer selected and click Cancel, then click Done to close both dialogs.
6. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types

and in the Wall Type Definitions dialog:

21

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Wallsl

Select “Siding-6” from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog.

lSelect the Wall Properties tab located below the wall layers table.

lNote that Dimension to Exterior of Layer is set to “4: Fir Framing 2”. This means that dimensions will locate
the outside of this wall type’s framing layer.

lClick Cancel to close the dialog without making any changes.

To create automatic exterior dimension lines
1. Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions> Auto Exterior Dimensions

2. Zoom.

in on the far left corner at the front of the building.

3. Note that the dimension lines locate the walls at the outside of their framing layer.

22

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

ADJUSTING WALL POSITIONSWith the perimeter walls in place, you can adjust their position. There are several ways to do this, but the fastest and mostaccurate uses dimension lines.

To move walls using dimensions
1. Begin by selecting Window> Fill Window Building Only
2. Click the Select Objects.

button, then click on a wall that you want to move. Here, the horizontal wall at thelower left of the plan is selected.
3. Click on a dimension line that indicates how far the selected wall is from another wall. There are a couple of ways todetermine which dimensions can be used for this purpose:lMove the selected wall and see which dimensions update.

lMove your pointer over a dimension. If it is an associated dimension, the icon will change to a Pointing Hand.

4. With the Pointing Hand

icon visible, click on the associated dimension and enter a new value.

lRemember: Type an apostrophe to denote feet and quotes to denote inches.

l

If neither apostrophes nor quotes are included, inches will be used.

23

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

5. Press the Enter key to move the wall to the newly specified distance.

6. Repeat this process, proceeding in a clockwise direction: select the vertical wall on the left.

7. Mouse over a dimension line that shows how far the selected wall is from another wall. When the Pointing Hand
icon is visible, click, then type in a new distance value.

24Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

8. Press the Enter key to move the wall to the specified distance.

When using dimensions to reposition walls, work aroundthe structure in the same direction: either clockwise orcounterclockwise.

When you are finished, your dimensions should match those in the following image:

9. Remember to Save

your work.

Dimensions can also be used to change the length of a selected wall.

To resize a wall using dimensions
1. Select a wall that you would like to resize.
2. Move your mouse pointer over a dimension line that states the length of the selected wall.
3. When the Pointing Handlicon displays, click on the associated dimension and then:Select Move Both Ends

to resize the selected wall by adjusting the position of both of its endpoints

equally.

25

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Wallsl

If the selected wall is oriented horizontally, select Move Left End
select Move Right Endlto move only the wall’s left endpoint or

to move only its right endpoint.

If the selected wall is oriented vertically, select Move Top End
select Move Bottom End

to move only the wall’s top endpoint or

to move only its bottom endpoint.

4. Type the desired length in the text field and press the Enter key.
5. The wall will resize according to the option you selected. If an end moves, any walls connected to that end will also
move.
Although using dimensions is generally the fastest and most accurate way to move walls, you can also move them using
their edit handles.

To move walls using their edit handles
1. Click the Select Objects

tool then click on an exterior wall to select it.

2. Click and drag the Move edit handle that displays at the position along the wall where you clicked. Walls can be
moved perpendicular to the direction that they are drawn.
3. As you move the wall, the dimension lines that indicate how far it is from other walls will update.
4. When you are finished positioning walls, remember to Save

your work.

If you have difficulty positioning a wall at a particular location, try zooming in on it using either the Zoom

or Zoom In

tool or by scrolling with your mouse wheel.
You can also use the Arrow keys to nudge a selected wall or other object up, down, left, or right on-screen.
You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Walls tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text calling out features of the drawing. With the exterior walls in place, some basic
annotations can be added.
As with other objects, before adding annotations it is a good idea to make sure that the defaults are set up to meet yourneeds. Annotations are special, though, in that it is possible to create more than one saved default, each for a different
purpose. In addition, the defaults for different annotation tools can be grouped together into a Default Set, as well as set up
to display in some plan views but not others.
As noted earlier, the Working Plan View uses the “1/4” Scale Annotations”. See Using Plan Views on page 6.

To set the rich text defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside “Text, Callouts and Markers” to expand the category.

l

Select “Rich Text” and click the Edit button.

26

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

2. In the Saved Rich Text Defaults dialog, which opens next:lNotice that there are a number of different Saved Rich Text Defaults set up for particular drawing scales andtasks.

l“Plan Rich Text Defaults” is selected in the list because it is the Saved Default that is currently active.

lRecall that the “Working Plan View” uses “Plan Rich Text Defaults”, as well.

lWith the “Plan Rich Text Defaults” selected, click the Edit button.

3. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog:l

On the RICH TEXT panel, click the Uppercase

button.

l

On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the “Text” layer by default.

4. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To add rich text annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the view, outside the bottom left corner of the structure.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:l

Notice that the Uppercase button is highlighted, indicating that it is active.

l

In the text field, type the following: 2x6 exterior walls 24" OC U.N.O. and notice that all of the letters display
in uppercase.

3. Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x6, then click the Uppercase
from the selection. The rest of the text remains uppercase.

27

button to remove that attribute

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

4. Notice that U.N.O. is underlined in red. This indicates that Chief Architect does not recognize this spelling and canbe addressed in a moment.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.
6. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its square Move edit handle to adjust its
position.

There are several ways to fix a spelling error. One way is to add the word to the program’s dictionary

To remove a spelling error indicator
1. Select the newly created text and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, right-click on the abbreviation U.N.O.
3. Select Learn Spelling from the contextual menu, then click OK.
4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, confirm that your Chic Cottage folder is selected as the Save location.

28

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Exterior Walls

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Shell.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for starting a new plan and laying out exterior walls. It also discusses the importantdefault settings associated with starting a new plan. These critical defaults include the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults, 1st
Floor Defaults, Wall Defaults, and Dimension Defaults, and they are considered critical because they determine the size ofthe structure.
To save a new plan file5

To examine a saved plan view’s settings

7

To draw a wall8

To use the Zoom and Undo Zoom tools

9

To specify a wall’s Wall Type10To create a new Wall Type10

To change the Default Exterior Wall Type13

To specify the Default Pony Wall

14

To set the default floor structures

14

To set the 1st Floor Defaults

16

To draw exterior walls

16

To confirm a room’s structure

17

To create a camera view18

To create a Back Clipped Cross Section

19

To set dimension defaults for locating walls

20

To create automatic exterior dimension lines

22

To move walls using dimensions

23

To resize a wall using dimensions

25

To move walls using their edit handles

26

To set the rich text defaults

26

To add rich text annotations

27

To remove a spelling error indicator28

To save a plan revision

28

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 1 - Exterior Walls
Why is it good practice to create file revisions?
l

Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of yourwork that you can refer back to when needed.

29

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

What are default settings and why are they important?
l

The initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default Settings.

lSetting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing.

Name a setting that is associated with a Saved Plan View.
l

The floor level, Default Set (Layer Set and Saved Defaults), and Reference Floor are all part of a Saved Plan View.

What important defaults should you set up before drawing exterior walls?
l

Before drawing the exterior walls of a plan, set the defaults for the Exterior Wall and other Wall Tools.

l

The Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults, structural Floor 1 Defaults, and Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults should be set
in advance, as well.

Why are structural defaults considered critical?
l

Structural defaults are considered critical because they affect the overall height of the structure.

What is room definition and why is it important?
lWhen walls completely enclose an area, room definition is established. Floor and ceiling platforms are automaticallycreated within it and a Living Area label that states the enclosed area’s size is created.

What are two different ways to move walls?
lWalls can be moved using dimension lines: Select a wall, click on a dimension line that reports its distance fromanother wall, then type in the desired distance and press the Enter key.

l

A selected wall can be also moved by clicking and dragging its Move edit handle.

When creating a new wall type, why might you specify a unique color for the Main Layer?
lGiving a wall type’s Main Layer a distinct color helps distinguish your new custom wall type from other walls.

What can you see in a cross section view that camera views do not show?
l

In a cross section view, you can see structural information like floor platform depth and wall thickness.

How do you change the appearance of some of the characters in a Rich Text object?
lHighlight the characters that you want to customize so they are selected, then make the desired changes.

What is one way to prevent a word or abbreviation from being flagged as misspelled?
l

Add the word or abbreviation to the program’s dictionary.

Interior Walls
With the exterior walls in place, interior walls can be added to create rooms.

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
The previous lesson, Exterior Walls, explained how to draw and position the exterior walls of the main entry level of astructure in Chief Architect. This lesson describes best practices for creating interior rooms. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips

31

Setting the Defaults

32

Using Plan Views

32

30

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

Drawing Interior Walls

32

Room Types

34

Modifying Interior Wall Types

39

Using Room Dividers

41

Positioning Interior Walls

42

Working with Wall Connections

45

Adding Annotations

46

Creating Revisions

47

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Exterior Walls tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-shell and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Shell.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Select File> Open Recent Files and notice that CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT is included in the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is also a convenient way to resume work on files you have been working on; however, it is not analternative to knowing where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "FileManagement" on page 4 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create interior rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglWhen rooms are subdivided or merged, attributes from the larger room will be inherited by the smaller one.

l

Select multiple objects for editing by holding down the Shift key.

ContentlLike exterior walls, customized interior wall types can be exported and imported in a template plan as well as added to
the Library for future use.

Interfacel

Use Object Snap Indicators like MidpointlFloor Overviews

and Intersection

snaps to position and align walls with accuracy.

are a useful way to view the relationships between room spaces.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlF6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close Viewl

Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

31

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whendrawing interior walls, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
The Room Type Defaults dialogs can be used to set critical floor and ceiling structure definitions, as well as non-criticaldefault finish materials for various room types. See "To set the default floor structures" on page 14 of the Exterior Walls
Tutorial and "To set flooring defaults" on page 218 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.
The Floor Defaults dialogs allow you to set up important structural defaults on a floor by floor basis. See "To set the 1st
Floor Defaults" on page 16 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Before drawing interior walls, make sure that the Default Interior Wall meets your needs. See "Working with Wall TypeDefinitions" on page 10 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To set the Interior Wall Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Walls" to expand the category.

l

Select "Interior Wall" and click the Edit button.

2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Interior Wall Defaults dialog, the selected wall type is named "Interior-4". Clickthe Define button.
3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog, notice that it is composed of 2x4 framing with drywall on each side.
4. This wall type works well for most purposes, so click Cancel and then Done to close both dialogs.
There are several options for controlling how dimension lines locate interior walls that should be set before dimensions tothese walls are drawn. See Interior Walls on page 30.
When adding interior walls, you may find it helpful to select the Auto Refresh option for Auto Exterior Dimensions. Thiscan be done in the Auto Exterior Dimension Defaults dialog. See To set Dimension Defaults on page 99.
As with other objects, you should set the appropriate text defaults before annotations are created. See "To set the rich text
defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for drawing interior walls, as it did when drawing exterior walls in the Exterior
Walls tutorial. See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

DRAWING INTERIOR WALLSWith the exterior walls in position, you can add interior walls to create multiple rooms.

32Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To define rooms using interior walls
1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall, then move your mouse pointer over the horizontal wall at thelower left of the structure. When your mouse is near the midpoint of that wall, click and drag upward to the backwall of the structure.

lWhen Object Snaps

are enabled, a red Midpoint

Snap Indicator will display when your mouse is over the

midpoint of the wall.
l

As with exterior walls, though, it’s not necessary to position interior walls exactly as you draw: they can be
adjusted later on.

2. Draw a second vertical interior wall to the right of the first one.

33

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Finally, draw a horizontal wall across the middle of the structure:

4. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

The floor plan has been divided into six separate zones, which can now be assigned Room Types that reflect how the spaces
will be used.

ROOM TYPES
Rooms in Chief Architect are given special attributes when they are assigned a Room Type. For example, porches use aconcrete floor material and have a ceiling and roof, while decks use floor planking and have no ceiling or roof.

To specify a room type
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in the room at the top left corner of the structure to select it.

2. When the room is selected, it will become highlighted and you can click the Open Object
specification dialog.

34

edit button to open its

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Kitchen" from the Room Type drop-down list.

4. Repeat steps 1-3 to create a Dining room, Living room, Entry, Bedroom, and Garage, as shown in the following
image:

5. Notice that the horizontal wall snaps at intersecting walls and that a new, separate wall segment is drawn on theother side.
6. Remember to Save

your work.

Differences in these rooms’ properties can be seen in 3D views.

35

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To view room types in 3D
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section, then:l

Click and drag vertically to create a camera inside the Entry room.

lLimit the length of the camera’s line of sight to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera
either straight up or straight down on-screen.

lNotice that the Garage has a different floor structure than the Entry or Living rooms:

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview

to see the differences in floor finish

materials.

3. Select File> Close View in both views to return to plan view.
The six room areas created thus far can be subdivided further to create additional rooms.

36

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

To subdivide room areas
1. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall, then click and drag from right to left to divide the Bedroom into

two separate rooms.

lNotice that the new room inherits the Room Type of the larger room that it was created in.

2. Draw a vertical interior wall that divides the new, smaller Bedroom in two.
3. On the left side of the Garage, draw one more vertical interior wall straight up from that room’s left exterior wall.
l

The new wall and the exterior wall that it’s collinear with are aligned at the exterior surface of their framing layers.
This creates a small jog on the interior that will be easily corrected later on. See To align collinear walls on page45, below.

4. Click the Select Objects

button, then assign room types to the new rooms as shown in the following image:37

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

In the above image, note that a number of changes have been made to the room labels.

To control the display of room labels
1. Click the Select Objects

button, click on a room label to select it, then click the Delete

edit button.

2. To restore a room label that has been deleted, select the room in question and click the Open Object

edit button.

On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, check Show Room Label and click OK.
3. To change the name of a room such as the Entry, select it and click the Open Object

edit button. On the

GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, type a Room Name like "Foyer" in the text field and click OK.
4. Room labels can also be rotated and moved using their edit handles. Select the Foyer Closet's label, then click anddrag the triangular Rotate edit handle to display it vertically instead of horizontally. Click and drag the square Moveedit handle at the center of the label to adjust its position.
5. Open the Active Layer Display Options side window, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.
l

Click on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l

If it is not open, select View> Active Layer Display Options.

6. Turn off the display of the "Rooms, Interior Dimensions" layer:lType "room" into the Name Filter field.

l

The "Room Labels" layer controls the overall display of room labels.

l

The "Interior Area", "Interior Dimensions", and "Standard Area" layers control what room size information
displays underneath the room name.

l

Click in the Disp column to remove the check mark for the "Rooms, Interior Dimensions" layer to turn its display
off, then click OK.

7. When room labels look the way you want, Save

your work.

Two rooms can be merged into one by either moving or deleting the wall that separates them. The smaller room will inherit
properties from the larger one.

To merge room areas
1. Draw a horizontal Straight Interior Wallto divide the Closet to the right of the Foyer into two separate Closet

rooms.
2. Select the vertical wall dividing the closets from the Foyer, click the Add Breakselected wall at the intersection of the horizontal wall dividing the two Closets.

38

edit button, then click on theChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Select and resize the vertical wall separating the upper Closet from the Foyer:lClick and drag the square Resize handle located at the bottom end of the wall and drag it upward until it snaps tothe vertical wall separating the Foyer and Living rooms.

l

The upper Closet room disappears and inherits the Room Type of the larger Foyer room that it merged into.

4. Remember to Saveas you work.

MODIFYING INTERIOR WALL TYPESInterior walls are typically built using 2 x 4 stock. Some interior walls, however, need to be thicker to accommodate
plumbing or to provide support for the floor above.

To specify a different wall type
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the horizontal wall separating the Garage from the Bath.

2. If the wall has merged with the one to its left, use the Add Breakcorner of the Bath, as described above.

39

edit tool to add a wall break at the bottom left

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Next, hold down the Shift key and click on the wall separating the Garage from the Foyer. This will select the twowalls as a group.
4. Click the Open Object
ledit button, and on the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

Click the arrow next to the Vector View
and select Show Plan View

button above the object preview on the right side of the dialog

from the drop-down list.

lClick the Wall Type drop-down and choose "Fire-6" from the list.

lNotice that the preview updates to show the new, thicker wall type.

5. Click the Define button and note that the exterior layer material is a fire-rated drywall with a Solid red fill color.
lChange the Fill of the Main Layer to a red color, too.

l

Click OK to close both dialogs.

It is sometimes necessary to flip a wall’s layers from one side to the other.

To reverse a wall’s layers
1. Zoom in on the intersection of the two Fire-6 walls and notice that the red fire-rated drywall layer is facing awayfrom the Garage.
2. Use the Shift key to select the two Fire-6 walls as a group, as described above.

3. Click the Reverse Layers

edit button to flip the two walls’ layers so that the fire-rated drywall faces the Garage.

40Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

Because the fire-rated drywall is thicker than the regular drywall, it will be slightly out of alignment with the wall to its
left when its layers are reversed. You can fix this by selecting the Fire-6 wall and gently dragging its Move handle
slightly downward.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

USING ROOM DIVIDERS
Rooms are not always divided by a physical wall. For example, two separate room areas may be suggested by a change inthe ceiling height or flooring material. In Chief Architect, a Room Divider or invisible wall can be used to define rooms
without creating an actual wall.
A Room Divider is drawn the same way other walls are: select Build> Wall> Room Divider, then click and drag in any

direction.

To replace a wall with a room divider
1. Select the horizontal wall separating the Entry from the Living room and drag the edit handle on its left end to theright until it snaps to the corner of the Bath. Notice that either the Entry’s or the Living room's label disappears asthat room merges with the larger room.
2. Select Build> Wall> Room Divider, then click and drag horizontally across the space where the edited wallused to be: from the top left corner of the Entry to the bottom left corner of the Bath.
3. A single dashed line representing a Room Divider is created, and both rooms have their original labels.
An existing wall can also be modified to serve as a Room Divider.

To change a wall into a room divider
1. Click on the vertical wall dividing the Kitchen and Dining rooms to select it.
2. Click the Add Breakedit button, then click on the selected wall at the bottom right corner of the Kitchen to

divide the wall into two segments at that location.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the wall segment separating the Kitchen from the Living room toselect it.
4. Click the Make Wall(s) Invisible

edit button and notice that the wall is now represented by a pair of dashedlines.
5. With the wall still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

6. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

41

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Wallsl

Notice that the Thickness is 4 1/2" and that Invisible is checked.

lCheck No Locate, as well, to prevent the Room Divider from being located by Auto Exterior Dimensions.

7. On the WALL TYPES panel of the dialog, select "Room Divider" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
8. Return to the GENERAL panel of the dialog and:lNote that the Thickness of the wall is reduced to 0" and that the object preview on the right side of the dialog
box now shows the wall as it looks in plan view.

lClick OK.

9. Remember to Save

your work.

POSITIONING INTERIOR WALLS
Like exterior walls, interior walls can be moved using their dimensions or their edit handles. It is a good idea to make surethat Dimension Defaults are set so that they meet your needs. See "To set dimension defaults for locating walls" on page 20of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
The Interior Dimension tool is ideal for laying out interior walls because unlike other Dimension Tools, it always locatesexterior walls on their interior sides. This allows you to easily see the sizes of all of your rooms’ interiors and adjust them as
needed.

To set dimension defaults to locate interior walls
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click the arrow next to "Dimension" to expand the category, then select"Dimensions" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog:l

Notice that there are multiple saved defaults for different scales as well as different purposes such as Electricaland Framing plans.

lNote that "Plan Dimension Defaults" is listed as the Currently Active Dimension Defaults selected and that it isselected in the list.

lClick the Edit button.

3. On the LOCATE INTERIOR panel of the Plan Dimension Defaults dialog, notice:lWalls are located at their Main Layer Inside, which is typically the framing layer, by default. They can be instead
be located at their Surfaces, which is helpful when drawing an as-built structure.

42

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Wallsl

There is only one Wall Option for locating interior walls: Display Wall Widths. When checked, Interior
Dimension lines will measure the thicknesses of interior walls; when unchecked, wall widths are not measured.

lThese settings can be left unchanged for this example.

4. Click Cancel and then Done to return to plan view.

To draw an interior dimension line
1. Zoom

out until you can see the front left corner of the front bump-out.

2. Select CAD> Dimension> Interior Dimension, then click and drag from side to side across the interior of the

Garage.

3. Notice that the Auto Exterior Dimension and the Interior Dimension report different lengths for the same wall.
lThis is because Auto Exterior Dimensions locate the outside of the framing by default, while Interior Dimensions
locate the inside of the framing.

l

The difference, 11", is equal to the thickness of the two walls’ framing layers, which are each 5 1/2" thick.

Interior Dimensions can be produced along each wall in a room, or along each wall for all rooms on the current floor, with asingle click.

To dimension an entire room
1. Select Window> Fill Window
2. Click the Select Objects

so the plan fills the extents of the view window.

button, then click in the Entry room to select it.

3. Click the Auto Room Dimension

edit button. A dimension line is generated along each of the walls that define

the Entry.
Interior walls can be located by and repositioned using any type of dimension line. See "Adjusting Wall Positions" on page
23 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Reposition the interior walls in this plan so their dimensions match those in this image:43

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

When your interior walls are in position, you may find it helpful to delete some or all of the dimension lines.

To delete a dimension line
1. Click the Select Objects
2. Click the Delete

button, then click on a dimension line to select it.

edit button, select Edit> Delete, or press the Delete key on the keyboard.

To delete all dimensions in the current view
1. Select CAD> Dimensions> Delete Dimensions

to delete all dimension lines displaying in the current view.

2. If some or all of the dimensions are set to Auto Refresh, the program will confirm that you wish to disable Auto
Refresh.

To delete all dimensions in all plan views at once
1. Select Edit> Delete Objects

to open the Delete Objects dialog.

2. Select the All Rooms On This Floor radio button, then under the CAD heading:l

Check Manual Dimensions to delete manually-drawn dimension lines such as those drawn by the Interior
Dimension
tool.

l

You can also check Automatic Dimensions to delete automatically generated dimension lines such as thosecreated by the Auto Exterior Dimensions
tool. Bear in mind that dimensions as well as the Auto Refresh statein multiple Saved Plan Views will be affected by this option so it is not often recommended.

l

Click the Delete button to delete the specified objects.

lClick the Done button to close the dialog.

44

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

WORKING WITH WALL CONNECTIONS
Wall segments that are collinear but have different Wall Types usually snap together so that the outside of their Main Layers
are aligned. In some situations, though, they can become unaligned. Walls can be easily realigned using their edit handles.

To align collinear walls
1. Zoomin on the left side of the Garage, where the Fire-6 wall meets the exterior walls.

2. Notice that the vertical walls are not perfectly aligned, producing a slight jog:

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Fire-6 wall to select it.

4. Using the square Move edit handle that displays along the wall at the point where you clicked, gently drag the Fire-6
wall slightly to the right.
lWhen Object Snaps

are enabled, a red Intersection

Snap Indicator will display when the inside surfaces of

the two walls meet.
5. When the wall snaps into position, release the mouse button.
6. Select the front wall of the Closet and adjust its position so that the Closet depth is 2’.
With these two collinear walls properly aligned, their intersection can now be adjusted using the Edit Wall Layer
Intersection edit handles.

To use the Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit handles
1. Select the Fire-6 wall and click the Edit Wall Layer Intersection

edit handle.

2. Click and drag the edit handle located in the middle of the Main Layer and drag it downward until it reaches theoutside surface of the horizontal wall’s Main Layer.

45

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

3. Repeat step 2 with the edit handle located in the middle of the red fire-rated drywall.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. With the interior walls in place,
additional annotations can be added.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults are in use as they were in the Exterior Walls tutorial. See "To
set the rich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To add rich text annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the view, near the top left corner of the Dining room.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:lType: 2x4 exterior walls 16" OC U.N.O.

l

Notice that U.N.O. is not flagged as a spelling error like it was in the Exterior Walls tutorial. See To remove aspelling error indicator on page 28.

l

Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x6, then click the Uppercase
from the selection.

lClick OK.

3. Adjust the newly created Rich Text object’s position using its Move edit handle.
4. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

46

button to remove that attribute

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Walls

You can continue working on this plan in the Multiple Floors tutorial. You can also learn about applying wall and flooringmaterials in the Finish Materials tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Interior Walls.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for drawing interior walls and creating interior rooms.
To set the Interior Wall Defaults

32

To define rooms using interior walls

33

To specify a room type34

To view room types in 3D36

To subdivide room areas

37

To control the display of room labels

38

To merge room areas

38

To specify a different wall type39

To reverse a wall’s layers

40

To replace a wall with a room divider

41

To change a wall into a room divider

41

To set dimension defaults to locate interior walls

42

To draw an interior dimension line

43

To dimension an entire room43

To delete a dimension line

44

To delete all dimensions in the current view44

To delete all dimensions in all plan views at once44

To align collinear walls

45

To use the Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit handles

45

To add rich text annotations

46

To save a plan revision

47

47

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 2 - Interior Walls
What are some reasons that is it helpful to specify Room Types?
lRooms in Chief Architect are given special attributes when they are assigned a Room Type. For example, porches use
a concrete floor material and have a ceiling and roof, while decks use floor planking and have no ceiling or roof.

What are two differences between the "Kitchen" and "Garage" Room Types?
lKitchens have floor finish layers and framed floor platform by default, while Garages have a slab floor with no finish.

Where can you change the information that displays at the bottom of room labels?
l

You can change the room size information that displays in a room label in the Layer Display Options dialog. The"Interior Area", "Interior Dimensions", and "Standard Area" layers control what information displays underneath theroom name.

How are Room Dividers useful?
l

The Room Divider tool can be used to define rooms without creating an actual, physical wall.

l

Once separated, the rooms can be assigned separate traits like different ceiling heights or flooring materials.

What is the thickness of a Room Divider?
l

By default, Room Dividers have a thickness of 0".

How do Auto Exterior Dimensions and Interior Dimensions locate walls differently?
l

The Interior Dimension tool always locates exterior walls on their interior sides, while Auto Exterior Dimensions andother dimension tools locate exterior walls on their exterior sides.

What are two ways to delete dimension lines?
lDimension lines can be deleted individually using the Delete edit button or key on the keyboard.

lThey can also be deleted in groups using the Delete Objects dialog

What type of snapping helps you align two walls so they are collinear?
l

Object Snaps, and particularly Intersection Snaps can be used to make walls collinear.

What edit tool allows you to adjust how wall layers meet at an intersection?
l

The Edit Wall Layer Intersection edit tool presents an edit handle for each wall layer, letting you adjust how each one
builds into an intersection with another wall.

Multiple Floors
Creating new floors in a plan is easy; but whenever possible, it is best to do so after the first floor plan has been finalized.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding floors to a design. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips

49

Setting the Defaults

50

Using Plan Views

50

48

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Creating New Floor Levels

50

Navigating and Displaying Floor Levels

52

Creating a Foundation

52

Aligning Walls Between Floors

56

Creating a Wall Legend

58

Creating Revisions

62

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Walls tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-InteriorWalls and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-InteriorWalls.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add floor levels to a project, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

It is best to add new floors after the walls on Floor 1 are in place.

lSetting Floor and Foundation Defaults as new floors are built saves time and reduces the changes of introducing errors.

lAlign walls between floors using the Align with Floor Abovel

The Copy

and Paste Hold Position

and Align with Floor Below

edit buttons.

commands can be used to align walls and other objects between floors as

well.

InterfacelThere are several ways to navigate multiple floors in a plan: the Up One Floor
the Change Floor/Referencel

Use the Reference Display

and Down One Floor

buttons,

tool, and the Project Browser.
to display walls and other objects located on a floor other than the Current Floor.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlF6 - Fill Windowl

F9 - Reference DisplaylArrow keys - nudge selected objectlCtrl/⌘ + C - Copy

49

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple FloorslAlt + Shift + V - Paste Hold PositionlCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding floors to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
The 2nd Floor Defaults allow you to set the default ceiling height for the floor as well as floor and ceiling structure
definitions. See To add a second floor on page 50.
Foundation Defaults specify the type of foundation to be built as well as important defaults such as wall height and slab
thickness. See Creating a Foundation on page 52.
Foundation default settings can be set in both the Foundation Defaults and Build Foundation dialogs.
As with architectural objects, it is a good idea to set schedule defaults before creating a wall schedule. See To set wallschedule defaults on page 59

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As it did for drawing exterior and interior walls, the Working Plan View will work well for adding new floor levels. See To
examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

CREATING NEW FLOOR LEVELS
A plan file can have up to 30 floors.

To add a second floor
1. Select Build> Floor> Build New Floor.

2. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st floor plan.
lThis option produces a second floor shell using the same wall types as the exterior walls on Floor 1. Walls createdover Pony Walls inherit the upper wall type.

l

You could instead create a blank second floor and then draw the second story walls manually; however, it isusually faster to automatically generate the perimeter walls and then edit them as needed.

3. Click OK to close the New Floor dialog and open the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog.
lNote that the default Rough Ceiling height is 97 1/8" and click OK.

lLater on, this dialog will be used to specify a default floor covering. See "To set flooring defaults by floor" on
page 219 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

50

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

4. Click OK and a floor plan for the second floor is created based on the exterior walls of the first floor plan.

5. You can confirm that the 2nd floor level is now active in the view by looking at the Change Floor/Reference
toolbar button located between the Down

and Up One Floor

buttons in the toolbars.

It’s not uncommon for the upper walls of a home to have a different siding material than the walls below.

To customize the second floor wall type
1. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Typeto open the Wall Type Definitions dialog.

2. At the top left corner of the dialog, select "Siding-6" from the drop-down list and click the Copy button.
3. Name the new wall type "Shingle-6", then:lSpecify a Thickness for Layer 1 of 3/4".

lSpecify the Material for Layer 1 as "Shake - Natural", which you can find in the Select Material dialog bysearching or browsing to Chief Architect Core Catalogs at Materials> Roofing> Shakes and Shingles> Wood.

l

To help distinguish this wall type, change the Fill for Layer 4 to a Solid pale purple color.

l

Click OK to create the new wall type and close the dialog.

4. Shift + select the Siding-6 walls on Floor 2 and click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog, select "Shingle-6" from the drop-down list and clickOK.

51

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

6. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

NAVIGATING AND DISPLAYING FLOOR LEVELS
Now that there is more than one floor level in the plan, it’s important to be able to display and navigate between them.

To navigate between floors levels
1. Click the Down One Floor

button to go to Floor 1.

2. Click the Up One Floor

button to return to Floor 2.

3. Select Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floor/Referenceor click the toolbar button of the same name locatedbetween the Up and Down One Floor buttons to see a list of all of the floors in your plan and choose the one you’d
like to go to.
You can also see a list of all floors in the plan and navigate to any of them in the Project Browser. Select View> Project
Browser, expand the Floor Levels folder, right-click on a floor, and select Open View from the contextual menu.
In addition to the current floor, you can display a second floor for reference in the same view window as the active floor.
See To align walls between floors on page 56, below.
Sometimes, it is helpful to display a different floor in an entirely separate view window. See To copy and paste walls
between floors on page 58.

CREATING A FOUNDATION
When the rooms on Floor 1 have been defined, a foundation can be created beneath them.

52Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a basement foundation
1. Select Build> Floor> Build Foundation. In the Build Foundation dialog. On the FOUNDATION panel:l

Under the Foundation Type heading, select Walls with Footings.

lUnder the Stem Walls heading, change the Minimum StemWall Height to 113 1/8" inches. This will provide
room for standard stud length furred walls of 109 1/8" plus a 4" slab floor.

lUnder the Garage Options heading, leave Garage Floor to Stem Wall Top at 12" but change the Minimum Garage
Height to 37 1/2". This will produce a 12" curb around the garage with a 1 1/2" sill plate and stem walls that
extend 24" below the top of the Garage slab.

lClick OK to close the dialog and create a foundation level for the plan.

2. Select Derive New Foundation Plan From the First Floor Plan and click OK to close the New Floor dialog andcreate a foundation.

3. Notice that the Garage’s foundation is separated from the rest of the foundation plan and that "S" Markers indicate
where the stem wall top height changes.
4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview.

5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the floor surface of the Garage area.

6. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, notice that

Room Supplies Floor for the Room Above is checked. This indicates that the Garage room on Floor 1 inherits its
concrete floor and curbs from this room on Floor 0. Click Cancel to close the dialog.
7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.
Basement walls often have furring to accommodate insulation, electrical, and plumbing and a finish surface like drywall.

53

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a furred basement wall type
1. Select the front vertical foundation wall located to the left of the Garage area and click the Open Object

edit

button.
2. On the WALL TYPES panel of the Wall Specification dialog:l

Notice that "8" Concrete Stem Wall" is specified as the wall type.

l

Click the Define button.

3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog: notice that "8" Concrete Stem Wall" is the selected wall type, then click the
Copy button.
l

A new wall type named "8" Concrete Stem Wall, Copy" is created.

l

Click in the text field where its name is stated and change it to "8" Concrete with Furring".

4. Click the Insert Below button to create a new layer, identical to the first.
5. With this new layer selected, click the Move Down button to move the new layer from the "Main Layers" section tothe "Interior Layers" section.
6. Specify Layer 2 as the "Insulation Air Gap" material with a Thickness of 1" and no Fill.
7. With Layer 2 selected, click the Insert Below button two more times to create a total of three Interior Layers, thenmodify the two new layers as follows:lSpecify Layer 3 as the "Fir Framing 2" material with a Thickness of 3 1/2" and a pale green Solid Fill color.

lSpecify Layer 4 as "Drywall" with a Thickness of 1/2" and no Fill.

8. These three furring layer materials are already present in the current plan file because they are assigned to other wall
types. Since this is the case, you can find them on the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, either
by searching or scrolling the list. Selecting from the PLAN MATERIALS panel is an efficient way to make sure yournew wall type is consistent with other walls in the plan.

9. Click once on the Layer 3 line item to select it, then:l

Check the box beside Framing under the Material Layer tab below the table. This will allow the layer to produce
framing when wall framing is generated later on. See Wall Framing on page 377.

l

Make sure the Type is "Lumber".

54

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple FloorslSpecify the Stud Spacing as 16" On Center.

l

Set the Stud Width as 1 1/2".

10. Click OK to close the dialog and create the new wall type.

To replace the basement wall type
1. Use the Add Breakedit tool to divide the right vertical wall in two, at the point where it is intersected by thehorizontal wall at the back of the garage area.
2. Add another break along the left vertical wall of the Garage, where it is intersected by the front left horizontal wall.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on one of the foundation wall segments that define the basementarea.
4. Hold down the Shift key, then click each of the walls that define the basement area, adding them to the selection set.
5. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

6. On the WALL TYPES panel, select "8" Concrete with Furring" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
7. Move the mouse pointer into the dialog preview pane, then click and drag to rotate the wall. You can also use themouse third button wheel to zoom in and out.
lNotice that the entire wall assembly is centered over its footing.

l

Typically, only the concrete layer should be centered over the footing.

8. Go to the FOUNDATION panel, then:l

Check the box beside Center Footing on Main Layer.

lNotice that the Footing Offset setting updates to show a value of -2 1/2". This is equal to half the thickness ofinterior air gap and furring layers.

lNotice, too, that the preview now shows the concrete wall layer centered over the footing.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the selected walls.

55

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

9. Remember to Save

your work.

ALIGNING WALLS BETWEEN FLOORSIn any plan with multiple floors, some walls may need to be perfectly aligned from one floor to the next. Here, the wallsthat will form one side of a stairwell will be aligned.

To align walls between floors
1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display.

l

The walls on the floor above, Floor 1, are shown in red for reference.

l

You can control which floor shows in the Reference Display as well as its appearance.

2. Zoomin on the left side of the plan.

56

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

3. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall, then draw a vertical wall over the wall visible in the Reference

Display on the left side of the plan.

l

If you are sufficiently zoomed in, the new wall will snap into alignment with the wall shown in the Reference
Display.

l

Notice that the edge lines of the new wall are highlighted in light blue: this indicates that they are exactly alignedwith the Reference Display lines of the wall above.

4. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the newly drawn interior wall.

5. Press the Right Arrow key once to Nudge the wall 1" to the right. Notice:

6. The wall’s edge lines are no longer highlighted and the red lines representing the wall on the floor above can be seenin the Reference Display.
7. On the edit toolbar, the Align With Wall Above

edit button is now available.

57

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

8. Click the Align With Wall Abovebutton. The wall is moved back into alignment with the wall below and theedit button disappears.
Another way to ensure that walls are aligned between floors is to use the Copy and Paste Hold Position tools.
Copy and Paste Hold Position can be used while navigating in a single plan view window, but it is easier to see what they
do when two plan views showing different floors are tiled.

To copy and paste walls between floors
1. Select the interior wall, then select Edit> Copy
2. Select Tools> New Plan View
3. Click the Up One Floor.

. A second plan view window is created and is now active.

button twice to go to Floor 2 in the new window. Notice that the current view’s tab

states that it shows Floor 2 while the original window’s tab still indicates that it shows Floor 0.
4. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the two plan views side by side. The view of Floor 2 will still be active,

as indicated by the darker color of its title bar.
5. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position. A copy of the interior wall selected on Floor 0 is created directly

above the original, on Floor 2.

6. Select File> Close View to return to the original view showing Floor 0.
7. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display
8. Don’t forget to Saveto toggle the Reference Display off again.

your work.

CREATING A WALL LEGENDIn a plan with a number of special wall types, it is helpful to include a legend with information about each. This can beaccomplished using a Wall Schedule.

58Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To set wall schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l

Select "Wall Schedule" and click the Edit button.

2. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Schedule Defaults dialog, customize the Columns selections:l

In the list of Columns to Include, select "Wall Type" and click the Remove button.

l

In the list of Available Columns, select "Total Width" and click the Add button.

l

Add "Wall Construction, Upper" and "Wall Construction, Lower" as well.

3. Also on the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, make sure that Display Column Headings in Schedule is checked.

4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that there are three ways to assign a Text Style to schedules: by layer, byspecifying a particular Text Style, or by using Custom settings.

l

Use Layer for Text Style is selected.

l

Although disabled, the Use Text Style option states the name of the saved Text Style that is in use, "Schedule59

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

Style".
l

The settings and the preview below show which settings are in use.

5. Click OK and then Done to close the Default Settings dialog and apply your changes.
CAD Details are a type of view window used to organize detail drawings, schedules, and other 2D CAD information.

To create a wall legend
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, click the New button.
3. In the New CAD Detail dialog, type a short, descriptive name like "Legends" and click OK.

4. The "Legends" CAD Detail window opens, and is empty.
5. Select Tools> Schedules> Wall Scheduleand click once in the view to place a Wall Schedule at that location.

6. Select the wall schedule and click the Open Object

edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Wall Legend" and clickOK.
By default, the information in each schedule cell will be presented in a single row. Once a schedule is created, though, itscolumn widths can be modified.

To edit schedule columns
1. Click on the wall schedule to select it and notice its various edit handles. In particular:

2. The small diamond shaped handles located in the Title row, centered on the grid lines that divide the columns allow
you to Resize Columns.
3. The small square Move Column edit handles are located in the Column Heading row, centered in each cell, andallow you to rearrange the columns.

60

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

4. Click on the Resize Column handle to the right of the "Wall Construction, Upper" column and drag it to the left.

5. Release the mouse button to resize the "Wall Construction, Upper" column.

6. You can resize the "Wall Construction, Lower" column, as well, if you wish.
7. Columns can also be renamed. With the wall schedule still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

8. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Schedule Specification dialog:lSelect "Wall Construction, Upper" in the Columns to Include list.

lClick the Rename button.

l

Rename Schedule Column dialog, delete ", Upper" from the New Name and click OK.

lClick once more to close the dialog and apply your change.

Since Room Dividers do not actually have materials or an assembly, they do not need to be in the wall legend. There are
two ways to remove them.

To remove an item from a schedule
1. Select a Room Divider wall and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the SCHEDULE panel of the Wall Specification dialog, uncheck Include in Schedule and click OK.
l

Notice that "Room Divider" is still included in the schedule.

lThis approach works best if there are other walls of the same type that you would like to be represented in theschedule.

3. Select the schedule and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall ScheduleSpecification dialog:l

Scroll down the list of Categories to Include.

lClick the arrow next to Wall to expand the category.

61

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple FloorslUncheck "Room Divider" and click OK.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work and select File> Close View to close the "Legends" detail.

The order that objects are listed in schedules can be customized. See "To change schedule numbering" on page 129 of the
Decks and Porches Tutorial.
You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Stairs tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Floors.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding a foundation and new floors to a structure.
To add a second floor

50

To customize the second floor wall type51

To navigate between floors levels

52

To create a basement foundation

53

To create a furred basement wall type54

To replace the basement wall type55

To align walls between floors

56

To copy and paste walls between floors

58

To set wall schedule defaults

59

62

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Multiple Floors

To create a wall legend

60

To edit schedule columns

60

To remove an item from a schedule61

To save a plan revision

62

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 3 - Multiple Floors
When building a new floor, why is it beneficial to derive the new floor plan from an existing floor?
lThis option produces a second floor shell using the same wall types as the exterior walls on the top living floor of theplan. It is usually faster to automatically generate the perimeter walls and then edit them as needed than it is to draw
them manually.

What are two ways to switch from one floor to another?
l

You can click the Up One Floor and Down One Floor buttons, or the Change Floor/Reference button.

l

Floors can also be navigated in the Project Browser side window.

What is the name of the tool that lets you view the location of objects on another floor without going to that floor?
l

The Reference Floor Display toggle is found in the Tools> Reference Floors submenu and on the toolbar. The
keyboard hotkey is F9.

What are two ways to align walls between floors?
l

The Align With Wall Above and Align With Wall Below edit tools will align a selected wall that is slightly out ofalignment.

l

You can also copy a wall and paste a duplicate at the same location on a different floor using the Paste Hold Positioncommand.

How can you tell which floor level is shown in the current plan view?
l

The floor level in the current view is reported in the Change Floor/Reference button, which is located between the Up
One Floor and Down One Floor buttons on the toolbar.

What two attributes of a "Garage" Room Type are created when the foundation is generated?
lWhen a stem wall foundation is generated, stem walls and a curb are created around the Garage slab.

l

On Floor 0, "S" Markers indicate where the stem wall top height changes.

l

In addition, the Garage room on Floor 1 inherits its concrete floor and curbs from the room below it on Floor 0.

What does an "S" marker along a foundation wall mean?
l"S" Markers indicate where changes to stem wall top heights occur: for example, where basement walls meet garage
curbs.

What type of view is recommended for creating schedules?
l

CAD Detail views are a great place to organize 2D-only information like schedules.

What are three ways that text style settings can be assigned to an object like a schedule?
lText style settings can be applied to an object by layer, by assigning a Text Style to the object, or by specifying
custom style settings.

How do you adjust the width of a schedule column?

63

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslClick and drag a small diamond shaped Resize Columns edit handle located in the Title row of the schedule, above
each vertical column divider line.

Interior Stairs
Stairs and staircase rooms connect multiple floors in a plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating stairs and introduces working in section views. Concepts
introduced include:
File Management64

Productivity Tips

64

Setting the Defaults

65

Using Plan Views

65

Adding Stairs

66

Working in Cross Section Views

70

Creating a Stairwell72

Confirming Headroom Clearance

73

Creating a Stacked Staircase

76

Adding Plan Notes

82

Creating Revisions

85

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Multiple Floors tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Floors and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Floors.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of theExterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create stairs and stairwells, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Stairs automatically detect floor platform heights and create consistent risers and treads to meet standard building
practices.

64

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslClick between two stair sections with the Draw Stairs tool to create a landing.

l

Use the Tape Measure tool to quickly measure distances without drawing a permanent dimension line.

Contentl

Cross Section/Elevation views can be annotated with text and dimensions and saved for use later on.

InterfacelTiling 2D and 3D views can help in the positioning of objects like stairs.

l

Use the Reference DisplaylMultiple line items in a list, as well as multiple objects, can be group-selected using the Shift and Ctrl/⌘ keys.

lSaved camera views are listed and can be accessed from the Project Browser side window.

to display walls and other objects located on a floor other than the Current Floor.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlTab - Select Next Object edit tooll

Shift + F6 - Tile Verticallyl

F9 - Reference DisplaylCtrl/⌘ + C - Copyl

Alt + Shift + V - Paste Hold PositionlCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whendrawing stairs, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before adding stairs, it is best to make sure that your floor and ceiling heights have all been finalized. If changes are madeaffect the floor heights, the total rise and run of a set of stairs may also be affected.
Before drawing interior stairs, it is a good idea to set the Interior Stair Defaults to meet your needs. See To set the interior
stair defaults on page 66.
Since stairwell rooms are often defined by railings, it is a good idea to set the Railing Defaults before they are created. See
To set the railing defaults on page 72.
As with architectural objects, it is recommended that you set Note and Note Schedule Defaults before creating floor plan
notes. See Adding Plan Notes on page 82.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding stairs to connect the floor levels created in the Multiple Floors tutorial.
See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on page 7.

65

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

ADDING STAIRS
Stairs are drawn in an upward direction, from the current floor to the floor above, and locate floor platforms automatically.
Sometimes, only a few steps are needed to reach between the floors in different rooms.

To set the interior stair defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Stairs andRamps" to expand the category, select "Interior Stairs", then click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Stair Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 44".
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels heading:lSpecify the Width as 4".

lUncheck Rail Passes Over Newel.

lSpecify the Height as 44".

l

Next to Type, click the Library button to open the Select Library Object dialog.

4. The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser. In the Browser, a wide variety of items
useful for creating a detailed design can be found. In the Select Library Object dialog, however, the content isfiltered to only list the Typeof object that can be used in the current context. Here, where a style of newel post is
being selected, only Millwork is listed in this dialog.
l

To further filter the results, type "newel" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Balusters,
Newels & Posts" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

lNotice that the folder's location in the Folders tree list is reported below its name as well as in a Tool Tip thatappears when the mouse is over the line item, then click once to select it.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Millwork> Balusters, Newels & Posts.

lOpen the Boxed folder, select "BX-02" and click OK.

66

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

5. On the MATERIALS panel:lSelect the "Balusters" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Riser" and "Wall Trim"components, and the "Main" component of the BX-02 newel to add them to the selection.

lClick the Select Material button and select "Color - White" from the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the SelectMaterial dialog. Choosing a color already in use in your plan will help make sure finish materials are
consistent.

6. Next, Ctrl/⌘ + select the "Panels" and "Rails" components as described above and assign the "Red Oak - Natural"material to them:lOn the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for "red oak" and scroll down the listof Folder
items that match this search term.

lBeneath each Folder, its location in the Folders tree list is indicated.

lSelect the Red Oak folder located in Materials/Wood from the list to use this folder as a Filter.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs>
Materials> Wood> Red Oak.

l

Select the "Red Oak - Natural" material and click OK.

7. Returning to the Materials panel, select the Tread component and click the Select Material button.
l

On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for "red oak" again and scroll down thelist of Folder
items that match this search term.

lThis time, select the Red Oak folder located in Materials/Flooring/Wood Flooring/3-4-5" Plank/Red Oak.

l

If you cannot see a folder's full library location, move your mouse pointer over its name and the location will
display in a tool tip.

lWhen you click on a folder, the tree list in the Folders panel will expand to show its contents.

lSelect "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" and click OK.

8. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.
The floor finish materials for rooms will be set to match the stairs later on. See "Specifying Flooring Materials" on page217 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.

67

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To create stairs between rooms
1. Go to Floor 1, then Zoom

out so the Garage can be seen.

2. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then move the mouse into the top left corner of the Garage room.

3. Click once to create a short stair section that spans the difference in floor height between the Garage and Foyer
rooms.
4. Notice that the stairs have a direction arrow and an "UP" label, indicating that they are drawn in an upward direction.

Stairs can also be drawn to span different floor levels.

To create a staircase between floors
1. Zoomin on the Foyer room.

2. Select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs, then click to the right of the wall separating the Foyer from the Dining

room and drag upward. Notice:68Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslThe stairs have an "UP" label and an arrow indicating their direction.

l

The stairs snap to the side of the room automatically.

lWhen you release the mouse button, a staircase is created.

To position a staircase
1. Select CAD> Dimension> Manual Dimension

from the menu, then click and drag a dimension line from thebottom end of the stairs to the horizontal exterior wall of the Foyer.
2. By default, the dimension line will locate the outside surface of the wall’s Main Layer. Click on the dimension line
to select it, then click and drag the diamond-shaped end edit handle back until it snaps to the inside surface of theMain Layer.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the staircase to select it and move your mouse pointer over thedimension line.
4. When the mouse pointer changes to a Pointing Hand

icon, click once, enter 4’ 6" in the inline text field, and press

Enter.

To adjust a staircase’s rise and run
1. Click on the stairs to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase

Specification dialog, notice:l

The Staircase Information at the top of the dialog states the current Number of Risers and the Rise Angle forreference.

l

In this example, this section also indicates that the selected staircase does not reach Floor 2 and recommends a
total of 16 risers.

2. To prevent the base of the stairs from moving as changes are made to the settings in this dialog, select Lock Bottom
under the "Advanced Options" heading.

69

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

3. Click the Make Best Fit button. Notice that staircase now reaches the next floor and that the Number of Risers andRise Angle are modified.
4. Still on the GENERAL panel:l

Under "Advanced Options", select Lock Number of Treads.

lChange the Tread Depth to 10 1/2". Note that Riser Height stays the same but overall Length is adjusted.

lClick OK.

5. Once the staircase's position and length are correct, click the Select Objects

button, then select the wall locatedto the left of the staircase. Extend its top end upward until it reaches the top end of the staircase.
6. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

WORKING IN CROSS SECTION VIEWS
Cross section views are often required in construction documents, and are also helpful to reference as you develop yourdrawing.

To tile floor plan and section views
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section
from right to left, entirely within the width of the staircase:70, then click and drag a horizontal camera

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslNotice that the stairs are connected to the floor platform on Floor 2.

lNote, too, that the floor platform is unbroken with no passage between floors.

2. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the Back Clipped Cross Section and plan views side by side.

3. Notice that the cross section’s title bar is darker in color than that of the plan view. The darker title bar indicates thatthe cross section is the currently active view.
Stair sections are often included in construction documents, so this Back Clipped Cross Section view can be saved for use
later on. See "Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout" on page 528 of the Sending Views to Layout Tutorial.

To save a camera view
1. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View.

2. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View

to open the Camera Specification dialog.

l

On the CAMERA panel, type a short, descriptive Name for the camera, like "Stair Section".

l

On the PLAN DISPLAY panel, notice that the camera is set to display as a callout in plan view, and that its
Callout Label is S1.

71

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslOn the LAYER panel, notice that the camera is located on the "Cameras" layer. This layer controls its display inplan view.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

3. Before continuing, Save

your work.

Saved camera views are listed in the Project Browser using their camera Name.

CREATING A STAIRWELL
A stairwell is simply an interior room that has been assigned the Room Type “Open Below” so that it has no floor platform.
The Stairwell for a given staircase is always found on the floor above the stairs.
In the Multiple Floors tutorial, interior walls were aligned between floors to create one side of a Stairwell for the stairs to
Floor 2. See "Aligning Walls Between Floors" on page 56 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
Rooms such as Stairwells can also be defined using Railings.

To set the railing defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Walls" toexpand the category, select "Railing", then click the Edit button.
2. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Railing Defaults dialog, select Rail to Post.
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels/Posts heading:lSpecify the Width as 4".

lSpecify the Height as 38".

l

Click the Library button.

4. In the Select Library Object dialog, search for "BX-02" as Text

, select the BX-02 newel, and click OK:

5. On the MATERIALS panel:lSelect the "Balusters" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Main" component of the
BX-02 newel to add it to the selection.

lClick the Select Material button, and select the "Color - White" material on the PLAN MATERIALS panel of theSelect Material dialog.

lSelect the "Rail" component, click the Select Material button, and select "Red Oak - Natural" from the PLAN
MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog.

6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

To create an automatic stairwell
1. Click in the plan view window to make it active, click the Select Objects

button, then click on the staircase to

select it.
2. Click the Auto Stairwell

edit button and notice that in the cross section view, the floor platform above thestaircase has been removed.

72

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

3. With the plan view still active, select Window> Tab Windows. This will return the interface to tabbed viewwindows with the plan view displaying and both views' tabs located above view window.
4. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 2 and notice that a new room has been created to the right of the vertical interior

wall.

l

The existing framed wall forms part of the Auto Stairwell, and Railings are created to enclose the rest of the space.

l

The vertical Railing at the top of the stairs has a Doorway opening in it.

5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CONFIRMING HEADROOM CLEARANCE
An important consideration in designing a staircase is adequate headroom, which can be measured in a cross section view
such as the one created above. There are several ways to make an existing view window active, including:l

Click on the tab that states the name of the desired view.

lOpen the Window menu, then select the desired view from the list of open views at the bottom of the menu.

73

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslRight-click on the view in the Project Browser

and select Open View from the contextual menu.

To draw dimension lines in a cross section view
1. Zoomin on the bottom end of the stairs on Floor 1, making sure that you can also see the ceiling.

2. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension, then click and drag a vertical dimension line from the top

outer edge of the stair nosing up to the ceiling surface.
3. As you drag, notice that the dimension line preview locates the second tread of the stairs. This is because this tread islocated within the Reach distance set in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
4. When the dimension line preview locates the ceiling, release the mouse button.

5. An Information message will explain that the dimension line locates point markers instead of architectural objects inthe model. Click OK.

To confirm headroom clearance in a stairwell1. Zoomin on the bottom stair tread and notice:74

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslThere is a cross-shaped Point Marker at the end of the dimension line (shown here in red and with thicker thannormal lines for clarity).

l

The Point Marker is aligned with the bottom of the tread rather than the top.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Point Marker to select it.

l

If you select the dimension line instead, click the Select Next Objectl

The selected object’s type is indicated on the left side of the Status Bar.

3. Click and drag its square Moveedit button or press the Spacebar.

edit handle upward. When Object Snaps

are enabled, it will snap to the topof the tread.

4. Pan upward until the ceiling comes into view. There are two ways to pan in a view:lSelect Window> Pan Window, then click and hold, drag downward, and release the mouse button.

l

Click and hold the middle mouse button, drag downward, and release.

5. When the ceiling can be seen:l

Notice what the Point Marker at the end of the dimension line is aligned with.

l

If it is aligned with the ceiling framing at the back of the ceiling surface layer, select it and move it downward sothat it is aligned with the ceiling surface.

75

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

6. Select Window> Fill Window

to zoom out so the entire cross section can be seen in the view window.

7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save

your work.

CREATING A STACKED STAIRCASE
Staircases are often stacked above one another to save floor space.

To create stacked staircases
1. Click the Down One Floor
2. Click the Select Objects
3. Select Edit> Copy

button to return to Floor 1.
button, then click on the staircase to select it.

.

4. Click the Down One Floor

button to go to Floor 0.

5. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position. A copy of the staircase selected on Floor 0 is created directly below

the original.
6. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the wall located to the left of the staircase. Extend its top end

upward until it reaches the top end of the staircase.

76

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

Since the ceiling height on Floor 0 is taller than on Floor 1, the length and height of the basement stairs should be examined.

To examine stair structure
1. With the newly pasted staircase still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase Specification dialog, note that:l

The Staircase Information states although the stairs do reach the next level, they are described as steep.

l

The Riser Height is 7 5/8", which meets most residential building codes.
Building codes can vary considerably by location. It is yourresponsibility to make sure that your design meets thebuilding codes for your project site.

3. This time, the top of the stairs is at the correct location, directly below the stairs above, so select Lock Top.
4. Click the Make Best Fit button, then click OK.
5. Zoomin on the bottom end of the basement stairs.

6. Select CAD> Dimensions> Tape Measure, then click and drag a temporary dimension line between the bottomof the stairs and the vertical exterior wall.

77

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

7. This distance is too narrow to serve as a passage, so select Edit> Undo

from the menu to restore the stairs

original rise and run.
8. Select the staircase and click the Auto Stairwell
9. Saveyour work, then go Up One Floor

edit button.
to Floor 1, which is where the new stairwell was created.

Stairwells are an example of spaces where objects are drawn close together or even over one another. In situations like this,
it is helpful to turn the display of some objects off.

To turn off the display of objects
1. Open the Active Layer Display Options side window, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.
l

Click on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l

If it is not open, select View> Active Layer Display Options.

2. In the Name Filter field, begin typing the word: stairs. As you type, the layers listed in the table below will filter
automatically.

3. Locate the "Stairs & Ramps" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to remove the check mark.

78

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

Note: Although the "Stairs & Ramps" layer has been turned off, thedimension line that locates the stairs on Floor 1 can still be seen.

With the display of the staircase turned off, it is now easy to see the railing walls of the Auto Stairwell so that they can be
modified. Here, the railings will be replaced by walls using several methods.

To edit Auto Stairwell railings
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the vertical Railing separating the Stairwell from the Living room.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and in the Railing Specification dialog:l

On the GENERAL panel, uncheck Railing and No Locate.

l

On the WALL TYPES panel, select "Interior-4" from the Type drop-down list, then click OK.

3. Select the horizontal wall separating the Dining room from the Kitchen.

79

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslClick and drag its right end edit handle to the right until it snaps to the horizontal wall on the other side of the
Stairwell.

l

As you drag, the Interior-4 wall replaces the railing.

4. Select the vertical wall separating the Dining room from the Foyer and use its top end edit handle to replace theportion of the invisible Room Divider above it that defines the Stairwell.
5. Select the wall separating the Stairwell from the Kitchen, click the diamond-shaped Same Wall Type edit handle
located above the top end of the wall and drag it to the right, replacing the railing and the opening in it.
6. Select the horizontal wall dividing the Dining room from the Kitchen, click the Add Breakedit button, thenclick on the selected wall at the top right corner of the Dining room to divide it into two segments.
7. Select the horizontal wall segment separating the Stairwell from the Foyer.
lClick on the Temporary Dimension that states how far it is from the exterior wall of the Foyer.

l

In the inline text field, type 6’ and press Enter to move the wall.

8. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 2 and extend the length of the full height wall on the left side of the staircase until itreaches the top end of the staircase. See To create stacked staircases on page 76.
9. Return to the Active Layer Display Options side window and turn the "Stairs & Ramps" layer back on.
10. When you are finished, Save

your work.

As with the first run of stairs, it is a good idea to confirm headroom clearance for the basement stairs. See Confirming
Headroom Clearance on page 73.

To confirm headroom clearance
1. Open the saved "Stair Section" camera created earlier. There are three ways to do this:lSelect the camera callout in plan view and click the Open Viewl

Double-click on the camera callout in plan view.

80

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslSelect View> Project Browser, expand the Cross Sections folder, right-click on the "Stair Section" and selectOpen View from the contextual menu.
2. Zoomin on the basement stairs and use an End to End Dimension

line to measure the headroom of thestairs on Floor 0.

Since the focus of this section view is the staircase, the rest of the structure does not need to be shown and can be clippedout.

To add vertical and horizontal clip planes
1. With the section view still active, select Tools> Edit Active View.

2. On the CAMERA panel of the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog:l

Check the boxes beside Clip Elevation and Clip Sides.

lNotice that a Clip Width as well as Bottom and Top Clip Elevations can be specified, but leave them unchanged.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window, turn on the display of the "CAD, Clip Lines" layer.
4. Zoom

out until you can see the rectangular border formed by the clip plane lines.

5. Click on the horizontal Top Clip Elevation line to select it, then move it so it is positioned just above the floor
surface of Floor 2:

81

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior StairslMove your mouse pointer over the red, square Move Line Segment handle that displays at the point where you
clicked. The mouse pointer changes to a two headed arrow .

lClick and drag downwards or upwards as needed and release the mouse button when the line is positioned justabove the floor surface of Floor 2.

l

To override Grid Snaps, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key while you drag.

l

As with walls and other types of objects, you can also move clip lines using dimensions if you wish. See To movewalls using dimensions on page 23.

6. Edit the Bottom Clip Elevation line and both Side Clip lines so that only the stairwell from Floor 0 to Floor 2 isincluded in the view.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work and select File> Close View to close the section view and return to planview.

ADDING PLAN NOTESIn previous tutorials, annotations were created using Rich Text. Another way to add written information to a plan view is to
add Note callouts and a Note Schedule.
Note Schedules can be set up for a variety of different purposes: for example, structural key notes.

82

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To set note schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l

Select "Note Schedule" and click the Edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Note Schedule Defaults dialog, which opens next:lLeave Include Objects from All Floors checked.

lNotice the Categories to Include. These are the different types of Notes and Note Schedules that can be created.

l

Click the arrow to the left of "Note" to expand the category and confirm that only General has a check mark next
to it.

3. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel:l

Under the Columns heading, leave Display Column Headings in Schedule unchecked.

l

Make sure that only "2D Symbol" and "Text" are listed under Columns to Include.

l

Under the Rows heading, leave Group Similar Objects checked.

lUnder the Object Preview Options heading, make sure that Scale Images and Use Plan View Scale are checked.

4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that like Wall Schedules, Note Schedules are set to Use Layer for Text
Style. See "To set wall schedule defaults" on page 59 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
5. On the LABELS panel, select a Callout Shape. Here, Capsule is used.
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
Note schedules can be placed in the same CAD Detail as the Wall Legend. See "To create a wall legend" on page 60 of theMultiple Floors Tutorial.

83Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To add a note schedule
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Legends" detail and click the Rename button.
3. In the Rename CAD Detail dialog, rename the detail to "Legends and Notes".
4. With the "Legends and Notes" detail selected, click the Open button.
5. Select Tools> Schedules> Note Scheduleand click once to the right of the Wall Legend to place a Note

Schedule at that location.
6. Select the schedule and click the Open Object

edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Note Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Floor Plan Notes" andclick OK.
8. Click on the new Note Schedule to select it, then align it with the Wall Legend’s top edge:lHold down the Shift key and click on the Wall Legend to select them both as a group.

l

Click the Align/Distribute Objectsledit button.

In the Align/Distribute Objects dialog, under the "Move Objects Vertically to" heading, select Top Edges andclick OK.

Because there are no Notes present in the plan yet, the schedule only shows a title bar and column headings. As Notes are
created, though, line items will be added to the schedule automatically.

To set the note defaults
1. Returning to the Default Settings dialog.
lClick the arrow beside "Text, Callouts and Markers" to expand the category.

l

Select "Note" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Saved Note Defaults dialog, which opens next, click the Edit button.
l

Notice that there are a number of different Saved Note Defaults set up for particular drawing scales and tasks.

l"Plan Note Defaults" is selected in the list because it is the Saved Default that is currently active.

lRecall that the "Working Plan View" uses "Plan Rich Text Defaults", as well.

lWith the "Plan Note Defaults" selected, click the Edit button.

3. On the NOTE panel of the Note Defaults dialog, which opens next:lUnless there is a word or phrase that you want to include in every line of your Note Schedule, make sure that the
Text field is empty.

l

The Type drop-down list corresponds to the list of Objects to Include in the Note Schedule Defaults dialog. Make
sure that "General Notes" is selected.

lNotice that Generate Shape from Schedule is checked.

4. Click OK, then OK, and then Done to close all dialogs.
Notes are typically placed in plan views, but can be created in any view that supports text objects.

84Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

To add plan notes
1. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the plan view and "Legends and Notes" CAD Detail view side by side.

2. Click in the plan view to make it the active window, then go Down One Floor
3. Select CAD> Text> Note

to Floor 1.

, then click near the bottom of the stairs.

4. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:l

In the Text field, type: headroom 6’ 8" min.

l

Make sure that "General" is the selected Type.

l

Click OK.

5. Notice:l

In plan view, the new Note is represented using a Capsule callout shape with the number 1.

l

In the Schedule Detail, the new Note is listed as the first line item along with its Text.

6. Use the Copy

and Paste Hold Positioncommands to make a copy of the Note callout on Floor 0. See To

create stacked staircases on page 76.
7. Notice that:l

Because the Floor Plan Notes schedule Includes Objects from All Floors, the Note on Floor 0 derives its label fromthe schedule.

lBecause the schedule is set to Group Similar Objects, only one instance of 1 is listed in the schedule.

8. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Doors and Windows tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.

85Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Stairs

When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Stairs.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating interior stairs and stairwell rooms.
To set the interior stair defaults

66

To create stairs between rooms

68

To create a staircase between floors

68

To position a staircase

69

To adjust a staircase’s rise and run

69

To tile floor plan and section views

70

To save a camera view71

To set the railing defaults

72

To create an automatic stairwell72

To draw dimension lines in a cross section view74

To confirm headroom clearance in a stairwell74

To create stacked staircases

76

To examine stair structure

77

To turn off the display of objects

78

To edit Auto Stairwell railings

79

To confirm headroom clearance80

To add vertical and horizontal clip planes

81

To set note schedule defaults

83

To add a note schedule84

To set the note defaults

84

To add plan notes85

To save a plan revision

86

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 4 - Interior Stairs
If you draw interior stairs on Floor 1, what floor level do those stairs try to snap to?

86

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windowsl

Stairs are drawn in an upward direction, from the current floor to the floor above, and locate floor platforms
automatically. So stairs drawn on Floor 1 build upward, seeking Floor 2.

What Room Type is a Stairwell?
lA stairwell is an interior room that has been assigned the Room Type “Open Below” so that it has no floor platform.
The Stairwell for a given staircase is always found on the floor above the stairs.

What tool can you use to create a Stairwell automatically?
l

Select the staircase that requires a Stairwell and click the Auto Stairwell edit button.

In what kind of view can you check the headroom of a staircase?
l

Structural considerations like headroom clearance can be measured in a Backclipped Cross Section view or regular
Cross Section/Elevation view.

What edit tools are used to create a stacked staircase?
l

Copy an existing staircase, go Down One Floor or Up One Floor, and use Paste Hold Position to make a copy of theoriginal exactly below or above the original.

Why is it sometimes helpful to turn off layers as you work?
l

In spaces where objects are drawn close together or over the top of one another, it is helpful to turn the display ofsome objects off. You can do this by turning off those objects’ layers.

What annotation tools can be used to create a floor plan note list?
lNotes and Note Schedules can be used to create a dynamic list of plan notes.

Doors and Windows
Windows and doors are placed directly into walls and can be customized to reflect a wide variety of architectural styles.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing and customizing doors and windows. Concepts introduced
include:File Management

88

Productivity Tips

88

Setting the Defaults

89

Using Plan Views

89

Placing Doors

89

Editing Doors

92

Using Library Content

93

Placing and Editing Windows

96

Positioning Doors and Windows

97

Replicating Doors and Windows

102

Creating Grouped Window Units

104

Creating Schedules

104

87

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Adding Annotations

107

Creating Revisions

109

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Stairs tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Stairs and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Stairs.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add doors and windows to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

The Hinged Doorand Sliding Door

tools will create either an exterior or interior door, depending on where itis placed.
l

The Center Object

edit tool allows you to center doors, windows, and other objects relative to a room or anotherobject.
l

The Transform/Replicate Object

edit tool lets you replicate objects like windows at regular intervals.

Contentl

A selection of name brand door and window catalogs are available for download from the 3D Library. SelectLibrary> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

l

Set up the door and window defaults in your template plans so they are ready for use when you begin a new plan.

Interfacel

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that lets you assign accents like hardware
and moldings to objects like doors and windows.

l

The Select Material dialog is similar to the Select Library Object dialog and lets you assign materials to objects.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + C - Concentric ResizelCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

88

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whenplacing doors and windows, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Each Door Tool has either one or two defaults dialogs. Before placing doors, all of them should be set up to meet yourneeds. See To set the Door Defaults on page 89.
Hinged and Sliding Doors are commonly used as both interior and exterior doors. As such, they have two sets of defaults:
Interior and Exterior.
Doors and many of their components - including hardware and casing - are represented using symbols from the library. See
Using Library Content on page 93.
Window Defaults determine the initial window size, type, and more. See To set window defaults on page 96.
The wall framing associated with doors and windows should also be specified prior to building framing. See Wall Framingon page 377.
As with architectural objects, it is a good idea to set Door and Window Schedule Defaults. See Creating Schedules on page104.
The Leader Line tool creates Rich Text objects with lines with arrows attached. You should set Rich Text Defaults before
annotations are created. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
In order to position doors and windows in a manner that meets your needs, Dimension Defaults should be set. As doors andwindows are added, Auto Exterior Dimensions automatically refresh so that they locate these objects as they are added. See
To set Dimension Defaults on page 99.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding doors and windows. See To examine a saved plan view’s settings on
page 7.

PLACING DOORSThe six Door Tools can be used to place a variety of different doors in interior and exterior walls.
Each Door Tool has at least one defaults dialog. Here, the Interior Door Defaults dialog is examined; however, you shouldmake sure all Door Defaults meet your needs.

To set the Door Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click the arrow next to "Door" in the tree list to expand the category.

l

Notice that there is a defaults dialog for each of the Door Tools.

lSelect "Interior Door" from the tree list and click the Edit button.

2. In the Interior Door Defaults dialog:

89

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. On the GENERAL panel, notice that the Door Style is "Door P04" and that it is shown in the object preview on theright. "Door P04" is a panel door available in the library. For more information, see To choose a door style from thelibrary on page 95.
4. On the CASING panel, note that when no Casing Profile is specified, a basic stock profile is used. For information
about changing the casing, see To specify a door’s casing on page 95.
5. On the ROUGH OPENING and FRAMING panels, you can specify how you want framing around interior doors to begenerated.
6. Additional options such as hardware and millwork can also be specified, as well. See Using Library Content on page93.
7. Click OK to return to the Default Settings dialog. For this tutorial, the existing defaults will be used, but you can
examine each of the Door Defaults dialogs if you wish. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.

To add hinged doors
1. Select Build> Door> Hinged Door

, then move the mouse pointer over the exterior wall of the Foyer room.

2. When the mouse pointer is over the exterior wall:l

Click the mouse button and hold it down.

lMove the mouse along the wall to change the hinge side of the door to be placed.

lMove the mouse from one side of the wall to the other to change which way it opens.

l

As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.

3. When the door preview’s hinges are on the right side and it is opening inward, release the mouse button to create an
exterior hinged door.
4. Select the new door, click the Open Object

edit button, and note that:l

The dialog’s title is Exterior Door Specification.

l

The door style features three lites and a craftsman style dentil detail.

lMove your mouse pointer into the object preview pane, then click and drag to rotate the preview. Notice thatthe door has an Exterior and Interior side.

l

Click Cancel.

5. Place a Hinged Doorin the wall separating the Bedroom from the Bath.

6. Select this new door and click the Open Object

edit button. Notice:l

The Interior Door Specification dialog opens this time.

l

The preview shows an interior panel door rather than an exterior craftsman style door.

lClick Cancel.

7. Place three additional hinged doors as shown here:90Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add a sliding door
1. Zoomin on the back exterior wall of the Kitchen.

2. Select Build> Door> Sliding Doorand move the mouse pointer over the wall.

3. When the mouse pointer is over the wall:l

Click the mouse button and hold it down.

lMove the mouse from left to right to change which side of the door is movable.

l

As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.

4. When the door preview’s moveable side is on the right and is on the interior of the opening, release the mousebutton to create an exterior sliding door.
5. Select the new door and click the Open Object

edit button. Note that this dialog’s title is Exterior Door

Specification, then click Cancel.
A variety of other door types can be placed, as well.

To add other types of doors
1. Select Window> Fill Window
2. Select Build> Door> Doorway.
and click on the wall separating the Foyer from the Dining room. Place another

doorway between the Kitchen and Dining room.
3. Select Build> Door> Bifold Door

, then move the mouse pointer over the wall separating the Foyer from the

Closet.
4. When the mouse pointer is over the wall:l

Click the mouse button and hold it down.

lMove the mouse up and down along the wall to change the hinge side of the door that will be placed.

91Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and WindowslMove the mouse button side to side, perpendicular to the wall, to change the direction that the door opens.

l

As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.

5. When the door preview's hinges fold toward the Foyer, release the mouse button to create a single bi-fold door.
6. Select Build> Door> Pocket Door

, then move the mouse pointer over the wall separating the Bedroom from its

Closet.
7. When the mouse pointer is over the right side of the wall, near the vertical exterior wall:l

Click the mouse button and hold it down.

lMove the mouse to the left to change the side of the door that slides into the wall.

l

As you move the mouse, the door preview outline will update.

8. When the door preview opens toward the Bath, release the mouse button to create a pocket door.
9. Select Build> Door> Garage Door

, then click on the front wall of the Garage to place a garage door at thatlocation. Garage doors do not have hinge sides and always open in the same direction.

10. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

EDITING DOORS
Once a door has been placed, it can be selected and edited.
A door’s hinge and swing side can be set when it is created, but it can also be changed at any time.

To change the door swing
1. Zoomin on the door located at the top end of the staircase.

2. Click the Change Opening/Hinge Side

edit button and notice that the side of the door that the hinges are onchanges.

92

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. Click the Change Swing Side

edit button and notice that the door now opens into the Stairwell rather than into

the Living room.
4. With the door still selected, notice the triangular edit handle located near the far end of the door swing arch.

5. Click and drag this handle and notice:l

The mouse pointer icon changes to a curved Rotate

icon.

l

Drag along the arch to control how far open the door appears.

lDrag a line parallel to the wall to change the door’s hinge side.

lDrag a line perpendicular to the wall to change the door’s swing side.

6. When the door’s hinges are on the left and it opens out into the Living room, release the mouse button.
A door’s edit handles can also be used to change its size. It can also be resized using dimensions as well as in the Door
Specification dialog.

To change a door’s size
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Bifold closet door in the Foyer to select it.

2. Click and drag the resize edit handles at each end to make the door wider. To resize the door concentrically, holddown the C key while dragging an end edit handle.
3. With the door still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Door Specification dialog, specify the Width as 60" and click OK.

To change a glass door’s lites
1. Select the Sliding door in the Kitchen and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LITES panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog, set the Lites Across to 3 and Lites Vertical to 5, thenclick OK.
3. Don’t forget to Save

your work.

USING LIBRARY CONTENTIn the Interior Stairs tutorial, materials from the Library Browser were applied to different components of an interior
staircase.

93

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Doors provide another excellent example of how the content in the Library Browser can be used to customize and enhanceyour designs. There are a variety of different objects that can be assigned to a door, including hardware, a door style, andcasing.
The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version of the Library Browser that allows you to assign library items to aselected object. It only lists items in the library that can be used for the task at hand, making it easy to browse for relevant
objects.

To specify door hardware
1. Select the exterior door in the Foyer and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the HARDWARE panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog, select "Library" from the Exterior Handle dropdown list, or click the Library button to its right.
3. In the Select Library Object dialog:

The content is filtered by Typelso that it only lists Hardware.

lTo further filter the results, type "knob" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Knobs andLevers" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Hardware> Door Hardware> Knobs and Levers.

lSelect the "Exterior Handle 2" and click OK.

4. Click the Library button beside Interior Lock and choose a lock using a similar process:l

The content is again filtered by Typeso that it only lists Hardware.

lFilter the results further: type "lock" in the Search field and click on the "Hardware Options: Lock" Symbol
Options line item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now only list hardware items that are locks.

l

In the Folders panel, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Hardware> Door Hardware>
Knobs and Levers.

lSelect the "Dead Bolt (interior)" and click OK.

5. Repeat step 4 to select the "Dead Bolt (exterior)" symbol as the Exterior Lock, then click OK to close the dialog
and apply your changes.
The Library also has a selection of door styles that can be applied to individual doors: for example, the P04 door style whichis the default for interior hinged doors.

94

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To choose a door style from the library
1. Click on the hinged door between the Foyer and the Garage to select it.
l

If the stairs or wall becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object

edit button until the door becomes

the selected object.
2. When the door is selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Exterior Door Specification dialog:l

Notice that this Hinged Door is using the same Craftsman style door as the front door.

lClick the Library button to the right of the Style drop-down list.

4. In the Select Library Object dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Doors.

lClick on the "Entry Doors" FolderlType P04 in the Search field and press the Enter key to perform a TextlSelect Door P04 in the Filter Results panel and click OK to return to the specification dialog.

filter to remove it.
search.

For best results, door and window casing should be set in the Defaults dialogs prior to placing any doors or windows.
Exterior doors often have different casing on their two sides, which isn't necessary for the door to the Garage, however.

To specify a door’s casing
1. With the specification dialog for the door between the Foyer and Garage still open go to the CASING panel:
2. Change the Exterior Casing Width and Depth to match the Interior Casing.

95

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. You can also click the Library button beside Exterior Casing Profile and type "casing" in the Search field.
lNotice that in the drop-down list, there are a number of Manufacturer catalogs that include casing.

l

Select the "Casings" Folder

located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Casing tofind a selection of door and window casing profiles. Select one and click OK.
4. Click the Clear button to restore the default stock profile.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

PLACING AND EDITING WINDOWS
Like doors, windows are designed to be placed into walls and are highly editable.

To set window defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, select "Window" from the tree list, and click the Edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Defaults dialog:lSpecify the Window Type as "Single Casement".

lSpecify the Width as 30".

lSpecify the Height as 54".

3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Across as 3 and Lites Vertical as 4.
4. On the FRAMING panel, notice that the defaults for the Header and Trimmers can be set. See "Wall Framing" onpage 377 of the Wall Framing Tutorial.
5. On the ROUGH OPENING panel, notice that the Additional Height and Width values are 1".
6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
7. Saveyour changes.

To place a window
1. Select Build> Window> Window.

2. Click on the exterior wall of the Foyer, to the right of the wall, to place a window at that location.
3. Continue clicking to place a total of 11 windows:

96Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To edit a window
1. Select the window in the Foyer and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:lSelect "Fixed Glass" from the Window Type drop-down list.

lSpecify the Width as 12" and the Height as 77".

lConfirm that the Floor to Top value is 80".

3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Across as 1 and Lites Vertical as 5, then click OK.
4. Select the window in the kitchen and click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:lSpecify the Height as 36".

lNote that the Floor to Bottom height increases to 44".

6. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Vertical as 3, then click OK.
7. Select the window in the Garage and open its specification dialog. On the GENERAL panel:lChange the Window Type to "Fixed Glass".

l

Change the Height to 48".

l

Select "Absolute" as the Elevation Reference, then specify the Elevation at Top as 80" so its height matches thatof the other windows and doors.

8. On the LITES panel, change the number of Lites Vertical to 3, then click OK.
9. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

POSITIONING DOORS AND WINDOWS
There are a number of ways to move doors and windows: using their edit handles, various edit tools, as well as dimensions.

97

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

When positioning doors and windows, often the most important consideration is that it be centered along a wall or relative
to an object.
Note: So that the centering axis can be clearly seen, the "Dimensions,
Automatic" layer is turned off in the following images.

To center a wall opening
1. Select the front exterior door in the Foyer and click the Center Object

edit button.

2. Move the mouse pointer into the Foyer, near the wall that the window is located in.

3. Notice that the Foyer room becomes highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the midpoint of theexterior wall.
4. Now move the mouse pointer up to the invisible Room Divider separating the Foyer from the Living area.

98Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

5. When a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the midpoint of the Room Divider, click once. The door becomesaligned with the center of the Room Divider.
6. Zoomin on the Foyer, then select the door between the Foyer and Garage and click the Center Object

edit

button.

7. Move the mouse pointer over the Garage stairs, and when a horizontal centering axis displays down the middle ofthe stairs, click once.
8. Use the Center Object

edit button to center:l

The Kitchen windowl

The Living room windowl

The window on the left side of the Dining rooml

The window on the right side of the Bedrooml

The window in the Bedroom Closetl

The Garage doorl

The Foyer Closet door.

When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

It is a good idea to take a few moments to make sure that your various Dimension Defaults are set up so that they meet yourneeds and are consistent.

To set Dimension Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow next to "Dimension" in the tree list to expand the category.

l

Select "Dimensions" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog, which opens next:lNotice that dimension lines have multiple Saved Defaults, which you can use to save considerable time when
you annotate your drawings.

l"Plan Dimension Defaults" is selected in the list because it is the currently active Saved Dimension Default.

lClick the Edit button to open the Dimension Defaults dialog.

99

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

3. On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog, under the "Exterior" heading, make sure that
Auto Refresh is checked.
4. On the LOCATE AUTO EXTERIOR panel:l

Notice that there are several options for locating wall Openings.

lMake sure that Sides is selected to locate the sides of doors and windows.

5. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog:lNote that there are numerous options for controlling many objects in addition to walls and wall openings.

lUnder the Openings heading, make sure that Sides is selected.

6. On the LAYER panel, notice that when the "Plan Dimension Defaults" are active, manually drawn dimensions areplaced on the "Dimensions, Manual" layer by default.
7. Click OK and then Done to close the all dialogs and apply your changes.

To position doors and windows using dimensions
1. Zoomin on the Bedroom.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then adjust the space between the two windows in the back wall:l

Click on the left window to select it.

lMove your mouse pointer over the dimension line that states its distance from the right window.

l

In the inline text field, type 4 1/2" and press the Enter key on the keyboard. This space will accommodate twotrimmers plus the windows’ rough openings.

3. Center the two windows in the Bedroom:llWith the left window still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the right window to select the two asa group.
Use the Center Objects

edit button to center both windows in the Bedroom as described in To center awall opening on page 98, above.

100

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

4. Notice that:l

Although the windows are centered in the room, the Auto Exterior Dimensions on either side of them report
different distances.

lThis is because the dimensions locate the framing of walls that have different thicknesses.

l

If you draw an Interior Dimension line along the back wall of the Bedroom, the dimensions on either side of
the windows will be the same.

5. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension, then click and drag to draw a dimension line along the wall

separating the Bedroom from the Bath.
6. Select the door to the Bath and adjust its position:lMove your mouse pointer over the dimension line that states its distance from the closet wall.

l

In the inline text field, type 6" and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

7. Repeat steps 2-4 to space the two windows in the front wall of the Dining room 3’ 6" apart, then center them in theroom, then use the Center Objects
edit button to center both windows in the Dining room as described in To
center a wall opening on page 98, above.
8. Position the window in the Foyer 4 1/2" from the front door.
9. Although the front door has been centered in the foyer, its position can be adjusted slightly to produce cleaner
dimensions:lWith the side window still selected, hold down the Shift key and select the door as well.

l

Click on the dimension that reports their distance from the Dining room wall.

l

In the inline text field, type 6’ and press the Enter key on the keyboard.

101

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

10. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

REPLICATING DOORS AND WINDOWS
Like most objects, doors and windows can be copied and pasted. Here, copies of windows at regular intervals are created.

To create a reflected copy of a window
1. Select the narrow window to the left of the front door in the Foyer.
2. Click the Copy/Paste

edit button, then click the Reflect About Object

edit button.

3. Move your mouse pointer over the front door. When you see a dashed vertical reflection axis, click once. A copy of
the window is created on the other side of the door.

102

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To copy windows at regular intervals
1. Select the window in the Kitchen and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button.

2. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:l

Check the box beside Copy and change the Number of Copies to 2.

l

Check the box beside Move, then specify the Y Delta value as -35 1/2". This value is equal to the width of eachwindow, 30", plus a 5 1/2" gap to accommodate a king stud, two stringers, and the windows’ rough openings.

lWhen you click OK, two copies of the window are created at 35 1/2" intervals along the same wall as the original.

3. With the two newly created windows selected, press the Shift key and click on the original window to add it to theselection. Then, use the Center Objects
edit tool to center the three windows in the Kitchen room, as describedin "To center a wall opening on page 98", above.
4. Repeat these steps to create a grouping of three windows centered in the Living room. This time, specify the X Delta
as -35 1/2".

103

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

5. When you have finished, Save

your work.

CREATING GROUPED WINDOW UNITS
Multiple adjacent windows as well as doors can be blocked into a single mulled unit. Here a mulled casement unit withcentral fixed glass component will be created.

To create a mulled unit
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the middle window in the Living room.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog, select"Fixed Glass" from the Window Type drop-down list, then click OK.
3. Select the window to its left and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Window

Specification dialog, under Component Options, select Right Hinge instead of Left Hinge, then click OK.
4. With the window still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the other two Living room windows to selectall three as a group.
5. Click the Make Mulled Unit
6. Save

edit button.

your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Plan sets often include schedules for doors, windows, and more. Chief Architect’s schedules are dynamic reports of theobjects in the plan and will update automatically if any are modified.

104

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Although a typical plan is unlikely to have more than one or two door and window schedules, it is still a good idea to set up
the schedule defaults the way you want them in your template plans.

To set schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Schedules" to expand the category.

l

Select "Door Schedule" and click the Edit button.

2. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Door Schedule Defaults dialog, which opens next, make sure that Display
Column Headings in Schedule is checked.
3. Still on the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, customize the Columns to Include list:lSelect "Dimensions" in the list of Available Columns and click the Add button.

l"Dimensions" is added to the Columns to Include list, and is selected. Click the Move Up button until it islocated between "Floor" and "Size".

lWith "Dimensions" still selected, Add the "Top" column, as well.

l

Because "Dimensions" was selected in the list of Columns to Include, "Top" is placed directly beneath it.

lSelect "Size" from the list of Columns to Include and click the Remove button.

lRemove the "3D Exterior Elevation", "Code", and "Manufacturer" columns, as well.

4. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel:l

Notice that like Wall Schedules, Door Schedules are set to Use Layer for Text Style.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

5. Returning to the Default Settings dialog, select "Window Schedule" and click the Edit button.
6. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Schedule Defaults dialog:l

Add "Dimensions" and "Top" to the list of Columns to Include, as described above.

l

Remove the "3D Exterior Elevation", "Size", "Egress", "Code", and "Manufacturer" columns from the list of
Columns to Include.

7. On the MAIN TEXT STYLE panel, notice that Window Schedules are also set to Use Layer for Text Style.
8. Click OK and then Done to close the Default Settings dialog and apply your changes.
To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

105

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add door and window schedules
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. The "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail window opens and is empty.
4. Select Tools> Schedules> Door Schedule
5. Select Tools> Schedules> Window Scheduleand click once to place a Door Schedule at that location.
and click below the Door Schedule to place a Window Scheduleat that location.
6. Click on the new Window Schedule to select it, then align it with the Door Schedule’s left edge:lHold down the Shift key and click on the Door Schedule to select them both as a group.

l

Click the Align/Distribute Objects

edit button.

In the Align/Distribute Objects dialog, under the "Move Objects Horizontally to" heading, select Left Edges andclick OK.

l

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

The widths of these schedules’ individual columns can also be edited so that they align.

By default, door and window schedules are ordered according to the information in the Labels column. You can, however,change their order using either of two methods.

To turn off schedule callouts
1. Select Window> Tile Vertically and in the plan view, notice that doors and windows now have callout labels withschedule numbers.
2. With the Window Schedule still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

l

On the LABEL panel of the Window Schedule Specification dialog, select the Use Labelradio button.

l

On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel of the Window Schedule Specification dialog, remove the "Number" column
from the list of Columns to Include, then click OK.

3. In plan view, notice that windows now display their original labels instead of callout shapes with schedule numbers.
4. Turn off the display of the Door Schedule callout labels and remove the "Number" column from that schedule, as

106

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

well.
5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. With doors and windows in place, they
can be annotated.
The Working Plan View is active as it was in the previous four tutorials, so "Plan Rich Text and Callout Defaults" are stillin use.

To set leader line preferences
1. Select Edit> Preferencesin Windows orChief Architect> Preferences

in macOS.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Preferences dialog:l

The Number of Segments for Leader Lines can be set here.

lUncheck Create Rich Text to create simple Text objects when the Leader Line tool is used, if you prefer.

3. In this example, these settings will not be changed, so click Cancel.
Typing text is a simple task, but with a few extra steps this text can also appear in the Comments column of the Door
Schedule.

To add Comments to an object
1. In plan view, Zoom

in on the Garage area, then click the Select Objects

button.

2. Select the hinged door separating the Garage from the Foyer and click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel of the Door Specification dialog, type the following into the Comment field: 20
minute4. Press the Enter key to wrap to a second line, then type: self-closing

5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

107Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To add leader line annotations
1. Begin by moving the Garage room label down, towards the center of the Garage room.
2. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line, then:l

In the Garage, click and drag a line from the door to the Foyer down and to the right. When your mouse pointer isbelow the Garage stairs, release the mouse button.

l

Click and drag a second line straight to the right from the end of the first line.

lWhen you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.

3. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lClick the Insert Macrobutton.

l

Select "Comment" from the Referenced Object submenu.

lClick OK.

4. The Comment entered in the Door Specification can now be seen in both plan view and the Door Schedule.

108

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

Additional Note callouts can be created that refer to the Floor Plan Notes schedule.

To add plan notes
1. Select CAD> Text> Note

, then click once near the sliding door in the Kitchen.

2. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:l

In the Text field, type: tempered glass.

l

Make sure General is the selected Type.

l

Click OK.

3. Notice that the new Note is automatically assigned the number 2, as 1 was created in the Interior Stairs tutorial.
4. Click on the Note shape to select it, then:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit buttonlClick once in front of the side lite to the right of the front door to create a copy at that location.

5. The pasted Note has the same schedule number as the original because they have the same text.
6. If you want, you can open the Schedules Detail to confirm that the Floor Plan Notes schedule has updated to include
the new Notes.
7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Decks and Porches tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

109

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Doors and Windows

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Windows.
Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding doors and windows to a design.
To set the Door Defaults

89

To add hinged doors

90

To add a sliding door

91

To add other types of doors

91

To change the door swing

92

To change a door’s size

93

To change a glass door’s lites

93

To specify door hardware

94

To choose a door style from the library95

To specify a door’s casing95

To set window defaults

96

To place a window

96

To edit a window

97

To center a wall opening98

To set Dimension Defaults

99

To position doors and windows using dimensions

100

To create a reflected copy of a window102

To copy windows at regular intervals

103

To create a mulled unit

104

To set schedule defaults

105

To add door and window schedules

106

To turn off schedule callouts

106

To set leader line preferences

107

To add Comments to an object

107

To add leader line annotations

108

To add plan notes109

To save a plan revision

110

110

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 5 - Doors and Windows
What are the different ways to specify or change the hinge side of a door? The swing side?
l

You can change the hinge and swing side of a door as it is being placed by moving the mouse while holding themouse button.

l

Once a door is created, hinge and swing side can be modified using the edit handles as well as the Change
Opening/Hinge Side and Change Swing Side edit tools.

What are three examples of door and window attributes that are found in the Library?
l

Hardware, door style, and materials can all be selected in the Library.

What are the different ways to change the width of a door or window?
l

Door and window width can be changed using the edit handles and in the object’s specification dialog.

What tool can be used to create multiple windows at once?
l

The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool lets you replicate objects like windows at regular intervals.

What edit tools are useful for creating identical windows on either side of a door or window?
l

The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools allow you to create identical windows on either side of a door.

Where do you specify how Auto Exterior Dimensions locate doors and windows?
l

You can specify how Auto Exterior Dimensions locate doors, windows, and interior walls in the Auto Exterior
Dimension Defaults dialog.

Where do you control the appearance of callout labels?
l

You can specify whether objects like windows and doors use schedule callout labels, as well as their appearance, on
the Labels panel of the Schedule Specification dialog.

What is an example of an object attribute that can be reported in both a schedule and a text object with an arrow attached tothat object?
l

The Comments that can be specified on the Object Information panel of many specification dialogs can be listed in theComments column of a schedule as well as inserted into a text object using the %comment% Referenced Object
macro.

What tool lets you create a Rich Text object attached to a text line with arrow?
l

The Leader Line tool lets you create a Rich Text object along with a segmented line with arrow.

What button can you click in the Rich Text Specification dialog to insert dynamic information about an object into the text?
l

The Insert Macro button lets you insert dynamic text macros into text objects.

Decks and Porches
Deck and Porch rooms are Room Types with a number of special characteristics.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating Deck and Porch rooms. Concepts introduced include:111

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

File Management

112

Productivity Tips

112

Setting the Defaults

113

Using Plan Views

113

Railings for Decks and Porches

113

Creating Porch Rooms

115

Creating Deck Rooms

116

Dimensioning Exterior Rooms

118

Creating Porch and Deck Supports

121

Drawing Deck Stairs

125

Creating Concrete Stairs

127

Adding Annotations

128

Creating Revisions

131

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Doors and Windows tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Windows andCHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Windows.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create Deck and Porch rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglWhen Deck Railings define a room, the room is specified as a Deck automatically.

l

Deck posts and beams generate automatically on the floor below the Deck room.

l

Stairs that are not placed inside a room will draw in a downward direction and seek the terrain.

l

The Center Object

edit tool can be used to center a selected object relative to another object.

ContentlCreate template plans that have the Deck and Porch Room Type Defaults set the way you want them, ready for use
when you begin a new plan.

112

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and PorcheslA selection of name brand deck planking catalogs are available for download in the "Materials and Surfaces" categoryof the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that
page.

InterfacelObject Snaps can be helpful when positioning one object relative to another.

lTemporary Dimensions display when an object like a wall is selected and can be used to move that object.

lMultiple line items in a list, as well as multiple objects, can be group-selected using the Shift and Ctrl/⌘ keys.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlF6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + W - Close Viewl

Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating Deck and Porch rooms, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before drawing the railings that define Deck rooms, the Deck Railing Defaults should be set. See To set the Deck Railing
Defaults on page 114.
Similarly, the defaults for Half Walls, which will be used here to define a Porch, can be set in advance. See To set the Half
Wall Defaults on page 115.
Structural characteristics of Deck and Porch rooms should be set before Deck and Porch rooms are created. See To set Deck
Room Defaults on page 117 and To set Porch Room Defaults on page 115.
Before drawing stairs on the exterior of the structure, it is a good idea to set the Exterior Stair Defaults. See To set theExterior Stair Defaults on page 125.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for drawing deck and porch rooms.

RAILINGS FOR DECKS AND PORCHESIn Chief Architect, railings are a special type of wall that do not build to the ceiling height of the rooms they define.
Railings are typically used to define Deck rooms as well as Porches. There are three types of railing in Chief Architect:
Deck Railings, regular Railings, and solid Half Walls.
Deck Railings use a single layer wall type so there is no siding material on the sides of deck platforms.

113

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set the Deck Railing Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Walls" in the tree list to

expand the category.
2. Select "Deck Railing Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Deck Railing Defaults dialog.
3. On the GENERAL panel, notice that No Locate is checked. When this box is checked, Deck Railings will be ignored
by Auto Exterior Dimensions by default.
4. On the WALL TYPES panel, note that the default Wall Type is "Deck Railing/Fence" and click the Define button.
5. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog:l

Notice that the "Deck Railing/Fence" wall type is composed of a single 3 1/2" layer of framing.

l

In the Wall Layers table, click in the Thickness field, then type 5 1/2".

lClick OK to return to the Deck Railing Defaults dialog.

6. On the RAIL STYLE panel, under the Newels/Posts heading, select Post to Beam.
7. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel, under the Newels/Posts heading:lSpecify the Newels/Posts Width as 5 1/2".

lSelect a Newels/Posts Type from the Library. Here, the Exterior "Capped Post" is used.

8. On the MATERIALS panel:lSelect the "Baluster" component, then hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the "Beam", "Rail", and "Main"components to add them to the selection.

lClick the Select Material button and select "Color - White" from the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the SelectMaterial dialog.

9. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
Unlike Deck Railings, regular Railings are intended to define rooms with enclosed floor platforms. In the Interior Stairs
tutorial, interior railings with newels and balusters are generated by the Auto Stairwell edit tool.

114

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set the Railing Defaults
1. With the Default Settings dialog still open, select "Railing Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Railing
Defaults dialog.
2. On the GENERAL panel, notice that No Locate is checked, just as it is for Deck Railings.
3. On the WALL TYPES panel, note that the default Wall Type is "Interior Railing" and click the Define button.
4. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog, notice that the "Interior Railing" wall type is composed of three layers: a 3 1/2"
framing layer surrounded by two layers of 1/2" drywall.
5. Click Cancel to return to the Default Settings dialog.
Like other types of Railings, Half Walls can also be drawn to define exterior rooms like Porches.

To set the Half Wall Defaults
1. With the Default Settings dialog still open, select "Half Wall Defaults" and click the Edit button to open the Half
Wall Defaults dialog.
2. On the GENERAL panel, both Railing and No Locate are checked.
lLeave Railing checked.

lUncheck No Locate.

3. On the WALL TYPES panel, select "Siding-6" from the Wall Type drop-down list.
4. Check the box beside Pony Wall, then:lSelect "Stone-6" from the Lower Wall Type drop-down list.

lNotice that the Elevation of Lower Wall Top is 20", which is the value set in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog.

5. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel:lWhen a wall is both a Railing, as Half Walls are, and a Pony Wall, the Height setting only affects the height of
the Upper Wall.

l

Specify the Height as 16".

6. Click OK to close the Half Wall Defaults dialog, then click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.
7. Remember to Save

your work.

CREATING PORCH ROOMS
Porches are another special room type with characteristics of both interior and exterior rooms.

To set Porch Room Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Porch", and click the Edit button.

115

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Porch Room Type Defaults dialog,l

Notice that unlike Decks, Porch rooms have Roof and Ceiling Over This Room checked.

lClick the Floor Structure Edit button and note that the floor is constructed of 4" of concrete.

4. Click Cancel to close all three dialogs.

To create a porch
1. On Floor 1, Zoom

out so the front exterior wall can be seen.

2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Half Wall, then click and drag to draw two half walls enclosing the area outside

the front door.
3. Notice that the Auto Exterior Dimensions update to locate the new railings but no longer locate the entry door orside windows. This will be addressed in a moment.
4. Select the front Porch wall, then use either of the Auto Exterior Dimensions that locate it to position it 8’ from thewall with the entry door.
5. Select the left vertical wall and drag its Moveedit handle to align it with the interior wall separating the Dining

room and Foyer.
6. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in the newly created room to select it.

7. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Porch"from the Room Type drop-down list and click OK.

8. Saveyour work.

CREATING DECK ROOMS
Decks are exterior rooms that are defined by the deck railings and exterior walls that enclose them. When an exterior roomis drawn using the Deck Railing tool, the room is automatically assigned the exterior room type of Deck.

116

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To set Deck Room Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Deck", and click the Edit button.
3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Deck Room Type Defaults dialog:l

Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is unchecked and that its total
thickness is 0".

l

Click the Planks/Joists Edit button.

4. In the Floor Structure Definition dialog, change the Thickness of Layer 1 to 1" and click OK.
5. On the DECK panel of the Deck Room Defaults dialog, change the Plank Width to 5 1/4" and the Plank Gap
Width to 1/4".
6. On the DECK SUPPORT panel:l

Notice that the Deck Post Footings have a Height Above Terrain setting with a value of 6".

lSpecify the Deck Post Footings Thickness as 30". This value is the footings total height, measured from top tobottom.

7. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To draw a deck
1. Zoomout so the back exterior wall can be seen.

2. Select Build> Railing and Deck> Straight Deck Railing, then click and drag to draw three Deck Railings at

the back of the structure.
lNotice that when a room is created using Deck Railing, the room is automatically specified as a Deck andgiven a room label.
l

Notice, too, that the Auto Exterior Dimensions do not update when the Deck is created because of the Deck
Railings' No Locate setting.

3. Click in the Deck room to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification

dialog:l

On the GENERAL panel, under the Living Area heading, notice that Decks are Excluded from the Living Area
calculation by default but that you can change this here if you wish.

117

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and PorcheslOn the STRUCTURE panel, note that by default, Roof Over This Room and Ceiling Over This Room areunchecked, then click Cancel.

DIMENSIONING EXTERIOR ROOMS
Exterior dimensions are not always drawn the same way in the presence of exterior rooms like Decks and Porches as they
are elsewhere.
For added clarity, dimensions can be repositioned outside the Deck room.

To move dimension lines
1. Group-select the three horizontal Auto Exterior Dimensions that run through the Deck room:l

Click the Select Objects

button, then draw a small rectangular marquee around sections of all three

dimension lines.
l

You can also click on one dimension line, hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, then click on the other two
to select all three.

2. Click the Transform/Replicate Objects

edit button.

3. A Question message box will confirm whether you want to turn off the Auto Refresh option for Auto Exterior
Dimensions in the saved "Plan Dimension Defaults". Click Yes.
4. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, which opens next:l

The box beside Move should be checked. If there is not, click to add a check mark.

l

In the Y Delta field, type 96" or 8'.

l

Make sure that Relative to Itself is checked and click OK.

5. The three dimension lines will all move 8' upward onscreen, out of the area of the Deck room.

With the Porch and Deck rooms created, the Auto Exterior Dimension lines can be edited to locate the Deck Railings thatdefine them as well as features inside the Porch.

118

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To add and remove extension lines
1. Select the vertical Auto Exterior Dimension that locates walls on the right side of the structure.

l

The dimension line's square Move edit handle has a red fill color and displays at the point where you clicked.

l

The diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle displays near the Move handle.

lWhen you move your mouse pointer over the Add Extension Line handle, it displays a two-headed arrow.

2. Click and drag the Add Extension Line edit handle towards the horizontal Deck Railing's exterior side.

l

When an Extension Line preview snaps to the exterior side of the Deck Railing, release the mouse button.

3. Repeat steps 1-3 on the left side of the structure.
4. Select the horizontal Auto Exterior Dimension that locates walls at the back of the structure and repeat steps 1-3 toadd extension lines that locate the exterior sides of the two vertical Deck Railings.
5. Zoom, scroll, or pan so the front of the structure and the front Auto Exterior Dimensions can be seen.
6. Select the vertical Auto Exterior Dimension that locates wall openings on the front wall of the structure.

119Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porchesl

The dimension line has a circular Add Segments edit handle just beyond each end.

lWhen you move your mouse pointer over the Add Segments handle, it displays a two-headed arrow.

7. Click the Add Segments handle on the right end and drag to the right until it reaches the left wall of the Garage andthe dimension line that locates the Garage Door.

l

As your mouse pointer reaches the door and side lites, new extension lines will locate the sides of these
openings as well as the Closet wall.

l

When an Extension Line preview snaps to the exterior side of the Garage wall, release the mouse button.

8. With the dimension line still selected, remove the extension line locating the Closet wall:l

Click the diamond-shaped Extension Line End handle located at the Closet wall.

lDrag it downward, away from the structure and any objects that it might locate instead.

lWhen you release the mouse, the extension line will be removed.

9. Select the horizontal dimension line that locates walls on the front of the structure and repeat steps 1-3 to add anextension line to the closet wall.
Auto Exterior Dimensions were already used to locate the Porch Half Walls. Now that dimensions locate the Deck Railings,
they can be used to position them as well.

120

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To resize the Deck room
1. Select the left vertical Deck Railing, then click on the dimension that reports its distance from the left exterior wall.
In the inline text field, type 36’ and press Enter.
2. Select the right vertical Deck Railing and position it 36" from the right exterior wall.
3. Select the horizontal Deck Railing, then click on either dimension that reports its distance from the exterior wall of
the house. Type 8’ in the inline text field and press Enter.
4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Floor Overview

to see the results.

lNotice that the Porch has a concrete slab floor.

lClick and drag using the Mouse-Orbit CameralNotice that the program automatically generates planking, joists, beams, and posts with footings.

lNote, too, that the post footings are located at the same height as the foundation wall footings because there isno terrain present.

tool until the Deck room can be seen.

5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view and remember to Save

your work.

CREATING PORCH AND DECK SUPPORTS
Because porch stem walls and deck post footings are measured relative to grade, now is a good time to add terrain to theplan. The terrain should always be drawn on either Floor 0 or 1.

To create a Terrain Perimeter
1. On Floor 1, select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter
2. Select Window> Fill Window.

so that the entire Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

3. To make the edges of the terrain easier to see while editing it, temporarily switch to the "Terrain Plan View".
lClick the Saved Plan View Control

Plan View

the drop-down list.

121

in the top toolbar and select "Terrain Plan View" from

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porchesl

You can also open the "Terrain Plan View" in a separate view window via the Project Browser. See Using Plan
Views on page 6.

lNotice that the dimensions and various interior details no longer display. The vertical sides of the Terrain
Perimeter are now easier to distinguish.

4. Select Terrain> Terrain Specificationand on the GENERAL panel of the Terrain Specification dialog:lUnder the Building Pad heading, uncheck Automatic.

lSpecify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28", then click OK.

lThis will place the terrain 28" below the first floor’s subfloor and about 1" below the slab floor in the Garage.

5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Terrain Perimeter to select it.

6. Use Temporary Dimensions to make the Terrain Perimeter polyline smaller for now:l

Select the top horizontal edge, then click on the Temporary Dimension that reports its distance from the bottom
edge.

l

Click in the inline text field and type 60’, then press the Enter key.

7. Use the Center Object

edit tool to center the terrain on the right side of the house:lWith the Terrain Perimeter still selected, click the Center ObjectlMove the mouse pointer over the right side of the house, along or just outside the right vertical exterior wall.

l

When you see a horizontal centering axis across the center of the wall, click once to center the terrain relative
to the length of that wall.

122

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and PorcheslHere, the outline of the Exterior Room is highlighted, indicating that the terrain will be centered along its rightedge.

8. Create a Perspective Floor Overview

and Orbit

the camera so the back Deck can be seen. Notice that thepost footings now only extend down to the level of the terrain.

9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.
The footings for deck posts are generated automatically and are set to display by default in most 3D views but not in planview.

To turn on the display of objects
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0 and notice that deck framing and post footings display.

2. Use the Saved Plan View Control

Plan View

to return to the "Working Plan View" and notice that theseobjects no longer display.
3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:lType the word "deck" in the Name Filter field. As you type, the names of the layers listed in the table will befiltered in response.

l

Locate the "Footings, Deck Post" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to add a check mark.

123

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Porches have slab floors and do not typically receive foundations; however, this porch is raised off the terrain and will needstem walls to support it.

To draw porch stem walls
1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Foundation Wall.

, then click and drag over the walls of the Porch visible in the

Reference Display.

3. Select each new foundation wall and click the Align with Wall Above

edit button to bring the two walls intoalignment with the Porch walls above.
4. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in the room defined by the porch stem walls to select it.

124

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

5. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog:lSpecify the Stem Wall Height as 37 1/2".

lUncheck Floor Under this Room.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

6. When you are finished, select Tools> Floor/>Reference Display> Reference Display
Floor, and Saveto turn off the Reference

your work.

DRAWING DECK STAIRSA set of stairs can now be drawn to connect the deck to the terrain.

To set the Exterior Stair Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Stairs and Ramps" in thetree list to expand the category.
2. Select "Exterior Stairs" and click the Edit button to open the Exterior Stair Defaults dialog.
3. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel:lSelect the same Newel Type from the Library as used by the Deck Railing: "Capped Post".

lSpecify the Newel Width as 5 1/2".

lUncheck Rail Passes Over Newel.

lSpecify the Newel Height as 44".

4. On the MATERIALS panel:lAssign "Color - White" to the Baluster, Rails, and Capped Post Main components.

lAssign "Redwood" to the Tread component.

lAssign "CA-B Pressure Treated Lumber" to the Stringer component.

5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
To make exterior stairs easier to see, the display of the "Dimensions, Plan" layer is turned off in the images that follow.

125

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

To draw deck stairs to the terrain
1. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 1, then Zoom

2. Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs

in on the left side of the Deck room.

, then move the mouse just outside the vertical deck railing on the left sideof the Deck room.
3. When Object Snaps are enabled, a Midpoint

snap indicator will display when the pointer is over the Deck

Railing’s center point.
4. Click once to create a short stair section that spans the difference in height between the Deck and the terrain. Notice:llUnlike interior stairs, which build up to the floor above and have an "UP" label, exterior stairs have a "DN"label.
A Doorway

opening is automatically added to the deck railing at the top of a staircase.

5. Select the stair section and click the Open Object

edit button.

l

On the GENERAL panel of the Staircase Specification dialog, specify the Width as 5’.

l

On the RAILING panel, check the boxes beside Railing On Left and Right, then click OK.

6. Notice:l

The stair section resizes about its center line and remains centered along the railing.

l

The doorway in the Deck Railing resizes automatically, as well.

7. Saveyour work.

126

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

CREATING CONCRETE STAIRS
Stairs can be edited to represent various construction methods.

To create concrete porch stairs
1. In the plan view, select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs.

2. Click just outside the front horizontal wall of the Porch room to place a stair section at that location.
3. Select the new stair section and center it relative to the front door:lClick the Center Object

edit button.

lMove the mouse pointer over the front door.

lWhen you see a vertical centering axis across the center of the door, click once to center the stairs relative to thedoor.

4. With the stairs still selected, click the Open Object

edit button to open the Exterior Staircase Specification

dialog.
5. On the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 6’.
6. On the STYLE panel:lSpecify the Tread Overhang as 0".

lUncheck Open Underneath and Open Risers.

7. On the RAILING panel, check the boxes beside Railing On Left and Right.
8. On the MATERIALS panel, assign a "Concrete" material to the Riser, Support Wall, Tread, Wall Trim, and Underside
components, then click OK.

127

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

9. You can see the results in a Perspective Floor Overview.

10. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Floor plans typically include text with a variety of different pieces of information. Some basic annotations for the exterior
deck and porch stairs can be added now.
The Working Plan View is active as it was in the previous four tutorials, so "Plan Scale Rich Text and Note Defaults arestill in use.and "To set the note defaults" on page 84 of the Interior Stairs Tutorial.

To add rich text annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the view, below the Porch stairs.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "concrete steps to grade" in the text field and click OK.

3. Create a Rich Text object that says "framed steps to grade" and position it at the bottom of the Deck stairs.
Additional Note callouts can be created that refer to the Floor Plan Notes schedule.

To add plan notes
1. Select CAD> Text> Note

, then click once along the back rail of the Deck room.

2. On the NOTE panel of the Note Specification dialog:

128

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porchesl

In the Text field, type: exterior landing 36" minimum in direction of travellClick OK.

3. Notice that the new Note is automatically assigned the number 3. Note 1 was added in the Interior Stairs tutorial,
while 2 was added in the Doors and Windows tutorial.
4. Click on the Note shape to select it, then:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit buttonlClick once near the bottom of the front Porch stairs to create a copy at that location.

Notes are assigned their schedule numbers in the order that they were created. The first Note created in this project, 1, wasin the Interior Stairs tutorial; 2 was created in the Doors and Windows tutorial, and the Notes created here wereautomatically assigned the number 3. Once created, though, schedule order can be changed in either of two ways.

To change schedule numbering
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Legends and Key Notes" Detail and click the Open button.
3. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the plan view and CAD Detail view side by side.

4. In plan view, zoom in on the Foyer and Porch so the 1, 2, and 3 Notes can be seen.
5. In the "Legends and Key Notes" detail, select the Floor Plan Notes schedule, notice the square Move Row edit
handles that display in the center of each cell in the first column.

129Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and PorcheslClick on the handle located over the 2 cell and drag downward.

lWhen the information in the second row can also be seen in the third row, release the mouse button.

l

The numbers stay in numerical order, but the Notes in the schedule change position.

6. In plan view, notice that the Note under the entry window is now 3 while the note at the bottom of the Porch stairs is
now 2.

7. Click in plan view to make it the active window, then click on Note 2 to select it.
8. On its edit toolbar, notice two buttons:lClick the Move Up in Schedulel

Click the Move Down in Schedule

9. Here, the Move Up in Schedule

edit button to move the selected object one row up in the schedule.
edit button to move the selected object one row down in the schedule.

button is clicked twice to move the Tempered Glass note to the first row.

10. When you are finished, close the Legends and Notes CAD Detail window and Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial. Before doing so, though, it is a good idea tobecome familiar with the information in the Roof Tutorials on page 133.

130

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Deck.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating porch and deck rooms.
To set the Deck Railing Defaults

114

To set the Railing Defaults

115

To set the Half Wall Defaults

115

To set Porch Room Defaults

115

To create a porch

116

To set Deck Room Defaults

117

To draw a deck117

To move dimension lines118

To add and remove extension lines119

To resize the Deck room121

To create a Terrain Perimeter121

To turn on the display of objects

123

To draw porch stem walls

124

To set the Exterior Stair Defaults

125

To draw deck stairs to the terrain

126

To create concrete porch stairs

127

To add rich text annotations

128

To add plan notes

128

To change schedule numbering

129

To save a plan revision

131

131

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Decks and Porches

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 6 - Decks and Porches
What are two ways that Deck Railing walls are different from other types of railings?
lDeck Railings use a single layer wall type so there is no siding material on the sides of deck platforms.

lWhen a room is enclosed by Deck Railings, it is assigned the "Deck" room type automatically.

What are two structural differences between Deck and Porch rooms?
lDeck rooms have a framed floor platform and no roof or ceiling, while Porches have a slab floor, a ceiling. and a roof.

What are the names of the two dimension line edit handles that let you add extension lines to new objects?
l

The Add Extension Line edit handle is diamond-shaped and displays near the Move handle. It can be used to add anextension anywhere along the length of the dimension line.

lThere is a circular Add Segments edit handle just beyond each end of a dimension line that lets you lengthen thedimension line.

How do you remove an extension line from a dimension line?
l

Click the diamond-shaped Extension Line End handle, drag it away from the marked object and any other objects it
might locate instead, and release the mouse button.

How do you specify whether a room is included in the total Living Area?
l

You can specify whether a selected room is included in the Living Area calculation on the General panel of its RoomSpecification dialog.

l

You can also set whether each Room Type is included or not in the Room Type Defaults dialog.

Where can the deck plank gap and width be set?
l

Deck plank gap and width can be set on the Deck panel of the Deck Room Defaults dialog.

lThese settings can be modified for a selected Deck room on same panel of the Room Specification dialog.

What tool is used to create deck and porch stairs?
l

The Straight Stairs tool can be used to create deck and porch stairs. Stairs can be customized to create a variety ofdifferent styles.

What are two ways to change the numbering of Notes and the associated line items in a key note list?
l

One way is to select a line item in a key note list or other schedule and click and drag its small square Move Row edit
handle upward or downward.

l

The other way is to select the Note or other object in the drawing itself and click the Move Up in Schedule or Move
Down in Schedule edit button.

132

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof Tutorials

Roof Tutorials

Chapter 2

The Roof Tutorials describe best practices for creating basic roof styles in Chief Architect and then adding a roof to Chic
Cottage.
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles
Hip Roofs
Gable Roofs
Dutch Gable Roofs
Shed Roofs
Offset Gable Roofs
Gambrel Roofs
Gull Wing Roofs
Half Hip Roofs
Mansard Roofs
Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch
Chic Cottage Roof
Dormers

134
136
136
137
138
138
139
140
141
142
142
143
168

133

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles

Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles
This tutorial uses a simple, rectangular structure to explain how to create common roof styles using roof style directives
assigned to the exterior walls.

To begin a new plan
1. If any plans are open, select File> Close All from the menu.
2. Select File> New Plan

to open a new plan.

3. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Walland draw a rectangular floor plan, measuring about 34 feet by 24feet (approximately 10.4 m by 7.3 m), in a clockwise direction.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview
5. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto create a 3D overview of the house.

to see both views at the same time.

ROOF STYLE DIRECTIVES IN WALLS
By default, the program will generate a roof plane bearing on each exterior wall that does not have a room-defining wall
directly above it, and will use the pitch specified in the Build Roof dialog. The result is a hip style roof; however, if you

134Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles

need a different condition over a particular wall to produce another roof style, you can define it in that wall’s specification
dialog.
Individual walls can be selected and edited in both 2D and 3D views. When multiple walls are to be edited, however, it isusually quicker and easier to work in plan view: in part, because you can hold down the Shift key and group-select walls.

To set a wall’s roof directives
1. Click the Select Objectslbutton, then click on a wall to select it.

To select multiple walls, hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and click on additional walls to add them tothe selection set.

2. Click the Open Object

button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

3. On the ROOF panel:l

The Roof Options control how the roof builds over the selected wall.

l

The Pitch Options control how steep the roof that bears on the selected wall is.

l

The Overhang setting lets you specify how far the roof above extends past the wall’s exterior.

l

The Auto Roof Return settings let you specify and customize automatic roof returns.

lLower Wall Type if Split by Butting Roof lets you create a lower wall type that follows the underside of an
adjacent roof plane, if one is present.

The Roof Styles described in this tutorial use only the Roof and Pitch Options.

To reset all roof directives
1. Select Edit> Reset to Defaults.
2. In the Reset to Defaults dialog, set the Reset Scope to All Floors, check Roof Directives in Walls, and click OK.

ATTIC WALLS
When a roof is generated, attic walls may also be generated. An Attic wall fills the space between the walls that define aroom and the roof above. The triangular-shaped wall of a gable, for example, is created using an Attic wall.
If you do not want to see attic walls in plan view, you can turn off their display.

To turn off the display of attic walls
1. In plan view, select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options(or press the ~ key) to open the Layer Display

Options dialog.
2. Find "Walls, Attic" in the Name column, remove the check from the Display column for this item, and click OK.

DELETING ROOFS
Whether a roof was drawn manually or automatically generated, deleting roof planes is easy:lSelect an individual roof plane and Deleteit.

lSelect Build> Roof> Delete Roof Planes

to delete all roof planes in the plan.

135

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Hip Roofsl

Select Edit> Delete Objects

and in the Delete Objects dialog, select either All Rooms On This Floor or All

Floors; place a check beside Roof Planes; and click OK to delete all roof planes either on the current floor or in theplan.
If a warning message states that roofs cannot be deleted while Auto Rebuild Roof is on, click the Yes button to turn off
Auto Rebuild Roof and delete the roof.

AUTO REBUILD ROOFS
Auto Rebuild Roofs is a convenient feature in Premier that automatically rebuilds the roof in a plan whenever the exterior
walls or floor/ceiling heights are changed. Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned off by default, and this tutorial is presented withthis feature disabled; however the information presented here also applies when it is enabled.

To turn on/off Auto Rebuild Roofs
1. Select Build> Roof> Build Rooffrom the menu.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Build Roof dialog, check or uncheck Auto Rebuild Roofs and click OK.

Hip Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane is built over every exterior wall in the plan that does not have anotherwall drawn above it. The result is referred to as a hip roof.

To create a hip roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Select Build> Roof> Build Rooffrom the menu to open the Build Roof dialog.

3. Check Build Roof Planes and click OK to generate a hip roof.

Gable Roofs
If you would like a gable over a particular wall rather than a roof plane bearing on it, you can specify it as a Full Gable
Wall in the Wall Specification dialog. To create basic gable roof, two walls should be specified as Full Gable Wall.

136

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dutch Gable Roofs

To create a gable roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects

tool, select the vertical wall on the left, hold down the Shift key, and select the verticalwall on the right. The two walls should be group-selected.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, select Full Gable Wall and click OK. See To set awall’s roof directives on page 135.
l

Alternatively, you can click the Change to Gable Wall(s)lTo remove the Full Gable Wall attribute from a selected wall, click the Change to Hip Wall(s)4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof

edit button.
edit button.

to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK.

Dutch Gable Roofs
A Dutch gable, sometimes called a Dutch hip, is a combination of hip and gable roof styles in which a gable is located at theend of the ridge, at the top of a hip roof plane.

To create a Dutch gable roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in To begin a new plan on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects

tool, select the vertical wall on the left, hold down the Shift key, and select the verticalwall on the right. The two walls should be group-selected.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:lSelect Dutch Gable Wall.

l

Specify the Starts at Height as 180".

4. Click OK to close the Wall Specification dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
5. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof

to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK.

137

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Shed Roofs

Shed Roofs
To create a single, sloping roof plane, or shed roof, two walls must be specified as Full Gable Walls, and one must be aHigh Shed/Gable Wall.

To create a shed roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Select the wall where you want the high end of the shed roof and open its Wall Specification dialog. On the ROOF
panel, check High Shed/Gable Wall and click OK. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
l

In this example, the lower wall on screen is set as the High Shed/Gable Wall.

4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof

to open the Build Roof dialog, specify a Pitch of 2 in 12, check Build Roof

Planes, and click OK.

Offset Gable Roofs
An offset gable is a type of gable roof with different pitches on each of the two roof planes and a ridge that is offset fromthe building’s center line. Assign a different pitch to the two roof planes in the Wall Specification dialog for the wall138

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Gambrel Roofs

supporting each one.

To create an offset gable roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in To begin a new plan on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Select the lower horizontal wall and open its Wall Specification dialog. On the ROOF panel, leave the Roof Options
unchecked and change the Pitch to 12 in 12. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof

to open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, specify the Pitch as

2 in 12, and click OK.

Gambrel Roofs
A gambrel or barn style roof has two pitches on each side of the ridge. The first (lower) pitch on either side is steeper thanthe pitch near the ridge.

To create a gambrel roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Click the Select Objects

tool, select the horizontal wall on the top, hold down the Shift key, and select thehorizontal wall on the bottom. The two walls should be group-selected.
4. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:lMake sure that the Pitch field has the Active Defaults

icon.

l

Check the box beside Upper Pitch.

lSpecify the Upper Pitch as 6 in 12 and the Start Height as 156".

l

To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.

5. Click OK to close the Wall Specification dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
6. Open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes, specify the Pitch as 12 in 12, and click OK.

139

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Gull Wing Roofs

Experiment with alternate pitches and overhangs. Also, try varying the height at which the second pitch begins so that you
can see the effect it has on the gambrel roof design.

Gull Wing Roofs
A gull wing roof has two pitches on either side of the ridge, as a gambrel does; but the first pitch of a gull wing is shallower
than the steeper upper pitch.

To create a gull wing roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls.
3. Click the Select Objects

tool, select one of the horizontal walls, hold down the Shift key, and select the otherhorizontal wall. The two walls should be group-selected.
4. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, change the following settings:lMake sure that the Pitch field has the Active Defaults

icon.

l

Place a check in the box beside Upper Pitch.

lKeep the Upper Pitch as 12 in 12 and change the Start Height to 125".

l

To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.

5. Click OK to close the dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
6. Click the Build Roof

tool, specify a Pitch of 3 in 12, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build Roof

dialog.

140

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Half Hip Roofs

Experiment with the height at which the second pitch begins so that you can see the effect it has on the gull wing roof
design.

Half Hip Roofs
A half hip roof has two gable ends. At the top of each gable is a small hip that extends to the ridge.

To create a half hip roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. As in the Gable Roofs on page 136 example, specify the left and right vertical walls as Full Gable Walls. In
addition, change the following Pitch Option settings:lCheck the box beside Upper Pitch.

lSpecify the Upper Pitch as 3 in 12 and set the Start Height at 170".

3. Click the Build Roof

tool, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build Roof dialog.

141

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Mansard Roofs

Mansard Roofs
A mansard roof is a hip roof with two pitches on the roof sections above each exterior walls: an extremely steep lower pitch
and a gently sloping upper pitch.

To create a mansard roof
1. Begin with the basic rectangular structure described in Getting Started with Automatic Roof Styles on page 134.
2. Click the Select Objects

tool, select one of the exterior walls, hold down the Shift key, and click on theremaining walls to select them as a group.
3. Open the Wall Specification dialog and on the ROOF panel, and change the following settings:lCheck the box beside Upper Pitch.

lSpecify the Upper Pitch as 1.5 in 12 and the Start Height as 132".

l

To learn more, see Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch on page 142.

4. Click OK to close the dialog. See To set a wall’s roof directives on page 135.
5. Click the Build Roof

tool, specify a Pitch of 24 in 12, check Build Roof Planes, and click OK in the Build

Roof dialog.

Finding the Start of an Upper Pitch
When creating a roof style with lower and upper pitches, you can determine the exact Starts at Height or In From Baseline
values that you need in an elevation view.

To find the start of an upper pitch
1. Generate the roof using only the first, lower pitch. Be sure to define all the roof information for each wall (gable,hip, first pitch, etc.).
2. Create a cross section view that includes the roof plane that will have the second pitch.
3. Select CAD> Points> Place Point, click to place a temporary point near the location where you want the second

pitch to start, then using the Point-to-Point Dimension

142

tool either:

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage RooflDrag a dimension line from the floor on Floor 1 (which has a height of 0 by default) to the temporary point.

lDrag a dimension line from the baseline to the vertical plane of the temporary point.

4. Enter either of these values in the Wall Specification dialog. You can press the Tab key to update the other value.
Click OK to close the dialog.

5. Open the Build Roof dialog, check Build Roof Planes and click OK to rebuild the roof.

Chic Cottage RoofWith a basic understanding of how automatically generated roofs work, a roof can be created in the Chic Cottage plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes techniques that can be used to create a custom roof for Chic Cottage. Concepts introduced include:
File Management

143

Productivity Tips

144

Setting the Defaults

144

Using Plan Views

145

Working in Camera Views

147

Adding a Roof to Chic Cottage

148

Controlling Roof Height

153

Creating a Curved Roof

157

Adding Roof Details

161

Moving the Display of Roof Planes

163

Adding Annotations

164

Creating Revisions

166

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Decks and Porches tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Deck and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,143

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

Chic Cottage-Deck.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create the roof in Chic Cottage, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditingllMany roof designs are best created by generating a roof automatically and then manually editing individual roof
planes.
The Join Roof Planes

edit tool lets you join the edges of two roof planes along a line or arc to form ageometrically correct valley, hip, or ridge.

Contentl

A selection of name brand roofing catalogs are available for download from the 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

InterfacelTiling 2D and 3D views can make it easier to manually edit a roof design.

lAuto Rebuild Roofs and tiled views are often helpful during roof design - in large plans, both can cause slowness onsome systems.

lWhen a roof design is complete, be sure to turn off Auto Rebuild to avoid unwanted changes.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + R - Build Roofl

F6 - Fill Windowl

F9 - Reference Displayl

3 - Add Break edit tooll

2 - Join Roof Planes edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating a roof, there are a number of defaults that should be borne in mind.

144

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also affect roof height. These include
the default Ceiling Heights and Floor and Ceiling Platform Thicknesses. See To set the 1st Floor Defaults on page 16 and"To set the default floor structures" on page 14 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, and will also affect how roofs build. In addition, a room can be set tohave a roof above it, or not. See To add a shed roof over the deck on page 152.
The settings in the Roof Defaults control the structure and appearance of the roof itself. See To set the roof defaults on page
148.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,including active Layer Set and Saved Defaults. In previous tutorials, the "Working Plan View" is active, the Active Layer
Display Options side window is used to turn the display of various objects off and on, and all annotations are created using
saved "Plan Rich Text Defaults" and "Plan Scale Callout Defaults" settings. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings"
on page 7 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task. You can switch between
Saved Plan Views in the Project Browser or using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the toolbars.

To open and examine a saved plan view
1. The Project Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window by default.
lClick on its tab to display it in front of the other side windows at that location.

l

If it is not open, select View> Project Browser.

2. Under the CHIC COTTAGE - CURRENT line item are a set of folders. The "Plan Views" folder should be
expanded already, but if it is not click the arrow to its left.
3. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
4. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice the various settings that control what displays in this view:l

The settings on the GENERAL panel control a variety of behaviors and display options.

l

The settings on the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel control which saved defaults and layer settings are active in theview. Notice that the "Roof Plan View" uses the "Roof Plan Layer Set".

l

The settings on the REFERENCE DISPLAY panel control the appearance of the Reference Floor in the view, as wellas whether it displays.

5. Click OK to close the dialog.
6. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Open View from the contextual menu. Notice:lThere are now two view window tabs above the active view window.

l

The "Roof Plan View" is now the active view.

lIn the Project Browser, both "Working Plan View" and "Roof Plan View" now have an icon indicating that they
are Open.

145

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

There are several ways to switch between open view windows, but clicking on the tab associated with a view window isusually the easiest.

To compare plan views
1. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the two windows side by side and compare their appearance.

2. Notice:l

Room labels, door and window labels, camera symbols, and multiple wall layers display in the "Working Plan
View" but not in the "Roof Plan View".

l

The dimensions, text and callouts created in previous tutorials are turned off in the "Roof Plan View".

l

The lines representing walls are lighter in color in the "Roof Plan View".

3. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options

to open the Active Layer Display Options

side window.
4. Notice that "Roof Plan Layer Set" is selected at the top of the side window, indicating that it is in use in the currentview.
5. Use the scroll bar to browse through the list of layers and notice:lMany of the layers are turned off.

l

The "Text" and "Text, Callouts" layers are turned off, while the "Text, Roofs" layer is turned on.

l

The "Walls, Normal" layer has a grey color assigned to it.

6. Click on the "Working Plan View" tab to make it the active view window.
7. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice:l

The "Working Layer Set" is now selected at the top of the side window.

l

Most of the layers are now turned on.

l

The "Text" and "Text, Callouts" layers are turned on.

l

The "Walls, Normal" layer color is black.

146

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

8. In the plan view, notice:l

The room labels, door and window labels, and multiple wall layers display.

l

The text and callout annotations created in previous tutorials are now turned on.

l

The lines representing walls are now black.

Although the display settings in the "Working Plan View" are useful for plan views, those in the "Roof Plan View" aretypical of roof plan drawings and will make working on roofs easier.

To close a plan view
1. There are several ways to close a plan view:lRight-click on its name in the Project Browser and select Close View from the contextual menu.

lClick the Close Tab button on its view window tab.

l

Select File> Close View while the view in question is active.

2. Close the "Working Plan View" using the method of your choice.
The "Roof Plan View" should now be the only open view window.

WORKING IN CAMERA VIEWS
Roofs can often be best worked on and understood when 2D and 3D views are tiled.

To tile floor plan and camera views
1. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 2.

2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview
3. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto create a 3D overview of the house.

to tile the overview and plan views side by side.

4. Click and drag with the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool active to orbit the camera around the model until the side of

the Porch can be seen.
5. Notice that the overview’s title bar is darker in color than that of the plan view. The darker title bar indicates that theoverview is the currently active view.

147Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. Click on the plan view’s title bar or anywhere within the view window to make it the currently active view instead.

ADDING A ROOF TO CHIC COTTAGE
By default, Chief Architect builds a roof plane bearing on each exterior wall, producing a hip roof style. See Hip Roofs on
page 136.

To set the roof defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, select "Roof" in the tree list and click the Edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Roof Defaults dialog:l

Check Auto Rebuild Roofs.

lSpecify the Pitch as 12" in 12".

3. On the STRUCTURE panel, specify the roof surface material, rafter depth, and other details of how the roof planes areto be constructed. The initial settings will be used for now and will be modified later. See "Setting the Defaults" onpage 394 of the Roof and Ceiling Framing Tutorial.

148

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your change.

With Auto Rebuild Roof checked, a roof builds automatically and will rebuild any time a change is made to the model that
affects the roof.

To add gable walls
1. In plan view, click the Select Objects

button, then click on the vertical wall on the left side of the plan to selectit.
2. There are two ways to specify this wall as a gable wall:l

Check Full Gable Wall on the ROOF panel of its Wall Specification dialog.

lClick the Change to Gable Wall(s)edit button.

149

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

3. Specify the front wall of the Garage as a Full Gable Wall, as well.

The Porch roof is built over the first floor, so it is lower than the rest of the roof. By adding a room above it, that roof canbe raised and a nested gable created.

To create a nested gable
1. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display, then Zoom

in on the Porch area in the frontof the structure.
2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Exterior Wall, then click and drag two walls over the red lines representing theporch Half Walls on Floor 1.
3. Specify the two walls as the "Shingle-6" wall type. See "To customize the second floor wall type" on page 51 of theMultiple Floors Tutorial.
4. Confirm that the walls are aligned with the Half Walls below. See "To align walls between floors " on page 56 of theMultiple Floors Tutorial.
5. Select the horizontal wall and specify it as Full Gable Wall.

150

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. When you are finished, select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display

or press the F9 key to turnthe Reference Display off again.
The vertical wall on the right also needs a gable above it: but only over the portion that is located behind the garage bumpout.

To create a reverse gable
1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool to orbit the camera

around the model until the right side of the structure can be seen.
2. Return to the plan view window, click on the right vertical wall to select it, then click the Add Breakedit

button.
3. Click once on the right vertical wall, anywhere along the back part of the Garage room to break the wall into twosegments at that location.

4. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the back portion of the vertical wall and specify it as a Full Gable

Wall.

151

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

5. With the wall still selected:lClick on the temporary dimension line that reports its length.

l

In the inline text field, type 28’ to match the length of the opposite exterior wall and press Enter.

6. The gable on the right is now identical to the gable on the left and a single ridge line generates across the structure.

By default, Deck rooms do not have a ceiling or a roof. Once created, though, Decks can be customized.

To add a shed roof over the deck
1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool to orbit the camera

around the model until the Deck room can be seen.
2. Return to the plan view window and go Down One Floor

to Floor 1.

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in the Deck room to select it.

4. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, check theboxes beside Roof Over This Room and Flat Ceiling Over This Room and click OK.

152

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

5. Specify the two vertical side railings of the Deck as Full Gable Walls.

6. Select the horizontal deck railing and click the Open Object

edit button.

7. On the ROOF panel of the Railing Specification dialog, specify the Pitch as 2" in 12".

8. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

CONTROLLING ROOF HEIGHT
There are a number of ways to control and customize roof heights. By default, they are based on the ceiling heights of therooms below.

To create a story and a half
1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Build Roof dialog, under the "Roof Height" heading:lSpecify the Raise/Lower All Roof Planes value as 18 1/8".

lCheck the box beside Ignore Top (2nd) Floor.

153

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roofl

Click OK.

3. Notice how the roof builds now:l

The roof builds over the ceilings on Floor 1 instead of Floor 2.

l

The roof directives of the walls on Floor 1 are used instead of those on Floor 2.

4. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section, then:l

Click and drag horizontally to create a camera inside the Kitchen room.

lLimit the length of the camera line to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera either straightleft to right or straight right to left on-screen.

l

For more information, see To create a Back Clipped Cross Section on page 19.

5. Zoomin on the right side of the section view, where the front wall meets the roof.

6. Select CAD> Dimension> Tape Measure, then click and drag to draw a temporary dimension line thatmeasures the distance from the top of the wall to the bottom of the roof plane that bears on it.

154

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

7. Notice that the distance matches the Raise/Lower All Roof Planes value set in the Build Roof dialog, then selectFile> Close View to return to the plan view window.
8. On Floor 1, specify the front walls of the Garage and the Porch as a Full Gable Walls. See To add gable walls on
page 149.
9. Specify the two side walls of the main structure as Full Gable Walls, as described above. See To create a reverse
gable on page 151.

Lowering the roof also reduces the top heights of many of the walls. In the front of the structure, the gable over the garage
door now has a gap behind it.

To edit the nested gable wall
1. Click in the overview to make it the active window, then use the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool to orbit the camera

around the model until the front of the structure can be seen.
2. Zoomin on the gable over the Porch and Garage rooms and notice the gap in the wall.

3. Return to the plan view window, go Up One Floor

to Floor 2, and zoom in on the area over the Porch andGarage rooms.

155

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the horizontal wall located over the front of the Porch room toselect it.
5. Click and drag its right end edit handle to the right until it reaches the vertical exterior wall on the right side of thestructure. The gap seen in the camera view will be closed.
6. Click in the small rectangular "Living" room that is created over the front of the Garage, then click the Open Object
edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Attic" from the Room Type drop-down list, thenclick OK.
8. Select the vertical wall on the left side of the Attic room and click the Add Breakedit button. Next:lClick once at the intersection of the vertical wall on the left side of the Attic room and the back horizontal wall.

lThis will prevent the vertical wall from building through the horizontal Shingle-6 wall.

9. Remember to Save

your work.

156

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage RoofCREATING A CURVED ROOF
Custom roof configurations can be created by generating a roof automatically and then editing individual roof planes.

To add a gull wing
1. With the plan view window active, go Down One Floor
2. Click the Select Objects

to Floor 1.

button, then click on the vertical Half Wall on the left side of the Porch room to selectit.
3. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the ROOF panel of the Railing Specification dialog:lSpecify the Pitch as 4" in 12".

lCheck the box beside Upper Pitch.

lSpecify the Upper Pitch as 12" in 12".

lSpecify the In From Baseline value as 7’ and click OK.

157

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

4. Notice that because of the reduced pitch, the lower Porch roof has a deeper eave so that it can have the same fascia
height as the adjacent roof eave.
Once created, roof planes can be individually selected and edited. In order to edit a roof plane, Auto Rebuild Roofs must be
turned off.

To edit roof overhangs
1. In the plan view window, Zoom
2. Click the Select Objects

in on the Porch, Foyer, and Dining rooms.

button, then click on the edge of the roof plane located over the left porch Half Wall toselect it.
l

To produce a Temporary Dimension that reports the eave depth, click on the lower portion of the eave edge,
across from the exterior corner of the Porch.

3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the eave edge is from the framing layer of the Half Wall.

4. A Question message box will ask if you want to turn off Auto Rebuild Roofs. Click Yes to close the message box
and continue editing the selected roof plane.
5. Type 18" in the inline text field and press the Enter key.
6. Next, select the main roof plane located over the Foyer and Dining rooms.

158

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

7. Click the Add Breakedit button, then move your mouse pointer over the point where the roof plane’s angled

valley edge crosses the exterior of the Porch’s side wall.

8. When the square Endpoint

Snap Indicator displays, click once to break the angled edge into two segments andadd a corner edit handle at that point.
9. Click on the corner edit handle located between the horizontal eave edge and the angled valley edge and drag to theright until it meets the surface of the Porch side wall.

10. To see the results in 3D, Orbit

the camera so that the valley behind the Porch can be seen.

The horizontal eave of the main roof now extends under the higher eave of the Porch roof.

159

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage RoofTo create a curved roof plane
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the edge of the roof plane located over the left porch Half Wall toselect it.
2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the ROOF panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:lSelect the Lock radio button next to Ridge Top Height.

l

Check the box beside Curved Roof.

lSpecify the Angle at Eave as 0°, then press the Tab key to update the other settings.

lNotice that the Angle at Ridge and Radius to Roof Surface both update.

lClick OK.

3. Click on the edge of the Porch roof plane that extends over the Foyer room to make it the Selected Edge.
4. Click the Join Roof Planes

edit button, then move your mouse pointer into the Foyer room.

5. When the larger roof plane becomes highlighted, click once.

160

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. The two roof planes now meet along a curved valley.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ROOF DETAILS
Chief Architect offers a variety of tools for adding architectural detail to a roof design.
Auto Roof Returns can be specified for any wall, and will generate on Full Gable Walls.

To add roof returns
1. Select the wall at the front of the Garage and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog:l

Check the box beside Auto Roof Return.

lSpecify the Roof Type as Hip.

l

Check the box beside Include Frieze.

lClick OK.

Frieze molding can be specified in the Roof Defaults and Build Roof dialogs. Since the Porch roof has been manuallyedited, though, rebuilding the roof is not the best option.

161

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

To add frieze moldings
1. Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:l

Notice that most of the values are reported as "No Change".

lThis is because this dialog is shared by all roof planes in the plan: as though they had been group-selected.

3. On the FRIEZE panel, click the Add New button.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

lType the word ’Frieze’ in the Search field and press the Enter key to perform a Text

search.

l

Right-click on an item in the search results and select Show in Browser from the contextual menu to see its
location in the tree list.

lSelect the "FZ02" profile and click OK

5. Confirm that the frieze molding Type is set to "Eave and Gable", then click OK to add frieze molding under theeaves of the roof.

162

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

6. Frieze molding can be seen in the 3D overview if you Zoom in on the overhang area of any wall.

7. When you are finished, close the camera view and remember to Save

your work.

MOVING THE DISPLAY OF ROOF PLANES
Although the roof in this plan was generated on Floor 1 owing to the Ignore Top Floor setting, most roof plans show thewalls on the top living floor of the structure. The display of roof planes can easily be moved from floor to floor as needed
without affecting the height of the roof structure.

To move the display of roof planes
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview
2. Select Window> Tile Vertically
3. Go Down One Floor, then make the plan view the active window.

to Floor 1 and Zoom

4. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane.

out until the entire structure can be seen.

, then:l

Hold down the Shift key, then click and drag a rectangular selection marquee around the entire structure.

lNotice that the Status Bar states that seven objects are selected.

5. Click the Display On Floor Above

edit button and notice that the roof planes disappear in plan view but are

unchanged in the overview.
6. Go Up One Floor

and note that the roof planes are now found on Floor 2.

7. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser. Next, right click on the "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
8. On the GENERAL panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, select "2nd Floor" as the Floor that is usedwhenever this view is opened, and click OK.
9. Close the 3D Overview window and Save

your work.

163

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith the roof in place, some basic roof annotations can be added.
In previous tutorials, the "Working Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Plan Defaults" for annotations
like Rich Text and Dimensions, and were placed on specific layers like "Text" and "Dimensions, Manual". Those layers
were turned off, however, when the "Roof Plan View" was opened. See To compare plan views on page 146.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing roofs, another benefit of switching to the "Roof Plan View" is thatannotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means that roof annotations will display in theroof plan but not in other views.
As described in previous tutorials, one way to access the defaults for annotations is by selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Another way to access them is through the Saved Plan View Specification dialog.

To set dimension defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Expand the "Plan Views" folder if necessary, then right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from thecontextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice:l

The Default Set that the view is Currently Using is the "Roof Default Set".

l

Most of the Selected Defaults have names that begin with "Roof".

lTo the right of each of the defaults are a set of buttons allowing you to manage them.

4. Click the Edit button to the right of Dimensions to open the Dimension Defaults dialog. Notice:
5. "Roof Dimension Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
6. On the LAYER panel, the "Dimensions, Roofs" layer is set as the layer on which manually drawn dimensions areplaced by default.
7. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel:l

Under the Walls heading, make sure that Wall Dimension Layer is selected.

l

Make sure under CAD Objects, Lines/Sides is checked.

8. Click OK to close both dialogs.
A dimension line can be added to indicate the depth of the roof overhang, often abbreviated as O.H. in plans.

To create a dimension line with additional text
1. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension, then click and drag a horizontal line from the right verticaleave to the exterior wall to its left.

164

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

2. Zoom in on the dimension line and confirm that it is locating the roof plane edge and the wall’s framing layer.

3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the PRIMARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog:lUncheck Use Default Formatting.

lSelect the inch symbol (") from the Units drop-down list.

5. On the SEGMENTS panel:l

In the Leading Text field, type: O.H.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

6. A Leader Line for dimension text is helpful when a segment's text is longer than the segment itself. Move thisdimension's Leader Line from the left to the right:

165

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roofl

Click on the dimension line to selected it.

lClick the small, square Move Dimension Label edit handle located over the text and drag it to the right.

lWhen the preview of the text is in a position that you like, release the mouse button.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

Additional roof annotations that include CAD objects are also added in the Dormers tutorial. See "Adding Annotations" onpage 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.
The Dormers tutorial describes several ways that dormers can be added to the Chic Cottage roof. Or, you can continue
working on this plan in the Custom Ceilings tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Roof.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating automatically generated and manually edited roofs.
To open and examine a saved plan view145

To compare plan views146

To close a plan view147

To tile floor plan and camera views147

To set the roof defaults

148

166

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Chic Cottage Roof

To add gable walls

149

To create a nested gable

150

To create a reverse gable

151

To add a shed roof over the deck152

To create a story and a half

153

To edit the nested gable wall155

To add a gull wing

157

To edit roof overhangs

158

To create a curved roof plane160

To add roof returns

161

To add frieze moldings162

To move the display of roof planes

163

To set dimension defaults

164

To create a dimension line with additional text164

To save a plan revision

166

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 8 - Chic Cottage RoofName one or more reasons why switching to the Roof Plan View is helpful for working on roofs?
lInformation that is not relevant to roofs, such as room labels and general text, is not visible or in the way.

lWalls are unfilled and wall lines are lighter in color, making roof planes stand out more clearly.

lText is placed on the "Text, Roofs" layer in this view.

What edit tool is used to set the roof directives for the side walls of a shed roof?
l

The Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button lets you specify a selected wall as a Full Gable Wall, which is the setting thetwo sides of a shed roof should have.

What edit tool allows you to add a new corner to a roof plane?
l

The Add Break edit tool lets you add new corners to roof planes and other CAD-based object.

What edit tool allows you to join two roof planes along a valley, hip, or ridge?
l

The Join Roof Planes edit tool lets you join two roof planes so that they meet along a geometrically correct valley, hip,or ridge line.

By default, what determines the initial height of a roof over a structure?
l

By default, roof height is based on the ceiling heights of the rooms below.

In what dialog are automatic roof returns specified?
l

Automatic roof returns are specified on the Roof panel of the Wall Specification dialog. They are only created when
the wall is specified as a Full Gable Wall.

What layer are dimensions created on in the Roof Plan View?
l

In the Roof Plan View, dimensions are placed on the "Dimensions, Roof" layer.

167

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

How do you specify a non-default number format for a dimension line?
l

On the Primary Format panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog, uncheck "Use Default Formating" and thenspecify the Unit and other formatting options.

Dormers
Dormers can be created in three different ways: they can be placed using the Auto Dormer tools; generated when the rest of
the roof is built; and their individual components can be drawn manually.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating dormers. Concepts introduced include:
File Management

168

Productivity Tips

168

Setting the Defaults

169

Using Plan Views

169

Placing an Auto Floating Dormer

169

Placing a Structural Auto Dormer

172

Drawing a Structural Dormer

175

Drawing a Dormer Manually

175

Adding Annotations

182

Creating Revisions

186

FILE MANAGEMENT
In this In this tutorial, an alternative to the roof created in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial will be produced. Since it is a
design option, it will be saved in its own file rather than the main working file.

To create a plan option file
1. Select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT,

and click Openl

Alternatively, you can select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent
Files List.

2. Select File> Save As. In the Save Plan File dialog:l

Make sure that the Documents\Chic Cottage folder is the save location.

l

For the File name, type Chic Cottage-Dormer Option and click the Save button.

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create the roof in Chic Cottage, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

168Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

Drawing and Editingl

The Join Roof Planes

edit tool lets you join the edges of two roof planes along a line or arc to form ageometrically correct valley, hip, or ridge.
lLike other objects, Auto Dormers can be positioned using dimensions, temporary dimensions, and the Center Object
edit tool.

InterfacelTiling 2D and 3D views can make it easier to manually edit a roof design.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + R - Build Roofl

3 - Add Break edit tooll

2 - Join Roof Planes edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating dormers, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
When manually drawing dormers, settings in the Roof Defaults dialog as well as a number of other structural defaults isimportant. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 144 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
Before placing Auto Dormers, the Dormer Defaults should be also set. See To set the Dormer Defaults on page 169.
Dormer windows derive most of their settings from the Window Defaults, so if multiple dormers will be created, consider
modifying these as well. See To set the Window Defaults on page 170.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Roof Plan View will work well for adding dormers to the roof. See Chic Cottage Roof on page 143.

PLACING AN AUTO FLOATING DORMERAn Auto Floating Dormer is a non-structural dormer that rests on top of the roof.

To set the Dormer Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog, then click on "Dormer" in the tree list andclick the Edit button.
2. On the ROOF panel of the Dormer Defaults dialog, under the Framing heading, check the box beside Frieze.

169

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. On the WALLS panel:lSelect "Shingle-6" from the Wall Type drop-down list.

lSpecify the Width as 96".

l

Click OK.

The windows in Auto Dormers derive most of their initial settings from the Window Defaults dialog. Since the otherwindows in this plan have already been placed, adjusting some of the default settings for use in dormers will save time andhelp to avoid errors.

To set the Window Defaults
1. In the Default Settings dialog, click on "Window", then click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Window Defaults dialog:l

Do not change the Window Type. This setting is dynamic and will affect existing windows.

lSpecify the Width as 72" and the Height as 48".

lSpecify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".

3. On the LITES panel, specify the Lites Vertical as 3 and click OK.
4. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog.

To place an Auto Floating Dormer
1. On Floor 2 of Chic Cottage, Zoom

in on the left side of the structure.

2. Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating Dormer.

170

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. Click once in the space to the left of the staircase to place a dormer at that location.

To position an Auto Floating Dormer
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the front or side wall of the dormer to select it.

2. If the window becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object
3. With the dormer selected, click the Center Object

edit button.

edit button, then:lMove the mouse pointer into the room area just in front of the dormer.

lWhen the room is highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis line displays, click once.

171

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

4. With the dormer still selected, click on the Temporary Dimension line that reports how far its front wall is from theexterior wall in front of it.
5. In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.

To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the dormer window to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Window Specification dialog:lSelect "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.

lConfirm that the Width is 72" and the Height, 48".

lSpecify the Floor to Top as 56", then click OK.

lUnder Component Options, make sure the Left side is set to Left Hinges and the Right side, set to Right Hinge.

3. Create a Full Cameralview of the interior of the dormer to see the results.

Notice that none of the dormer walls extend down to the floor.

4. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save

your work.

PLACING A STRUCTURAL AUTO DORMER
Auto Dormers use the same defaults that Auto Floating Dormers use, but because they are structural dormers, they havemore requirements than Auto Floating Dormers.
The unused space next to and sometimes in front of a structural Auto Dormer should be specified as an Attic room andseparated from the living area by a Knee Wall.

To create a knee wall and Attic room
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options
window:

172. In the Active Layer Display Options side

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - DormerslType the word "ceiling" in the Name Filter field. As you type, the names of the layers listed in the table will
be filtered in response.

l

Locate the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to add a check mark.

l

Ceiling Break Lines indicate where the full height flat ceiling meets the sloped bottom of a roof plane.

2. Select Build> Wall> Straight Interior Wall, then draw a horizontal wall across the back of the structure, near

the Ceiling Break Line.
3. Once the Knee Wall is drawn, the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer can be turned off again.
4. Select the new wall and click the Open Object
ledit button.

On the ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog, check the box beside Knee Wall and click OK.

5. With the wall still selected, click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the back horizontal
exterior wall. In the inline text field, type 8’ and press the Enter key.
6. Click the Select Objects
Objectlbutton, then click in the narrow room defined by the Knee Wall and click the Openedit button.

On the GENERAL panel of the Room Specification dialog, select "Attic" from the Room Type drop-down list
and click OK.

7. When prompted to turn on the "Rooms, Labels" layer, click No, since room names are not typically included in roof
plans. Room labels are shown here for illustrative purposes only.

With a Knee Wall and Attic room created, a structural Auto Dormer can be added.

173

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To place an Auto Dormer
1. Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
2. Click the Select Objects, then click once in the Attic room, between the Knee Wall and exterior wall.

button, then click on the front or side wall of the dormer to select it.

3. If the window becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object
4. Click the Center Object

edit button.

edit button, then:lMove the mouse pointer over the center of the Auto Floating Dormer.

lWhen a dashed vertical centering axis line displays, click once.

5. With the dormer still selected, click on the edit handle over its front wall. Notice that the Temporary Dimension linethat locates its front wall reports how far it is from the edge of the Deck roof instead of the back exterior wall.
6. Select CAD> Manual Dimension> End to End Dimension, then click and drag a dimension line from theoutside of the back exterior wall to the front of the dormer wall.
7. In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.

8. Modify the new dormer’s window, as described above. See To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window on page 172.
l

Select "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.

lSpecify the window’s Width as 72" and its Height as 48".

lSpecify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".

lUnder Component Options, make sure the Left side is set to Left Hinge and the Right side, set to Right Hinge.

174

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

9. Create a Full Camera view of the interior of this dormer to see the results.

lNotice that unlike the Auto Floating Dormer, all three of this dormer’s walls bear on the floor.

10. Close the camera view and remember to Save

your work.

DRAWING A STRUCTURAL DORMER
A dormer can also be produced when the roof is built by creating the necessary structural conditions inside the house. For
details about this approach, see Knowledge Base article KB-00449 at www.chiefarchitect.com/support/database.html.

DRAWING A DORMER MANUALLY
Automatic Dormers are actually a collection of different architectural objects blocked together. These component objects
can be created individually to produce a manually-drawn dormer. Begin by creating a Perspective Full Overview and thentiling it and the plan view side by side. See "Working in Camera Views" on page 147 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

175

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To create a roof hole
1. Zoomin on the right back corner of the structure in plan view, then select Build> Roof> Roof Holeandclick and drag to draw a rectangular shape over the Attic and knee wall.
l

Make sure the rectangle is larger than the Auto Dormer to its left but does not extend past the edges of the roof
plane that contains it.

2. Select the roof hole and add an extra edge to its shape:lClick the Add Breakedit tool.

lMove your mouse pointer over the horizontal edge that is closest to the front of the structure and click once.

l

Click and drag the new Reshape edit handle that displays at the point where you clicked and drag it towards thefront of the building.

l

Make sure that you do not drag the handle past the roof plane’s horizontal ridge edge.

176

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To draw the dormer walls
1. Select Build> Wall> Exterior Walland draw a wall segment located inside the roof hole polyline.

l

Begin at the horizontal knee wall and draw upwards into the Attic room.

lNotice that the new wall segment extends up through the roof hole.

2. Draw two more exterior walls to create a small room on the Attic side of the knee wall, inside the area of the roof
hole.
3. Assign the "Shingle-6" Wall Type to the three new exterior walls. See "To customize the second floor wall type" onpage 51 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
4. Click on the horizontal knee wall to select it, then:lClick the Add Breakedit button.

l

Click the Sticky Modeedit button, which allows you to keep the Break tool active for multiple uses.

lClick once at each intersection where knee wall meets the two vertical dormer walls drawn in step 2, above.

5. Click the Select Objects
the Delete

button, then click on the wall segment located between the two wall breaks and click

button.

177

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

6. Click on the right vertical dormer wall to select it, then:lClick on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the vertical exterior wall on the right.

l

In the inline text field, type 3’ and press the Enter key.

7. Click on the left vertical dormer wall to select it, then:lClick on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the right vertical side wall.

l

In the inline text field, type 8’ and press the Enter key.

8. Click on the horizontal dormer wall to select it, then:lClick on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it is from the back exterior wall.

l

In the inline text field, type 2’ and press the Enter key.

l

Do not be concerned if any of the walls are no longer located within the area of the roof hole: the hole will beedited to fit the dormer perfectly in a moment.

9. Select Build> Window> Window, then:lMove the mouse pointer over the horizontal dormer wall.

l

When the Midpoint

Snap Indicator displays, click once.

10. Modify the new window to match those in the automatic dormers:lSelect "Double Casement" from the Window Type drop-down list.

lSpecify the window’s Width as 72" and its Height as 48".

lSpecify the Floor to Top height as 93 1/2".

178

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

Roof planes are often generated automatically; but they can also be drawn manually.
The dormer roof planes need slightly different default settings than the main roof. Roof Default settings can be set in either
the Roof Defaults or Build Roof dialog. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 144 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

To set the roof plane defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Select "Roof" and click the Edit button.

2. On the ROOF panel of the Roof Defaults dialog, which opens next:lSpecify both the Eave and Gable Roof Overhangs as 6".

lSpecify the Raise/Lower from Ceiling Height value as 0".

3. On the GUTTER panel, click the Delete button to remove the gutter profile from the table.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw the dormer roof planes
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane, then move your mouse pointer over the left vertical dormer wall.

2. Click and drag along the length of the wall to create the roof plane’s Baseline.
l

By default, the Baseline will snap to the outside of the wall’s Main Layer.

lAs you draw the Baseline, a rectangular preview outline indicates the location of the eave area.

179

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

3. Move your mouse pointer to the right, so it is located between the two vertical "Shingle-6" walls to specify the
direction of the roof plane’s pitch and location of its ridge.

4. Click once to create the roof plane.
5. Select the top horizontal edge of the new roof plane and click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far it isfrom the horizontal "Shingle-6" wall.

l

In the inline text field, type -6" and press the Enter key.

l

Notice that typing a negative number moves the selected edge to the opposite side of the wall.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create a roof plane with a Baseline over the right vertical "Shingle-6" wall.

180

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

7. Join the two roof planes to create the dormer roof ridge:lSelect the left roof plane and click on its right vertical edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l

Click the Join Roof PlaneslMove your mouse pointer over the right roof plane.

lWhen it becomes highlighted, click once. The two roof planes meet along the geometrically correct ridge line.

edit button.

To edit the dormer roof hole
1. Still in plan view, select the vertical edge on the left side of the roof hole, then:lNotice the Resize edit handle that displays where you clicked to select the edge.

l

Use the Resize handle to drag the roof hole edge until it snaps to the outside of the left dormer wall.

2. Repeat step 1 to snap the right edge of the roof hole to the right dormer wall.
3. Repeat step 1 to snap the horizontal edge of the roof hole to the horizontal dormer wall with the window.

4. Join the left roof plane with the larger roof to create a valley:

181

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - DormerslSelect the left roof plane and click on its bottom horizontal edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l

Click the Join Roof PlaneslMove your mouse pointer over the angled edge on the left side of the roof hole.

lWhen it becomes highlighted, click once. The two roof planes meet along the geometrically correct valley line.

edit button.

5. Repeat step 8 to join the right roof plane with the larger roof.

6. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith dormers added, the roof plan for this design option will require additional annotations.
The Roof Plan View is active as it was in the previous tutorial, so "Roof Rich Text Defaults" and other saved defaults set up
specifically for the "Roof Plan View" are in use.

To set the rich text defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Right-click on "Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit

button to theright of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Roof Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:l

Click the Uppercase

button.

l

Notice that the character size is set at 6".

182

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - DormerslClick the Print Sizebutton to open the Print Size Calculator dialog. At a printed scale of 1/4" = 1’, a capital A

will be 1/8" tall when printed. Click Cancel.
6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Roofs" layer by default when this Saved
Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add rich text annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the view, near the right side of the roof.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:l

Notice that Uppercase is active.

l

In the text field, type: valley flashing.

lClick OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.

3. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its triangular Rotate edit handle to adjust its
angle to match that of the angled roof valley.

CAD shapes are sometimes used along with text to annotation features of a plan. The most important CAD default to set inadvance is the Current CAD Layer.

To set the CAD defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser. Next, right-click on "Roof Plan View", and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the Current CAD
Layer is "CAD, Roof", then click OK.
The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools can be used to efficiently replicate annotation objects, just as they canarchitectural objects like windows. See "Replicating Doors and Windows" on page 102 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.

183

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To add CAD annotations
1. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline, click and drag across and down to create a rectangular shape, andrelease the mouse button.
2. Click on either of the polyline’s vertical edges to select it, then resize it using dimensions:lClick on the dimension that reports how far the selected edge is from the opposite edge.

l

In the inline text field, type 24 and press the Enter key.

3. With the edge still selected, make the polyline parallel with the nearby roof valley:lDouble-click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular

edit button.

l

In the Make Parallel/Perpendicular dialog, select Rotate entire polyline and click OK.

lMove the mouse pointer over the angled roof valley on the right. When a dashed alignment axis line displays
parallel to the roof valley, click once.

4. Center the polyline over the valley:llWith the polyline still selected, click the Center Object

edit button.

Move the mouse pointer over the roof valley. When a dashed centering axis line displays parallel to the roof
valley, click once.

5. Use the polyline’s resize edit handles to extend the polyline along the as much of the length of the roof valley as you
would like.

6. Make a copy of the flashing and text for the opposite roof valley:

184

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - DormerslWith the polyline still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the text to add it to the selection set.

l

Click the Copy/Pasteledit button, and then click the Reflect About Object

edit button.

Move the mouse pointer over the vertical roof ridge line. When a dashed centering axis line displays parallel to theroof ridge, click once.

To add leader line annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line, then:l

Click and drag a horizontal line from the left wall of the back left dormer towards the right. When your mousepointer is between the two back dormers, release the mouse button.

l

Click once more without dragging.

lWhen you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "flashing at wall" and click OK.

3. Click on the text to select it, then center between the two dormers:lClick the Center Object

edit button.

lMove your mouse pointer into the center of the attic room area that surrounds the back dormers.

lWhen the attic room area becomes highlighted and a vertical dashed centering axis line displays, click once.

4. Click on the Leader Line to select it, then make a copy of it:

185

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - DormerslClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the Paste Hold Positionl

A second Leader Line is created at the same location as the original, and is selected.

edit button.

5. Click the edit handle on the arrow end of the selected Leader Line and drag down and to the right until it snaps tothe right wall of the dormer.

6. With the new, angled Leader Line still selected:lHold down the Shift key and click on the horizontal Leader Line to select the two as a group.

l

Click the Copy/Pastel

Click the Reflect About ObjectlMove your mouse pointer into the text.

lWhen the Rich Text object becomes highlighted and a vertical dashed centering axis line displays, click once.

7. Remember to Save

edit button.
edit button.

your work.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

186

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Dormers

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Dormers.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating automatically generated and manually drawn dormers.
To set the Dormer Defaults

169

To set the Window Defaults

170

To place an Auto Floating Dormer

170

To position an Auto Floating Dormer

171

To edit an Auto Floating Dormer window172

To create a knee wall and Attic room172

To place an Auto Dormer

174

To create a roof hole176

To draw the dormer walls

177

To set the roof plane defaults

179

To draw the dormer roof planes

179

To edit the dormer roof hole181

To set the rich text defaults

182

To add rich text annotations

183

To set the CAD defaults

183

To add CAD annotations

184

To add leader line annotations

185

To save a plan revision

187

Assessment Questions

187

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Design Tutorials

Interior Design Tutorials

Chapter 3

The Interior Design Tutorials describe best practices for adding elements of interior design to a drawing in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Custom Ceilings
Finish Materials
Room MoldingsInterior Furnishings

189
204
226
238

188

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

Custom Ceilings
By default, Chief Architect automatically produces a flat ceiling in most types of rooms. There are various options formodifying this automatic ceiling, however.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for customizing ceilings. Concepts introduced include:
File Management

189

Productivity Tips

189

Setting the Defaults

190

Using Plan Views

191

Creating a Lowered Ceiling

192

Creating a Cathedral Ceiling

195

Drawing a Tray or Coffered Ceiling

197

Adding Annotations

201

Creating Revisions

202

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Roof and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Roof.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create different types of custom ceilings, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

The Soffit

tool can be used to model a wide variety of straight-sided objects and is particularly useful for objects

that attach to walls.
l

The Copy/Paste

and Reflect About Object

edit tools can be used to make reflected copies of Soffits andother objects.

189Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

ContentlCreate template plans that have your custom ceiling finish definitions set as defaults, and ready for use when you
begin a new plan.

Interfaceviews are useful for viewing details of a model’s internal structure.

lBack Clipped Cross SectionlTiling views can help confirm that changes made in 2D have the desired effect in 3D.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating ceilings, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before creating custom ceilings, it’s a good idea to make sure that all aspects of the structure that influence ceiling height
are set. See "Setting the Defaults" on page 13 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial and "Setting the Defaults" on page 50 of theMultiple Floors Tutorial.
It’s also a good idea to set the defaults for ceiling finishes.

To set the plan-wide default ceiling finish
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Floors andRooms" to expand the category, select "Floor/Ceiling Platform", then click the Edit button.
2. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, note that the ceiling finish is composed of two layers: drywall and a paintcolor.
4. Click OK to close both dialogs and return to the Default Settings dialog.
5. Ceiling finish definitions can also be customized for room types.

To set the default ceiling finish for room types
1. In the Default Settings dialog, under the "Floors and Rooms" category, select "Room Types" and click the Edit
button.
2. In the Room Types dialog, notice:l

A variety of Room Types have their own defaults.

l

A selected Room Type can be edited, copied, renamed, and deleted.

3. Select "Garage" from the list and click the Edit button.

190

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Garage Room Defaults dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
5. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:l

Make sure that the Thickness of Layer 1 is 5/8".

lClick on Layer 1’s Name, Pattern, or Texture.

6. On the LIBRARY MATERIAL panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Materials.

l

The location of the currently selected material is shown in the Folders panel.

l

Further down the tree list in the Wallboard Folder, select the "Drywall Fire Rated" material and click OK

7. Returning to the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog and with Layer 1 still selected, add a layer of insulation above it:lClick the Insert Above button.

lSpecify the new layer’s Thickness as 1 1/2".

lClick on the new layer’s Name, Pattern, or Texture.

lSpecify the new layer’s material as "Insulation Rigid".

8. Click OK three times to return to the Default Settings dialog, then click Done.
A customized ceiling finish can also be used to create a lowered ceiling for an entire floor. See To set ceiling defaults for afloor level on page 193.
Soffits are a useful tool for creating different types of tray and coffered ceilings. See To set the Soffit Defaults on page 197.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
In the Chic Cottage Roof and Dormers tutorials, the Roof Plan View is active, the Roofs Layer Set is active, and annotations
are created using saved "Roof Rich Text Defaults" settings. These settings are not helpful for customizing ceilings, however,
so you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View better suited for the task at hand.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the twoviews’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

191

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Working Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Working Plan View.
Ceilings can now be customized and annotated without affecting the appearance of the roof plan.

CREATING A LOWERED CEILING
You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling without affecting the top heights of the walls by modifying the Ceiling Finish
Definition.
In the Floor 0 Defaults dialog, space in the ceiling can be allotted for soundproofing drywall hat channels for the entire
basement level.

To create a custom hat channel framing type
1. Select Edit>Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow the left of "Framing" toexpand the category, select "Framing Types", and click the Edit button.
2. In the Framing Types dialog, select "U Channel" and click the Copy button.
3. In the New Default dialog, type a short, descriptive name, then click OK. Here, "Hat Channel" is used.
4. In the Framing Type - Hat Channel dialog, confirm that the Composition is Steel and the Shape, Steel U.
5. Click OK to close all dialogs.

To create a custom hat channel material
1. Select 3D> Materials> Plan Materials, and in the Plan Materials dialog, click the New button.

2. On the PATTERN panel of the Define Material dialog, click the Material Color box and select a grey color torepresent this material in 3D views.
3. On the MATERIALS LIST panel:lType a short, descriptive Material Name such as "Hat Channel".

lSpecify the Materials List Calculation type as "None".

l

Click OK.

192

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. In the Plan Materials dialog:lSelect the new "Hat Channel" material in the list on the left.

l

Click the Add to Library button.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and add the new material to the User Catalog in the library for use in this andother plans.

To set ceiling defaults for a floor level
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow to the left of "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Expand the "Floor Levels" subcategory.

l

Select "Floor 0" and click the Edit button.

2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Floor 0 Defaults dialog, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
3. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog:lClick in the Thickness field for Layer 1 to make it the selected layer.

lClick the Insert Above button to add a layer above it.

lWith the new layer selected, set its Thickness to be 1", then click on its Name, Pattern, or Texture in the table.

4. In the Select Material dialog, select your new "Hat Channel" material, created above. It can be selected on either the
LIBRARY MATERIALS or PLAN MATERIALS panel.
l

On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel, it will be found in the User Catalog.

l

On the PLAN MATERIALS panel, all materials in the current plan are listed alphabetically.

l

Click OK.

193

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

5. Returning to the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, the new Hat Channel material will be selected:l

Under the "Structure" heading, check the box beside Framing.

lSpecify the Structure Type as "Hat Channel" to distinguish the hat channels from regular furring when framing is
generated later on.

lSpecify the Spacing as 24" On Center.

lSpecify the new Layer 1’s Width as 1".

6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.
See "To generate floor and ceiling framing" on page 363 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.
The differences in ceiling finishes can be seen in a Backclipped Cross Section view.

To view ceiling finishes in 3D
1. If you have not already, go Down One Floor

to Floor 1.

2. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section

194, then:Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom CeilingslClick and drag vertically to create a camera inside the Foyer room.

lLimit the length of the camera’s line of sight to one or two plan feet and make sure that you draw the camera
either straight up or straight down on-screen.

3. Zoomin on the left side of the Garage ceiling. Notice:l

The Closet room on the left has a single layer of drywall on the ceiling.

l

The Garage on the right has two ceiling layers: drywall and insulation.

The ceiling finish can also be removed from an individual room.

To remove a ceiling finish
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in an empty space in the room below the Porch to select it.

3. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

4. On the STRUCTURE panel, click the Ceiling Finish Edit button.
5. In the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog, select each of the layers and click the Delete button.
6. Click OK to close both dialogs.
7. When you are finished, be sure to Save

your work.

CREATING A CATHEDRAL CEILING
A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the roof and can be easily created using the underside of the roof above the room.

To create a cathedral ceiling
1. Go to Floor 1, and create a Back Clipped Cross Section inside the Deck. Be sure to draw the camera arrowhorizontally, either left to right or right to left.
2. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the two views side by side and Zoom in on the Deck room.

195

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

3. Return to the plan view window, click the Select Objects

4. Click the Open Object

button, and select the Deck room.

edit button. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, uncheck Flat

Ceiling Over This Room and click OK.

5. Notice that the Deck’s ceiling is now the underside of its shed roof.

By default, cathedral ceilings use the ceiling material set in the Room Specification dialog. If you require a different
material on a given roof plane, uncheck Use Room Ceiling Finish in the Roof Plane Specification dialog.

196

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

DRAWING A TRAY OR COFFERED CEILING
A tray ceiling is an area within a ceiling that is raised and has either vertical or sloping sides, and you can easily create one
using the Tray Ceiling Polyline tool or the Make Tray Ceiling in Room edit tool.
One of the requirements of Tray Ceiling Polylines is that they be located in a room with an uninterrupted, flat ceiling. The
basement of Chic Cottage does have a flat ceiling; however, it is interrupted by a hole in the ceiling to accommodate thestairs. To create a tray ceiling here, Soffits will be placed around the perimeter of the room.

To set the Soffit Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand the category, select "Soffit" in thelist, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Soffit Defaults dialog:lSpecify the Width as 60", the Height as 12", and the Depth as 36".

lSpecify the Floor to Top as 106 5/8", which is the Finished Ceiling Height of the basement room.

l

Make sure that Use Floor Finish is checked, since the Finished Ceiling Height is measured from floor finish as
opposed to the slab.

3. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

197

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

To create a tray ceiling using Soffits
1. Go to Floor 0, then select Build> Cabinet> Soffit.

2. Click along each of the exterior walls of the basement room to place a soffit at that location.

lSoffits, like other cabinet objects, will snap to the side of a nearby wall.

l

Soffits should not extend through intersecting walls, so place two soffits along the wall separating the basementfrom the Porch area: one on each side of the staircase wall.

3. Select one of the soffits and use its edit handles to extend it across the length of the room.
4. Repeat this step with each of the soffits until they completely encircle the ceiling.

5. Create a Camera

view in the basement room to see the results.

198

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

A coffered ceiling can be created by simply replicating additional Soffits across the middle of the room.

To create a coffered ceiling using Soffits
1. Select Window> Swap Views
2. Click the Select Objects

to return to plan view.

button, then select the soffit located against the vertical wall separating the basementfrom the Garage area.
3. Click the Resize edit handle located on the soffit’s top edge and extend it upward until it meets the horizontal soffit
against the back wall of the basement.

199

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

4. Select the soffit located against the vertical wall on the left side of them basement, then:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the soffit’s Move edit handle located at its center and drag to the right.

lWhen the object preview outline snaps to the wall next to the staircase, click once.

5. Select the soffit located against the horizontal wall separating the basement from the Garage area, thenlClick the Copy/Paste

edit buttonlClick the Reflect About ObjectlMove the mouse pointer over top edge of the vertical soffit immediately to its left.

lWhen a vertical reflection axis displays, click once.

l

Use the Resize handle on the left side of the new soffit to snap it to the side of the staircase.

edit button.

6. Select the newly created soffit and repeat step 6 to create one more copy on the left side of the basement, between
the two horizontal soffits.
l

You can reflect the soffit about either the staircase or the soffit to its left.

l

In either case, both the left and right sides will need to be moved using the Resize edit handles.

200

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

7. The results can be seen in a Perspective Floor Overview

view.

8. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save

your work.

There are other ways to produce tray and coffered ceilings, as well. Visit www.chiefarchitect.com/support/database.html for
more information.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Some information about the customized ceilings in this plan should have annotations.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults are in use as they were in previous tutorials. See "To set therich text defaults" on page 26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

To add rich text ceiling annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click near the center of the horizontal soffit near the back wall of thebasement.

201

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type: 36" x 12" soffits.
3. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that the text is placed on the "Text" layer, then click OK.
4. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 1, and in the back Deck room, create a Rich Text

object that says: 2:12 cathedral

ceiling.
5. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 2 and:l

Notice that the roof annotations created in the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial do not display.

lClick the Saved Plan View Controll

Notice the changes that occur in the view, then switch back to the "Working Plan View".

drop-down and select "Roof Plan View" from the drop-down list.

6. Turn on the display of the "Ceiling Break Lines" layer using the Active Layer Display Options side window. See To
create a knee wall and Attic room on page 172.
7. Along the dashed horizontal Ceiling Break Lines, create two Rich Text

objects that say: 8’ 0" ceiling break fromthese lines.

8. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Finish Materials tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revsions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.

202

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Custom Ceilings

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Ceilings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating various types of custom ceilings, including lowered ceilings and custom
ceiling finishes, tray ceilings, and coffered ceilings. It also discusses the important default settings associated with ceilings.
To set the plan-wide default ceiling finish

190

To set the default ceiling finish for room types

190

To switch to a different saved plan view192

To create a custom hat channel framing type192

To create a custom hat channel material

192

To set ceiling defaults for a floor level

193

To view ceiling finishes in 3D

194

To remove a ceiling finish

195

To create a cathedral ceiling195

To set the Soffit Defaults

197

To create a tray ceiling using Soffits

198

To create a coffered ceiling using Soffits

199

To add rich text ceiling annotations

201

To save a plan revision

202

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 10 - Custom Ceilings
In what dialog should a lowered ceiling be defined?
lA lowered ceiling can be specified in the Ceiling Finish Definition dialog.

How does a lowered ceiling affect the structure of a room?
l

You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling without affecting the top heights of the walls by modifying the Ceiling
Finish Definition.

What supplies the surface of a cathedral ceiling?
l

A cathedral ceiling is created using the underside of the roof above the room.

Name two tools that can be used to create a tray or coffered ceiling.
l

A standard tray or coffered ceiling can be easily created using the Tray Ceiling Polyline tool in many cases.

l

In situations where this tool cannot be used, Soffits can be placed around the perimeter of a room.

What two edit tools can be used to create identical objects on either side of a room?
l

The Copy/Paste and Reflect About Object edit tools can be used to create identical objects on either side of a room.

203

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Finish Materials
The finish materials applied to walls and floors are an important aspect of a plan’s interior.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for applying finish materials to walls and floors. Concepts introduced
include:File Management

204

Productivity Tips

204

Setting the Defaults

205

Using Plan Views

205

Organizing Library Materials

205

Applying Wall Finish Materials

206

Wall Coverings

211

Using Wall Material Regions

213

Specifying Flooring Materials

217

Using Floor Material Regions

221

Creating Schedules

223

Adding Annotations

224

Creating Revisions

225

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Custom Ceilings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Ceilings and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Ceilings.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create finish materials to walls and floors, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

The Material Painteris a powerful and flexible way to assign materials to objects in 3D views.

204

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Contentl

A selection of name brand paint, flooring, and other materials are available for download in the "Materials andSurfaces" category of the 3D Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default
web browser to that page.

lCreate template plans with your preferred wall and floor finish materials set as defaults when you begin a new plan.

lGroup paint colors, floor finishes, and other materials that you often use together in custom library folders in the User
Catalog.

InterfacelPerspective Floor Overviewsl

The Wall Elevation

are a useful way to view the relationships between room spaces.

tool lets you create an elevation of a wall that is confined to a single room in the plan.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlTab - Select Next ObjectlSpacebar - Select Objectsl

3 - Break edit toollCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whenspecifying finish materials, there are several defaults that can be useful.
Floor finish materials can be specified for different room types in the Floor/Ceiling Platform and Room Type Defaults
dialogs. See Specifying Flooring Materials on page 217.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View, which was used in the Custom Ceilings tutorial and should be active now, will work well forcustomizing finish materials. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

ORGANIZING LIBRARY MATERIALSThe Library Browser provides access to thousands of finish materials to add style to your designs. Materials catalogs areorganized by material type as well as Manufacturer.
With so many options available, it can help to organize materials to meet your creative needs so that finding the right lookfor each project is a streamlined process.

205

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create custom library folders
1. The Library Browser side window is docked to the right side of the program window.
l

Click on its tab to bring it to the front of the other side windows docked at that location.

l

If you do not see the Library Browser, select View>Library Browser.

2. The Library Browser is composed of multiple panels. The Folders panel contains a browsable tree list of the maincategories, the catalogs they contain, and all folders and subfolders.
lClick the arrow next to the User Catalog line item in the Folders panel to expand the category and view its
contents.

l

The Hat Channel material created in the Custom Ceilings tutorial will be listed here, along with any othercontent you may have added.

3. Right-click on the User Catalog line item and select New> Folder from the contextual menu.
4. Type a short, descriptive name for this new folder. Here, "Beach Palette" is used.
5. You can create additional palette folders as well if you like.
With a custom folder created, you can now start adding materials to it.

To copy items to a custom folder
1. Still in the Folders panel, navigate to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials. This catalog contains a wide variety
of materials, from structural and landscaping to finishes.
2. Next, browse to Colors> Generic Colors.
3. Click on the Blue folder and notice that the Filter Results panel reports that 20 items are found in this folder.
4. There are two way to view the Filter Results. Toggle buttons at the bottom of the Library Browser let you switch
between them:l

List Mode

presents items in a vertical list. Names are often easier to read but fewer item thumbnails can beseen at once.
l

Tile Mode

presents items in a grid. More item thumbnails can be seen, but names may be truncated.

5. Right-click on "Color - Dew" and select Copy to User Catalog from the contextual menu. A copy of the material iscreated in the User Catalog and is visible and selected in the Folders panel.
6. Click and drag this material over the Beach Palette folder. When the folder becomes highlighted, release the mousebutton to move the material into the folder.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to add a variety of colors to the Beach Palette folder. These are materials are used here:l

From the Blue folder: "Color - Dew" and "Color - Fresh"l

From the Green folder: "Color - Robin's Egg"l

From the Yellow folder: "Color - Butter" and "Color - Mustard"

APPLYING WALL FINISH MATERIALSA Floor Overview is a good place to customize wall materials because the relationships between walls can be easily seen,
and the Material Painter tool can be used to apply new materials to surfaces in the view. It has five Modes that allow you to206

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

control the scope of each paint operation.

To specify the wall finish for all rooms
1. Go to Floor 1, then select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview
2. Use the Mouse-Orbit Camera.

tool to orbit the camera upward so that the interior rooms can be seen. See "Tocreate a camera view" on page 18 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

3. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Plan Mode
4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter.

.

5. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Materials.

l

To further filter the results, type "beach palette" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Beach
Palette" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The Folders panel expands to show the contents of the User Catalog.

lOpen the Beach Palette folder, select the material named "Color - Butter", then click OK.

6. Move your mouse pointer into the camera view and notice that it now displays a paint roller
any interior wall surface and notice that nearly all walls become painted.

207

icon. Click once on

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

7. While the Perspective Floor Overview is active, go Up One Floor to Floor 2.
8. Select 3D> Material> Adjust Material Definition, then click on an interior wall surface and note that thematerial on that surface is "Color - Butter". Click Cancel.
9. Go Down

to Floor 0 and repeat step 8 to confirm that the interior wall surfaces have been painted "Color -Butter" there, as well. When you are finished, return to Floor 1.

To use the Material Eyedropper
1. Zoomin on the Garage and Orbitaround so the wall between it and the Foyer can be seen.

l

Notice that two of the walls were not painted.

lThis is because these two walls have a fire rated Drywall material instead of standard Drywall used by the otherwalls.

2. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper, then:208

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materialsll

Notice that your mouse pointer now displays an eyedropper

icon.

Click on a wall surface that has "Color - Butter" applied to it and notice that the mouse pointer icon changes to aneyedropper .

3. Click once on either fire wall. Because the Material Painter Plan Modeis still active, both walls will be

painted.
With the primary wall color for the plan applied, you can now apply custom colors to specific rooms. This can be done in
the Room Specification dialog or using the Material Painter.

To specify the wall finish for a room
1. Zoomout and Orbit

the camera until all interior rooms can be seen again.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the floor of the Dining room to select it.

3. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog. On the MATERIALS panel:l

Click on the "Walls" component in the tree list to select it and note that "Color - Butter" is currently specified as its
material.

lClick the Select Material button to open the Select Material dialog and select "Color - Fresh" from the Beach
Palette folder in the User Catalog.

lClick OK to close the Room Specification dialog and apply your change.

4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Room Mode
5. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter.

and apply the "Color - Dew" material to the Bedroom walls.

209

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

An accent wall can be created by specifying a different material for one wall. Just as with rooms, this can be done in theWall Specification dialog or using the Material Painter.

To specify a custom finish for a single wall
1. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Object Mode.

2. Instead of activating the Material Painter tool using the menu or toolbar button, select a material directly from the
Library Browser:l

If it is not already open, select View>Library Browser.

lIn the Folders panel, browse to User Catalog> Beach Palette and select "Color - Mustard".

3. When you move the pointer into the camera view, it displays the paint roller
4. Click on the wall separating the Dining room from the Bedroom to paint it.

In order to edit a wall in 3D, it first must be selected.

210

icon.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To select a wall in 3D
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in the Living room, on the exterior wall separating the Living roomfrom the Deck.
2. Notice that the Living room becomes selected by default.
3. Click the Select Next Object

4. Click the Open Object

edit button or press the Tab key to select the wall instead.

edit button to open the Wall Specification dialog.

5. On the MATERIALS panel:l

Because this wall is a Pony Wall, it has four wall surface components: two exterior and two interior.

l

Notice that the Interior Wall Surface components are described as "No Change".

lThis is because the wall spans three rooms, and one has a different wall finish material than the others.

lClick Cancel.

6. Remember to Save

your work.

WALL COVERINGS
Wall coverings can be used in addition to a wall’s surface material to create accents like wallpaper borders or wainscoting.

211

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To apply a wall covering
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0.

2. Select the basement room and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the WALL COVERING panel:l

Click the Add New button to open the Select Material dialog.

lSearch for "beadboard" and select the "Beadboard" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list, located at

Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Siding and Paneling.
lSelect the "White Beadboard" material and click OK.

lChange the Height to 48" and the Floor to Bottom value to 0".

lClick OK.

lHere, the "Cabinets, Soffits" layer is turned off so the white beadboard wall covering is not hidden behind cofferedceiling in the camera view.

4. When you are finished, close the camera view and Save212

your work.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

Additional wall covering materials are available for download.

USING WALL MATERIAL REGIONS
Unlike a Wall Covering, Wall Material Regions do more than just apply a material to the surface of a wall: they actuallyreplace the wall surface layer with a different material. They also have depth and can extend out past the surface of the wall.

To set the Wall Material Region defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow next to "Material Region" to expand the category.

l

Select "Wall Material Region" and click the Edit button.

l

On the STRUCTURE panel of the Wall Material Region Defaults dialog:l

Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent Object is checked.

lThis means that by default, a wall material region will cut into and replace the finish layers of the wall it is placed
onto.

l

Click the Edit button.

2. In the Material Layers Definition dialog, notice that the default region is composed of layers of backerboard, thinset
mortar, and tile, then click OK.

3. Click OK and then Done to close the remaining dialogs.
This tile surround will be positioned 18" above the floor to accommodate a bathtub that will be placed later on. See "Toplace bathroom fixtures" on page 307 of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

To create a Wall Elevation view
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation.

2. Click and drag a camera arrow located inside the Bath room, pointed straight at the vertical wall on the left side of
the room.
3. The resulting camera view shows only the portion of the left vertical wall that defines the Bath. Any objects locatedbetween the camera and the wall in the current room will display in a Wall Elevation, as well.
To resize a Wall Material Region with accuracy, make sure that Temporary Dimensions are toggled on. Select View>
Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower right corner of the tool icon.

213

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create a tile shower surround
1. Select Build Wall> Wall Material Region, then click once on the wall surface. A Wall Material Region thatcovers the entire wall is created and is initially selected.
2. Move the bottom edge of the region upward:lClick on the edit handle at the center of the bottom edge of the region to select it.

lMove the mouse pointer over the temporary dimension that reports the region’s height.

lWhen the mouse pointer changes to a pointing hand icon, click on the dimension line.

l

Click in the inline text field, to the right of the existing value, then type -18 after that value and press the Enter
key.

l

The bottom edge moves upward 18", reducing the total height of the Region by that amount.

3. Click on the top edge of the Region to select it, then repeat step 3 to lower the top edge by 12".

4. Select File> Close View to close the current Wall Elevation view.
5. Create a new Wall Elevation

view in the Bath room, this time pointed at the bottom horizontal wall214

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

6. Click to create a Wall Material Region

that covers this wall as described above.

l

Notice that the top and bottom edges of this Region are composed of two segments separated by diamond-shaped
Reshape edit handles.

lThis is because the Bath is defined by two separate walls along this side rather than a single wall.

7. With the Region selected, click the Simplify Polyline

edit button. The top and bottom edges become single

segments instead of two.
8. Select the left vertical edge of the Region and:lClick on the dimension that reports how far it is from the right edge.

lType 32" and press the Enter key.

215

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

9. Raise the bottom edge of the polyline 18" above the floor and lower the top edge 12" below the ceiling, as describedabove.
10. Select File> Close View to close the current Wall Elevation view.
To complete the tile shower surround, make a copy of the Wall Material Region on the opposite wall.

To copy a Wall Material Region
1. Zoomin on the lower left corner of the Bath room and notice that a rectangular shape extends out past thehorizontal wall’s drywall. This is the second Wall Material Region created above.
2. Click the Select Objectsllbutton, then click on the Wall Material Region to select it.

To confirm that a Material Region is the selected object, look at the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of
the program window.
If the Wall is selected instead, click the Select Next Object

edit button.

3. Zoom out so the top horizontal wall of the Bath can be seen.
4. With the Wall Material Region still selected, click the Copy/Paste

216

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

5. Click the Reflect About Object

edit button, then:lMove the mouse pointer up into the Bath room.

lWhen the room becomes highlighted and a horizontal dashed reflection axis line displays, click once.

l

A copy of the Wall Material Region is created on the opposite wall and is selected.

6. You can see the results in a Full Camera view inside the Bath.

7. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

Custom Backsplashes are a type of Wall Material Region that does not cut into the existing wall surface by default. See "To
add a Custom Backsplash" on page 306 of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

SPECIFYING FLOORING MATERIALS
Just like with walls, flooring materials can be set in a Perspective Floor Overview.
Flooring materials are an example of a Dynamic Default: if you change a setting in the appropriate defaults dialog, rooms inyour plan that are set to use that default will update automatically. If a room has been customized and is no longer set to use
the default flooring, that room will not be affected.

217

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To set flooring defaults
1. On Floor 1, select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Floor Overview
2. Select Edit> Default Settings.

to open the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Select "Floor/Ceiling Platform", and click the Edit button.

3. In the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog, click the Floor Finish Edit button to open the Floor Finish Definition
dialog.

4. With Layer 1 selected, click in the Name, Pattern, or Texture cell in its row to open the Select Material dialog.
5. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typematerial's "Maple" Folder

so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected

located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Flooring> Wood Flooring>

3-4-5" Plank.
lIn the Folders panel, click the arrow to the left of the "Maple" folder to close it and instead expand the "RedOak" folder.

lSelect the "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" material and click OK.

6. Click OK once more to return to the Default Settings dialog and notice that in the 3D view behind the dialog, allrooms aside from the Bath, Garage, and Porch update to display the new default flooring material.

218

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

7. Click Done to close the Default Settings dialog and Orbit

8. Go Down One Flooras needed to see all of the rooms.

to Floor 0 and notice that the room on this floor is also using the new default flooringmaterial.
The flooring material specified in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog is the default material for all floors; however,each floor can have a different default flooring material if you choose.

To set flooring defaults by floor
1. Go Up

to Floor 2 and select Edit> Default Settings.

lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Click the arrow beside "Floor Levels" to expand this subcategory.

l

Select "Floor 2" and click the Edit button.

2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog:l

Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is checked, which means that
Floor 2 is currently using the default floor finish set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults.

lClick the Floor Finish Edit button to open the Floor Finish Definition dialog.

3. Click in the Thickness field for Layer 1 to select it, then click the Select Material button.
4. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typematerial's "Red Oak" Folder

so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected.

lClick on the "Red Oak" FolderlSelect the "Carpet" Folder

filter so that it is no longer used and type "carpet" in the Search field.

line item from the drop-down list

219

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materialsl

The Folders panel now expands to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Flooring> Carpet.

lSelect a carpet material such as "Carpet-01 Dover" and click OK.

5. In the 2nd Floor Defaults dialog, notice that the Floor Finish Default check box is now unchecked. This mean that
this setting is no longer tied to the Floor Finish setting in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog.
6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs and notice that the floor finish material on Floor 2 is now the carpet thatyou selected.
Many Room Types are set to use the default floor finish for the Current Floor. Some Room Types like Kitchen, Bath,Garage, and Porch are typically set up with their own unique default materials, however.

To set flooring defaults by Room Type
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 1 again and Orbit

2. Select Edit> Default Settings

as needed so that the floor of the Bath can be seen.

, and in the Default Settings dialog:lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Select "Room Types" and click the Edit button.

3. In the Room Types dialog, scroll down the list, select "Bath", and click the Edit button.
4. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Bath Room Type Defaults dialog:l

Notice that the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit button is unchecked.

lThis means that this room type is not using the default material set in the 1st Floor Defaults dialog, and explains
why the Bath room’s floor finish did not change when the "Red Oak 3-4-5" Plank - Natural" material set as thedefault, above.

l

Click the Floor Finish Edit button to see the composition of the floor finish: Ivory Tile, Thinset Mortar, andBackerboard.

l

You can click the Floor Finish Edit button and specify a different default surface material for Bath rooms, if you
wish.

5. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.
In addition, flooring materials can be specified for each room individually. The best way to do this is to edit a room's
Floor Finish Definition to ensure that the finish layer has the correct underlayment.
The Kitchen, for example, uses the default wood planking underlaid by foam underlayment. We can use the Material Painterto replace the wood planking with tile, but the result would be tile installed over foam. An easy way to apply the floor finish
layers to the Kitchen would be appropriate for tile is using the Object Painter tools.

To apply properties from one object to another
1. In the Perspective Floor Overview, Orbitaround until both the Kitchen and Bath floor can be seen.

2. Select Tools> Object Painter> Object Eyedropper.

3. Click on the floor surface of the Bath room, then click the Select Properties to Paint

220

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

4. In the Select Properties to Load dialog:lClick the Clear All button so no Properties in the list are selected.

l

Check the box beside Floor Finish.

lClick OK.

5. Move the mouse pointer over the Kitchen floor surface and click once.
6. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the floor surface in the Kitchen to select the room.

7. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog:lClick the Define button for Floor Finish.

lConfirm that the Kitchen now has a tile surface material along with thinset and backerboard instead of foam
underlayment, then click OK.

8. You can now use the Material Painter
9. Remember to Savein Object Modeto replace the surface material if you wish.

your work.

USING FLOOR MATERIAL REGIONS
Similar to Wall Material Regions, Floor Material Regions replace a portion of a room’s floor surface layer with a different
material. They also have depth and can extend up past the surface of the floor if need be. Like Wall Material Regions, theyalso have a defaults dialog where you can set properties in advance.

To add a Floor Material Region
1. In the Perspective Floor Overview, Orbitaround until the front door in the Foyer room can be seen, then Zoomin.
2. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the Overview and plan view side by side.

3. Click in the plan view window to make it active and Zoom

221

in on the Foyer room.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

4. Select Build> Floor> Floor Material Region, then click and drag a rectangle in the middle of the Foyer room.

Do not worry about exact size or position right now.

5. Click on the Floor Material Region to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

6. In the Material Region Specification dialog:l

Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent Object is checked.

lClick the Edit button.

7. In the Material Layers Definition dialog:lClick the Insert Below button to add a copy of the selected layer below the original.

lWith the new layer selected, click the Move Down button to below the other layers, making it Layer 3.

lWith Layer 3 selected, click in the Name, Pattern, or Texture cell in its row to open the Select Material dialog.

8. On the PLAN MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, select the "Backerboard 1/4"" material, then click OK.
9. Notice that the Total Thickness, reported to the right of the layer table, is 3/4" and recall that the thickness of therooms’ Floor Finish is 7/8".
10. Increase the Thickness of the "Thinset Mortar" layer to 3/8", then click OK.

222

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To resize and position a Floor Material Region
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Floor Material Region to select it.

2. Click and drag the edit handle that displays in the middle of its bottom edge to extend its bottom edge until it snaps
to the front door wall’s interior surface.
3. Use Temporary Dimensions to resize it to 72" wide and 48" deep.
4. Use the Center Object

edit tool to center the Floor Material Region in front of the entry door.

5. You can also use the Material Painterto experiment with different tile materials. Here, "Natural Slate Tiles"

from Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Tile> Stone> Slate is applied using Plan Mode

6. Remember to Save.

your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
The finish materials for interior rooms can be listed in a Room Finish Schedule.

To set room finish schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select"Room Finish Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Defaults dialog, under Categories to Include:lClick the arrow to the left of Rooms to expand the category.

l

Uncheck Deck and Porch.

lClick OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

223

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To create a finish material schedule
1. Open the "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail. There are two ways to do this:lSelect CAD> CAD Detail Management. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules

Detail" and click the Open button.
l

Select View> Project Browser, expand the CAD Details folder, right-click on the "Schedules Detail" andselect Open View from the contextual menu.
2. Select Tools> Schedules> Room Finish Schedule, then click once in an empty space near the Door andWindow Schedules.
3. Click on the new schedule to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Specification dialog, change the Main Title to "Room Finish
Materials".
5. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel:l

In the list of Columns to Include, click on the top line item, scroll down to the bottom of the list, press the
Shift key on the keyboard, then click on the last line item to select all line items.

lRelease the Shift key and press the Ctrl/⌘ key, then click on "Room Name" to remove it from the selection
set.

lWith the Ctrl/⌘ key still pressed, remove "Wall Material" and "Floor Finish", as well.

l

Click the Remove button. Only "Room Name", Wall Material", and "Floor Finish" should be listed under
Columns to Include.

lClick OK.

6. Increase the width of the Wall Material column so the Foyer’s and Living room's materials are listed on separatelines. See "To edit schedule columns" on page 60 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Some information about the material finishes in this plan should have annotations.
The Working Plan View is active, so "Plan Rich Text Defaults" are still in use. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page
26 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.

224

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Finish Materials

To add rich text annotations for materials
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the Porch room.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, type "concrete" in the text field and click OK.
3. With the text selected, use Copy/Paste

edit tool to add the same annotation in the Garage.

4. Add a Rich Text object that says "1 x 5 1/2 composite decking" inside the back Deck room.
5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in Room Moldings on page 226.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Materials.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for assigning finish materials to walls and floors using a variety of techniques andtools.
To specify the wall finish for all rooms

207

To use the Material Eyedropper

208

To specify the wall finish for a room209

To specify a custom finish for a single wall

210

To select a wall in 3D

211

To apply a wall covering212

To set the Wall Material Region defaults

213

To create a Wall Elevation view213

To create a tile shower surround214

To copy a Wall Material Region

216

To set flooring defaults

218

To set flooring defaults by floor219

To set flooring defaults by Room Type

220

225

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

To apply properties from one object to another220

To add a Floor Material Region

221

To resize and position a Floor Material Region

223

To set room finish schedule defaults

223

To create a finish material schedule224

To add rich text annotations for materials

225

To save a plan revision

225

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 11 - Finish Materials
What Material Painter mode is best for applying a paint color to all interior walls in a plan?
l

The Material Painter Plan Mode will replace all instances of a particular material with a new material. In a plan where
no walls have been previously painted, all or nearly all wall drywall surfaces will be replaced.

What are two ways to assign a paint color to all the walls of a particular room?
lA custom color can be assigned to a specific room in the Room Specification dialog or using the Material Painter's
Room Mode.

What tool lets you apply multiple attributes from one object to another similar object?
l

The Object Eyedropper tool allows you to select attributes belonging to one object and then apply them to another,similar object.

How is a Wall Material Region different from a Wall Covering?
lWall Coverings can be used in addition to a wall’s surface material to create accents like wallpaper border orwainscoting.

l

Unlike a Wall Covering, Wall Material Regions do more than just apply a material to the surface of a wall: they
actually replace the wall surface layer with a different material. They also have depth and can extend out past thesurface of a wall.

What is the name of the dialog where the default floor finish for all rooms can be set?
l

The default floor finish can be set in the Floor/Ceiling Platform Defaults dialog click the Floor Finish Edit button to
open the Floor Finish Definition dialog.

How can you tell if a room is set to use the default floor finish material?
l

On the Structure panel of the Room Specification dialog, the Default check box to the right of the Floor Finish Edit
button will be checked if it is set to use the default floor finish for its Room Type.

Room Moldings
Moldings are a common design feature on the interior and exterior of homes.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding base, crown, and chair rail moldings to rooms. Concepts
introduced include:

226

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

File Management

227

Productivity Tips

227

Setting the Defaults

228

Using Plan Views

228

Applying Room Moldings

228

Using Molding Polylines

232

Creating Schedules

236

Creating Revisions

237

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Finish Materials tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Materials and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Materials.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add moldings to rooms, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglEach floor has an Exterior Room that can be used to edit that floor’s exterior in various ways, including adding
horizontal molding around the perimeter. See To select the Exterior Room on page 233.

l

When a polyline-based object is selected, the edge that you clicked on is the Selected Edge and can often be edited in
special ways.

Contentl

You can create your own custom molding profiles and save them in the Library for future use.

lCreate template plans with your preferred room moldings set as defaults when you begin a new plan.

l

A selection of moldings and millwork catalogs are available for download in the "Millwork" category of the 3D
Library. Select Library> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save227

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding interior moldings, there are a number of defaults that should be borne in mind.
Base, crown and chair rail molding defaults can be assigned to each floor in your plan. See To specify the default room
moldings on page 228.
Moldings, or casing, can also be applied to doors and windows. For more information, see "Setting the Defaults" on page 89
of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.
Moldings can be assigned to cabinets, as well. See "Adding Moldings and Millwork" on page 259 of the Cabinet Styles
Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding room moldings, as it did when customizing ceilings and finish materials.
See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

APPLYING ROOM MOLDINGS
Base, crown and chair rail moldings can be specified by floor, and also customized for individual rooms. Room moldings
are an example of a Dynamic Default.

To specify the default room moldings
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Floors and Rooms" to expand the category.

l

Click the arrow beside "Floor Levels" to expand this subcategory.

l

Select "Floor 1" and click the Edit button.

2. On the MOLDINGS panel of the 1st Floor Defaults dialog, note that the Selected Profile is Default Base Molding andthat its Type is "Base Molding".

228

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

3. Click the Replace button to open the Select Library Object dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l

To further filter the results, type "base molding" in the Search field, then select the "Base Molding" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings> Base Molding.

lSelect "BM08 - Base Molding" and click OK.

4. Click the Add New button to open the Select Library Object dialog again.

229

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room MoldingslBrowse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Crown Molding.

lThis time, type "crown molding" in the Search field, then select the "Crown Molding" Folderline item in theFilters drop-down list.
Select "CM02 - Crown Molding" in Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings> Crown Molding
and click OK.

l

5. Returning to the 1st Floor Defaults dialog:lNote that the Type for this molding is "Crown Molding".

lBelow the Molding Profiles list, make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio is checked.

l

In the Molding Profiles list, select the "CM02 - Crown Molding" line item, click in its Height field, and type
3".

6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.
7. The results can be seen in an interior Full Cameraview.

By default, Stairwells and other Open Below rooms do not receive moldings. Neither do exterior rooms like Porches andhybrid rooms like Garages. However, moldings can be specified for individual rooms.

To customize a room’s moldings
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in a blank space in the Dining room to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

230

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

3. On the MOLDINGS panel of the Room Specification dialog, uncheck Use Default. Then:l

Click the Add New button.

l

Search for and select "CR01 - Chair Rail Molding" in the Select Library Object dialog.

lConfirm that "Chair Rail" is selected as the molding Type.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

4. The results can be seen in a Full Camera

view of the Dining room.

231

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

Not all moldings make sense in all rooms and can be removed when they are not needed.

To remove molding from a room
1. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, then click the Select Objects

button and click in a blank spacein the front Closet to select it.
2. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Room Specification dialog.

3. On the MOLDINGS panel:lUncheck Use Default.

lSelect the "CM02 - Crown Molding" line item in the table.

lClick the Delete button.

l

Click OK to close the Room Specification dialog.

4. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

USING MOLDING POLYLINES
Moldings are also important to exterior design. Here, a horizontal transition board or "belly band" will be added that follows
the shape of the structure’s exterior.
The Chief Architect Library has a wide selection of different types of moldings. If you do not find a profile that meets yourneeds, however, you can create one using the CAD tools. Moldings can be very complex, but here a simple rectangularprofile is needed.

To create a rectangular molding profile
1. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline.

2. Make sure that Temporary Dimensions are enabled.
3. Click and drag to draw a rectangular shape in an empty space in plan view.
4. Using Temporary Dimensions, resize the polyline's width:l

Select vertical edge and click on the Temporary Dimension that reports its distance from the opposite edge.

lType 1 1/2" in the inline text field and press the Enter key.

5. Select a horizontal edge and repeat the above steps to make the polyline's height 11 1/4".
6. With the polyline selected, click the Add to Libraryedit button. A new "Molding" line item is added to theUser Catalog.
7. Right-click on the new Molding line item and select Rename from the contextual menu. Type a short, descriptive
name like 2x12 Profile and press the Enter key.
8. Right-click on the 2x12 Profile line item and select Open Object

from the contextual menu. On the General

panel of the Molding Specification dialog, confirm that its Height and Width are 11 1/4" and 1 1/2", respectively,
then click OK.
9. Select the rectangular CAD polyline that you drew in step 1 and click the Delete232

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

To select the Exterior Room
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click once just outside an exterior wall.

l

Most likely, the wall or a roof plane will become selected.

l

The type of object currently selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program
window.

2. Click the Select Next Objects

button until the Exterior Room becomes selected.

3. When the Exterior Room is selected:l

A band around the exterior of the structure will become highlighted.

l

The words "Exterior room" will display on the left side of the Status Bar.

To create an exterior room molding
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview
2. Select Window> Tile Vertically.

, then return to the plan view window.

3. Select the Exterior Room as described above and click the Make Room Molding Polyline

233

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

4. In the Make Room Molding Polyline dialog:lSelect "Blank Molding" from the Convert Molding drop-down list.

lSpecify the Height as 96" and click OK.

5. With the newly created Molding Polyline selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

6. On the MOLDINGS panel of the Molding Polyline Specification dialog:lClick the Add New button, and assign your new "2x12 Profile" to the selected polyline.

lNote that the molding profile’s Width is 1 1/2" and its Height is 11 1/4".

lUncheck Extrude Inside Polyline, then click OK.

7. Click in the overview window and Orbit around the model. Notice that the molding is present around all sides of thestructure.

234

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

Once a Molding Polyline has been created, it can be modified in either floor plan or a 3D view.

To edit a Molding Polyline
1. Orbit the overview camera until the front of the structure can be seen.
2. Return to plan view, then Zoom in on the Porch and the front of the Garage.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the edge of the Molding Polyline located over the front of the

Garage to make it the Selected Edge.

4. Click the Remove Molding from Selected Edge

edit button. Notice:l

The molding polyline no longer displays along the front of the Garage in either view.

l

The Remove Molding from Selected Edge button on the edit toolbar has been replaced by the Add Molding to
Selected Edge
edit button.

5. When the polyline is selected, the edge located over the front of the Porch can be seen. Click on it to make it the
Selected Edge, then click the Open Object
edit button.
6. On the GENERAL panel of the Molding Polyline Specification dialog, uncheck No Molding on Selected Edge andclick OK.
7. Orbit the camera so that the Deck can be seen, then return to the plan view window.
8. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the edge of the Molding Polyline located along the back railing of

the Deck. If the wall becomes selected instead, use the Select Next Object

235

edit tool, described above.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room Moldings

9. Click the edit handle located at the center of the horizontal Deck railing and drag it down until it snaps to the backwall of the house.

10. With the edge still selected, click the Add Molding to Selected Edge
11. When you have finished, remember to Save

edit button.

your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Like finish materials, room moldings can be listed in a Room Finish Schedule. The Room Finish Schedule Defaults were set
in the Finish Materials tutorial. See "To set room finish schedule defaults" on page 223 of the Finish Materials Tutorial.
To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be created in CAD Detail windows.

To create a room moldings schedule
1. Open the "Schedules Detail" CAD Detail. There are two ways to do this:lSelect CAD> CAD Detail Management. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules

Detail" and click the Open button.
l

Select View> Project Browser, expand the CAD Details folder, right-click on the "Schedules Detail" andselect Open View from the contextual menu.
2. Select Edit> Snap Settings and confirm that at least one the Extension Snaps at the bottom of the submenu isenabled.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Room Finish Schedule, then:236

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Room MoldingslMove your mouse pointer over the bottom left corner of the Finish Materials Schedule.

lA square Endpoint

Snap Indicator and within it, a round Extension anchor will appear. When they do,

move the mouse pointer straight down from the corner.
l

Notice the extension line that follows the mouse down from the anchor and the Extension Snap icon that
follows the mouse pointer.

l

Click to place another Room Finish Schedule directly below the first.

4. Click on the schedule to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Room Finish Schedule Specification dialog:lChange the Main Title to "Room Moldings".

l

In the list of Objects to Include, click the arrow next to "Rooms" to expand the category and uncheck "Open
Below".

6. On the COLUMNS/ROWS panel, remove all columns from the Columns to Include list except "Name", "BaseMolding", "Chair Rail", and Crown Molding", then click OK.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Interior Furnishings tutorial or move on to the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Moldings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for assigning moldings to rooms, including the Exterior Room

237

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To specify the default room moldings

228

To customize a room’s moldings

230

To remove molding from a room232

To create a rectangular molding profile232

To select the Exterior Room233

To create an exterior room molding

233

To edit a Molding Polyline

235

To create a room moldings schedule236

To save a plan revision

237

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 12 - Room Moldings
In what dialog can you specify the default room moldings for a plan?
l

The default base, crown and chair rail moldings can be specified by floor in Floor Defaults dialogs.

How do you select the Exterior Room in plan view?
l

In plan view, click just outside of an exterior wall using the Select Objects tool. If the wall or another object becomesselected, click the Select Next Object edit button until the left side of the Status Bar reports that the Exterior Room isselected and a band around the entire outside of the structure becomes highlighted.

What type of object can be used to create a horizontal band around a building’s exterior?
l

A Molding Polyline around the exterior of the structure can be used to create a horizontal band. An easy way to create
it is using the Create Room Molding Polyline edit tool.

What type of snapping behavior allows you to align an object as it is drawn with another nearby object that already exists?
lExtension Snaps allow you to align an object with a snap point on another object.

What Schedule tool allows you to create a schedule of interior moldings?
l

The Room Schedule tool creates schedules that are set to list a variety of room attributes such as moldings.

Interior Furnishings
Furnishings can help with space planning and are an important element of presentation views.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding a variety of furniture and accessories to a plan. Concepts
introduced include:
File Management

239

Productivity Tips

239

Setting the Defaults

239

Using Plan Views

240

Placing Library Objects

241

238

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Room Moldings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Moldings and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Moldings.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See File Management on page 4.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add furnishings to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Material Defaults dialog to specify the materials initially assigned to furniture objects placed from the Library
Browser.

l

Hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key when moving or resizing an object to override snapping and other movement restrictions.

Contentl

A wide selection of accessories and furniture are available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. SelectLibrary> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

lCreate Architectural Blocks of furniture groupings and add them to the library for future use.

Interfacel

Use the Advanced Searchin the Library Browser to help you focus the results of Library Browser Searches.

l

Right-click on an item in the Library Browser to access a contextual menu with a variety of options.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ - override movement restrictionsl

C - Concentric Edit BehaviorlCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whenplacing symbols from the Library, the settings in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful.
Some furnishing objects in the library have been assigned particular materials to complement the object’s design andinitially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some furnishings, however,inherit default materials for furniture and upholstery that can set differently for each plan.

239

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To set the Material Defaults for upholstery
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click on "Materials" in the list and click the Edit button.

2. In the Material Defaults dialog, scroll down the list, select "Furniture", and notice that the material specified for thisitem is "Birch (honey)".
3. Next, select "Furniture Upholstery" and notice that the material specified for this item is "Paris 5 Textile".
4. Scroll up and select the "Accent Upholstery" item in the list.
5. Click the Select Material button and on the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Materials.

l

To further filter the results, type "fabric" in the Search field, then move your mouse pointer over the "Fabric &Wall Coverings" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The Folders panel expands to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Fabric & Wall Coverings.

lBrowse through the folders and choose a default fabric material for fabric accents and pillows placed into thecurrent plan from the library.

lHere, "Bubbles 3 Print" is used.

lWhen your choice is selected, click OK.

6. Click Done, then Save

your work.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Working Plan View will work well for adding furnishings, as it did when customizing ceilings, finish materials, andmoldings. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 192 of the Custom Ceilings Tutorial.

240

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

PLACING LIBRARY OBJECTSA variety of items in the Library are designed to be assigned to other objects: for example, handles, locks, and hinges aremeant to be assigned to doors. For more information, see "Using Library Content" on page 93 of the Doors and Windows
Tutorial.
A wide selection of other library symbols, on the other hand, are designed to stand alone as fixtures and furnishing objects.

To place a furniture object in a plan
1. In the Search text field, type "queen".
l

As you type, items that match this search parameter appear in a drop-down list below the Search field.

lClick on the "Queen" Folderl

The Folders panel will expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Furniture> Beds.

line item in the Filters drop-down list to use it as a search filter.

2. Click on a bed in the "Queen" folder to see it in greater detail in the Preview panel and select it for placement.

When you select a library object and move the mousepointer into a view window, the pointer icon indicates thetype of library object selected, a preview outline of the object follows
your pointer as you move it, and basic information displays in the
Status Bar at the bottom of the program window.

3. Move your mouse pointer around the perimeter of the Bedroom and notice:l

The Furniture icon

follows your mouse pointer.

l

The bed’s preview outline snaps to the nearest wall, orienting it so that its back faces the wall.

4. When the bed’s preview outline is located under the windows, click once to place a bed at that location.
5. Perform a new Library search:lClick on the Queen Folder

filter to remove it from use.

l

In the Search field, type "end table" and select the End Tables Folder

241.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishingsl

The Folders panel will expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Furniture> Tables> End
Tables.

6. Place an End Table with Drawers on each side of the bed in the Bedroom.
7. Perform a new Library search for "dresser" and place a dresser such as "Basket Dresser 1" in the Foyer, against thewall of the Staircase.

To place furniture sets in a plan
1. Clear the previous filter and perform a new search.
2. Type "sets" in the Search field and select the Dining Sets Folder
Interiors> Furniture> Tables> Dining Tables> Dining Sets.
3. Select a grouped dining set and place it in the Dining room.
4. Clear the Dining Sets filter and search for "sets" again.
5. This time, select the Living Room Sets Folder.

6. Place a sofa, matching chair, and a coffee table in the Living room.

242

located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs>

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To add decorative furnishings
1. In the Folders panel, Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Interiors> Accessories.
2. Zoomin on the Foyer room and place a vase from the "Vases & Pots" catalog on the dresser.

3. Browse to the Square folder in the Mirrors & Frames catalog, select the "Double Mat Frame", and place it on thewall at the back of the dresser.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera, then click and drag a camera arrow in the Foyer, fromright to left, in the direction of the dresser.

CUSTOMIZING LIBRARY OBJECTS
Once a library object has been placed into a plan, it can be edited in a variety of ways in both 2D and 3D views.

To modify a symbol from the Library
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the coffee table in the Living room to select it. Notice that thetable has ten edit handles that can be used to resize, reshape, and rotate it:

243Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

2. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to the camera view in the Foyer.
3. Click the Select Objects

button and click on the frame to select it. When selected on its side in a camera view,the frame displays only four edit handles: an Extend handle along each side.
4. Use these edit handles to resize and reshape the frame so it better suits the aspect ratio of the painting.
5. To resize the frame concentrically, hold down the C key as you drag an edit handle.

6. You can specify the size of the frame with greater precision in its specification dialog. With the frame still selected,
click the Open Object
edit button.
7. On the GENERAL panel of the Furniture Specification dialog:lSelect the Standard Rendering Technique from the drop-down above the Preview pane so the painting can beseen instead of a solid color.

244

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior FurnishingslSpecify the Finished Floor to Top as 80".

l

Make any adjustments to the Width and Height that you would like.

You can create custom materials for use in picture frames. For details, see Knowledge Base article KB-00007 at
www.chiefarchitect.com/support/database.html.
By replacing the painting texture inside the frame, it can instead be turned into a hall mirror.

To create a mirror
1. On the MATERIALS panel of the Furniture Specification dialog, select the "Image" component and click the SelectMaterial button.
2. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, Search for "mirror", select the solid grey "Mirror"
material.
3. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Component Mode
5. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper.
, then:l

Notice that the regular mouse pointer is replaced with an Eyedropper icon.

lClick on the mirror material in the center of the frame to load it into the eyedropper.

l

The mouse icon changes from an eyedropper into a spray canlClick on the green mat just inside the wood of the frame.

l

The mirror material replaces the green mat, leaving a rectangular white accent that follows the shape of themirror.

.

6. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
You can replace a library object in your plan with a different item from the Library using the Replace From Library edit
tool. This can be particularly helpful if you have multiple copies of the same object and would like to replace them all at
once.

245

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To replace a library object
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click in the Bedroom and drag to draw a camera

arrow pointed straight up on screen, towards the back wall.
2. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:l

Notice that because the Wall Elevation is currently active, "Camera View Layer Set" is listed as the active Layer
Set.

l

In the Name Filter field, begin typing the word "furniture". The list of layers will be filtered to match as you type.

l

Select the "Furniture, Interior" layer and click in the Disp column to add a check mark.

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on one of the end tables to select it.

4. Click the Replace From Libraryedit button to open the Replace From Library dialog.

lSelect one of the Replacement identical objects in room.

l

Click the Library button.

l

In the Select Library Object dialog:oType "bedside" in the Search field.

oSelect the "Manning Bedside Table" from the Search results and click OK.

5. Click OK once more to close the Replace from Library dialog and notice that both tables are replaced by the new
bedside table.
6. Notice, too, that these tables are not using the default furniture material like the bed is. Use the Material
Eyedropper
to apply the lighter colored Ash wood to the tables, as described above.

246

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

Many accessory symbols are set up to snap to a nearby wall or rest on top of a table. You can override this behavior to place
items inside larger objects like storage furniture.

To place an accessory inside a furniture object
1. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to plan view while leaving the Wall Elevation view in the Bedroom
open.
2. In the Library Browser, search for "box", select the "Storage Box", and move your mouse pointer into the Bedroom.
3. Click once on one of the bedside tables to place a box at that location.
4. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to the Wall Elevation view again.
5. Zoomin on the table with the Storage Box and notice that the box is resting on top of the table.

6. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the box and try to drag it downwards toward the lower shelf. The

box does not move because the table already occupies that space.
7. Hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and try again. The Ctrl/⌘ key allows you to override movement restrictions so you canposition the box on the lower shelf, inside the table.

247

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

8. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
9. Remember to Save

your work.

USING ARCHITECTURAL BLOCKS
Architectural Blocks are groups of objects like furniture and accessories that are blocked together so they can be placed,
moved, rotated and even deleted as though they were a single object.

To create an Architectural Block
1. Zoomin on the dresser in the Foyer.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the vase to select it.

3. With the vase selected, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the wall frame to add it to the selection set.
4. Continue holding down the Ctrl/⌘ key and click on the dresser to select it, as well.
5. The Status Bar should now report "3 objects currently selected" at the bottom left corner of the program window.
6. Click the Make Architectural Block

edit button and notice:l

The Status Bar now reports that an "Architectural Block" is the selected object.

l

The Make Architectural Block edit button has been replaced by the Explode Architectural Blockbutton,which lets you break the block into its individual component objects again.
7. Click and drag the selected Architectural Block’s Move edit handle to move it away from the wall and notice that the
dresser, vase, and wall frame all move together as a single unit.
8. Select Edit> Undo

to return the Architectural Block to its original location.

248

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To edit a component object in an Architectural Block
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the vase. The Architectural Block will become selected.

2. Click the Select Next Object

edit button.

3. The vase will become selected, and you can edit it using its edit handles, edit tools, and specification dialog.
Architectural Blocks provide a way to furnish and accessorize a plan quickly and easily. When you’ve created one that canbe useful in other projects, add it to the library.

To add an Architectural Block to the library
1. Click on the Architectural Block to select it.
2. Click the Add to Libraryedit button to add the block to the User Catalog in the Library Browser.

3. Right-click on the new item in the User Catalog and select Rename from the contextual menu to change the namefrom "Untitled" to something descriptive like "Foyer Table".
You can organize the content in your User Catalog into project-specific folders.

To create a folder of plan-specific library content
1. Right-click on the User Catalog line item and select New>Folder from the contextual menu.
2. Type a short, descriptive name for this new folder. Here, "Chic Cottage" is used.
3. Select the "Foyer Table" line item, then click and drag it over the new Chic Cottage folder. When the folder becomes
highlighted, release the mouse button to move the item into the folder.
4. Move the "Hat Channel" and "2x12 Profile" line items into the Chic Cottage folder, as well.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

The Beach Palette folder was created in the Finish Materials tutorial to collect a selection of complementary colors in one
place. These materials are used in Chic Cottage, but are not project-specific. Instead of moving Beach Palette folder into the
Chic Cottage folder, you can add a link.

To create a link to a folder
1. Right-click on the Beach Palette folder and select Copy from the contextual menu.
2. Right-click on the Chic Cottage folder and select Paste Link from the contextual menu.
lA copy of the Beach Palette folder is created in the Chic Cottage folder.

l

The materials in both Beach Palette folders are linked to one another.

3. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

CREATING A SCHEDULE
Although not usually present in construction drawings, furnishings play a vital role in interior designs. The furnishings in aparticular room can be listed in a Furniture Schedule.

249

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To set furniture schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select"Furniture Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Furniture Schedule Defaults dialog:lUnder Columns to Include, remove all of the columns except "Qty" and "Description".

l

Under Available Columns, select "3D Perspective" and click the Add button.

lWith "3D Perspective" selected in the Columns to Include list, click the Move Up button to move it to the topof the list.

l

Add the "Dimensions" column and move it to the bottom of the list.

lUnder Object Preview Options, check the box beside Scale Images.

3. Click OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To create a furniture schedule
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Furniture Schedule, then click once in an empty space near the other schedules.

Just like real furnishings, furniture symbol measurements are not always in whole inches. In schedules, these values arereported as fractions by default. They can, however, be rounded instead.

To edit number formatting in a schedule
1. Select the schedule and click the Open Object.

2. On the NUMBER FORMATTING panel of the Schedule Specification dialog:lClick on the "Dimensions" line item under Format Column.

lBelow the list, you can specify the units of measurement as well as accuracy.

lHere, simply set the Smallest Fraction to 1/1 and click OK.

If you wish, you can use Extension Snaps to align the furniture schedule below the room moldings schedule createdpreviously. See "To create a room moldings schedule" on page 236 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
As an alternative to listing the dining room chairs and table individually, they can instead be listed as a set.

250

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

To add an architectural block to a schedule
1. Select the Dining room furniture set and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Architectural Block Specification dialog, check the box beside Treat as One Object.
3. On the SCHEDULE panel:l

Check Include in Schedule.

lSelect the Include in Schedule As radio button.

l

Click the arrow beside "Furniture" and check the box beside "Indoor".

4. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel, delete the %automatic_description% macro from the Description field andinstead type a short but more descriptive phrase like "Dining Set".
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.
6. Click in the Schedule Detail to make it the active window and notice that the separate line items for the chairs andtable have been replaced by a single Dining Set line item.
Accessories like frames, baskets, and vases do not necessarily belong in a furniture schedule.

To remove an object from a schedule
1. Still in the Schedule Detail, click on the "Double Mat Frame" line item in the Furniture Schedule to select it andhighlight the row.
2. Click the Find Object in Plan

edit button. The frame behind the dresser in the Foyer becomes selected

automatically in plan view, and that view window becomes active.
3. With the frame selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the SCHEDULE panel of the Furniture Specification dialog, uncheck Include in Schedule and click OK.
5. Repeat this process to remove the vase and storage boxes from the schedule, as well.
6. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CREATING REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Furnishings.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

251

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding furniture and accessories to a plan
To set the Material Defaults for upholstery

240

To place a furniture object in a plan

241

To place furniture sets in a plan242

To add decorative furnishings

243

To modify a symbol from the Library243

To create a mirror

245

To replace a library object

246

To place an accessory inside a furniture object

247

To create an Architectural Block248

To edit a component object in an Architectural Block249

To add an Architectural Block to the library249

To create a folder of plan-specific library content

249

To create a link to a folder

249

To set furniture schedule defaults

250

To create a furniture schedule

250

To edit number formatting in a schedule250

To add an architectural block to a schedule251

To remove an object from a schedule251

To save a plan revision

251

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 13 - Interior Furnishings
How do the Material Defaults affect furnishing objects placed from the Library Browser?
lSome furnishing objects in the library have been assigned particular materials to complement the object's design andinitially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some furnishings,
however, inherit the default materials furniture and upholstery that can set differently for each plan in the Material
Defaults dialog.

What are two ways to find an object in the Library Browser?
l

To get an idea of what options are available, you can browse the contents of the Library.

lWhen you know what you want to find in the Library, you can save time by searching.

What edit tool lets you substitute all instances of an object with a different object from the library?
l

You can replace a library object in your plan with a different item from the Library using the Replace From Libraryedit tool. This can be particularly helpful if you have multiple copies of the same object and would like to replacethem all at once.

What key on the keyboard lets you move an object through another object, overriding movement restrictionsl

The Ctrl key allows you to override movement restrictions when moving or resizing objects.

252

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Interior Furnishings

What is an Architectural Block?
lArchitectural Blocks are groups of objects like furniture and accessories that are blocked together so they can beplaced, moved, rotated and even deleted as though they were a single object.

What feature in the program can you use to customize how information like object sizes is reported?
l

The NumberFormatter Ruby class allows you to specify the unit of measurement used in a macro.

What feature allows you to create a custom schedule column?
l

The Custom Object Fields tool allows you to create object attributes that can be listed in custom schedule columns.

What two things must you do to include an Architectural Block in a schedule?
l

To include an Architectural Block in a schedule, it must have Treat as One Object and Include in Schedule checked in
the Architectural Block Specification dialog.

What edit tool lets you locate a particular object listed in a schedule?
l

The Find Object in Plan edit tool locates the object associated with a selected line item in a schedule.

What setting lets you remove an object from a schedule?
l

The Include in Schedule check box found in a variety of different objects’ specification dialogs, on the Schedule panel.

253

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Kitchen and Bath Tutorials

Kitchen and Bath Tutorials

Chapter 4

The Kitchen and Bath Tutorials describe best practices for designing kitchens and baths in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Cabinet Styles
Cabinet Layout
Appliances and Fixtures
Light Fixtures
Electrical Objects

255
279
299
324
345

254

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Cabinet Styles
Cabinet objects support a high degree of customization, allowing you to model a wide variety of styles.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for customizing cabinet styles. Concepts introduced include:
File Management

255

Productivity Tips

255

Setting the Defaults

256

Using Plan Views

256

Specifying Door and Drawer Styles

257

Specifying Countertops and Backsplashes

258

Adding Moldings and Millwork

259

Modifying Cabinet Fronts

263

Updating Cabinet Defaults

271

Applying Custom Materials

273

Creating File Revisions

277

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Interior Furnishings tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Furnishings andCHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Furnishings.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 277.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to customize cabinet styles, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Material Defaults dialog to specify the materials initially assigned to cabinet doors and drawers placed fromthe Library Browser.

l

The Match Propertiesl

The Set as Default

edit tool lets you assign selected attributes from one object to another.
edit tool allows you to apply a selected object’s specifications to the defaults for that type ofobject.

255

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Contentl

A selection of name brand cabinet catalogs are available for download in the "Cabinets" category of the 3D Library.
Select Library> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

lCreate template plans that have your custom cabinet styles set as the defaults and ready for use when you begin a newplan.

InterfacelCabinet doors and drawers can be applied to a cabinet directly from the library: select the door or drawer in the
Library Browser, then click once on the cabinet in a camera or plan view.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whenplacing cabinets, there are several defaults that should be borne in mind.
Before placing cabinets, it is a good idea to set the Cabinet Defaults so that they meet your needs.
As an alternative to setting all desired specifications, you can place a cabinet into a plan, customize its construction andappearance, and then apply all of its settings to the defaults for its object type. See Updating Cabinet Defaults on page 271.
When a cabinet door, drawer, or panel is inserted into a cabinet, it inherits the default "Cabinet Door/Drawer" material set in
the Material Defaults dialog for the current plan. See To set the Material Defaults on page 273.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,including active Layer Set and Default Set. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings" on page 7 of the Exterior Walls
Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the twoviews’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

256

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Kitchen & Bath Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Kitchen and Bath Plan View.
4. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice that the "Kitchen and Bath Layer Set" is now listed as
active, and that:lWall layers and manually drawn dimensions no longer display.

lDimensions associated with room labels do display.

l

Object labels and the saved section view camera symbol are smaller.

5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
6. Right-click on the "Kitchen and Bath Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual
menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Kitchen and Bath", then click Cancel.
Cabinets can now be customized and later, laid out and annotated, without affecting the appearance of either the floor orroof plan.

SPECIFYING DOOR AND DRAWER STYLES
A variety of custom door and drawer styles is available in the Library and can be specified in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs
as well as applied to a cabinet in either its specification dialog or in a 3D view.
It is recommended that you set the defaults for an object before placing instances of that object in a plan. A slightly different
alternative to this best practice is to place a single instance of an object, customize it, and then set its attributes as thedefaults before placing more objects.

To specify a custom door or drawer style
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet, then click in the Kitchen near the windows to place a base cabinet

against the left vertical wall.
2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the base cabinet to select it and click the Open Object

edit

button.
3. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, click the Library button under the Door
Panel heading.

257

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. In the Select Library Object dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Cabinet Doors/Drawers/Panels.

l

In addition, the door currently assigned to the cabinet is from the Library. As a result, the Doors Folder

isselected and the tree list in the Folders panel is expanded to show the door selected at Chief Architect Core
Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinet Doors, Drawers, & Panels> Doors.
lBrowse through the folder and select a different cabinet door style, such as "Beaded Recessed Panel Door",then click OK.

5. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your change.
Doors and drawers can also be applied directly from the library. See To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D viewson page 264, below. The process is best seen in a camera view.

SPECIFYING COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASHESCountertops and backsplashes are customizable components of base cabinets.

To customize a countertop
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the base cabinet to select it and click the Open Object

edit

button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lSpecify the Thickness as 3 cm and press the Tab key on the keyboard to update the dialog.

l

3 cm slabs are often described as being 1 1/4" in U.S. units, so change the Thickness to that value instead.

lSpecify the Overhang as 1 1/2".

Custom Countertops that are independent objects can also be created. See "To create a custom countertop" on page 291 of
the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.

To specify a backsplash
1. With the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog still open:lSpecify the Height as 4".

l

Check the box beside Side.

258

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet StyleslClick OK.

2. Remember to Save

your work.

Like countertops, backsplashes can also be drawn as independent objects. See "To add a Custom Backsplash" on page 306
of the Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

ADDING MOLDINGS AND MILLWORK
Just like doors, windows, and rooms, cabinets can be customized using moldings. See "Applying Room Moldings" on page228 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
As with door and drawer styles, it is best practice to set the defaults for cabinet moldings and millwork prior to placing thecabinets; however, the Set as Default edit tool allows for a slightly different approach.

To specify a counter edge profile
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the base cabinet in the kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button to open the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.

3. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Add New button.
4. In the Select Library Object dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

l

To further filter the results, type "edge molding" in the Search field, then click on the "Edge Molding" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

l

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Edge Molding.

lSelect the "EM05 - Edge Molding" and click OK.

5. Returning to the MOLDINGS panel:lBelow the Molding Profiles list, check the box beside Retain Aspect Ratio.

lSpecify the Height as 1 1/4" to match the Countertop Thickness and notice that the Width value adjusts so the
profile becomes smaller without its shape being distorted.

lClick in the Name field and type: EM05 Counter Edge Profile.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

259

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

All new moldings are initially assigned the same material as the cabinet. This, however, can be changed if you wish. See
Applying Custom Materials on page 273 for more information.
Before adding crown molding to wall cabinets, it’s important that the correct cabinet height be established.

To find the finished ceiling height
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the floor surface of the Kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Room Specification dialog, note that the Finished Ceiling value is 95 5/8" and clickOK.

To apply crown molding
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Wall Cabinet, then move your mouse pointer into the camera view.

2. Notice that as you move your mouse pointer, the program will try to snap the cabinet at a particular height on thewall.
lThis is its default height, set in the Wall Cabinet Defaults dialog.

3. Click to place a wall cabinet to the right of the windows.
4. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object
ledit button.

On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Finished Floor to Top value as
95 5/8".

5. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Add New button.
6. In the Select Library Object dialog:ll

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Moldings and Profiles.

To further filter the results, type "crown molding" in the Search field, then click on the "Crown Molding"
Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

260

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Stylesl

The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Crown Molding.

lSelect the "CM02 - Crown Molding", which is also the default crown molding for Floor 1, and click OK.

7. Returning to the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog:l

Make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio is checked and change the Height of CM02 - Crown Molding to 3" tomatch the room’s crown molding.

lSpecify the Vertical Offset as -2 3/4", which is the height of the molding profile then make sure that From
Top is selected.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

8. Notice that since the top of the cabinet touches the ceiling, the crown molding is forced into the ceiling and cannot
be seen. To correct this, adjust the cabinet’s Finished Floor to Top height.
9. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object

edit button once more.

10. On the GENERAL panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog:lClick in the Finished Floor to Top value to place the cursor after the current value of 95 5/8".

l

Press the Spacebar, then press the - key followed by 2 3/4", which is the height of the CM02 - Crown
Molding.

l

Press the Tab key to update the dialog settings and notice the new value: 92 5/8", then click OK.

261

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

There are two ways to create a light rail. One way is to create space under the cabinet bottom by increasing the Item Heightof a wall cabinet's lowest Separation face item. For recessed or decorative light rails, you can instead apply a molding.

To add a light rail
1. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object

edit button and return to the MOLDINGS panel of theWall Cabinet Specification dialog.
2. Click the Add New button, and in the Select Library Object dialog:lBrowse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Moldings, Profiles, Extrusions> Brackets andChannels.

lSelect the "L-Bracket" and click OK.

3. Notice that the new molding can now be seen near the top of the cabinet in the dialog preview.
4. With the L-Bracket selected in the table, specify the Type as "Light Rail" and notice:l

To Top is no longer checked in the moldings table.

l

The molding is now positioned at the bottom of the cabinet in the dialog preview.

5. Set the Profile Rotate to 180° to rotate it so the horizontal edge is against the bottom of the cabinet.
6. Make sure Retain Aspect Ratio is checked and specify the Width and Height as 1".
7. Specify the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset as - 1" to make the light rail flush with the front, sides, andbottom of the cabinet box.

262

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

8. Rename the L-Bracket: click once on its Name in the table, then type "Light Rail" and click OK.
9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save

your work.

Millwork items such as feet can also be applied to cabinets. See To add cabinet feet on page 270, below.

MODIFYING CABINET FRONTS
The layout of doors, drawers, and other items on a cabinet front can also be customized.

To create a drawer base
1. Create a copy of the customized base cabinet next to the original:lClick the Select ObjectslClick the Copy/Pastelbutton, then click on the cabinet to select it.
edit button.

Position the mouse pointer along the left wall of the Kitchen, closer to the back wall than the existing cabinet,and click once.

2. Click on the new base cabinet to select it.
3. Click the Open Object

edit button and on the FRONT panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lClick on the drawer in the preview pane on the right side of the dialog to select it.

l

Notice that its Item Type is "Drawer", and its Item Height, 5".

4. Next, click on the cabinet door in the preview pane.

263

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet StyleslNotice that its Item Type is "Auto Right Door". This means that if the cabinet is over 24" wide, it will change to adouble door, but if it is under 24" wide, it will be a single right-handed door.

lSelect "Drawer" from the Item Type drop-down list instead.

5. Click the Add New button, and in the New Cabinet Face Item dialog:lSelect "Drawer" from the Item Type drop-down list.

lSpecify the Height as 12".

6. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your changes.

Shelves can also be specified for any cabinet Door orOpening front item.

You can apply a secondary drawer style directly from the Library to the larger lower drawers so they match the door style.
This process is best seen in a camera view.

To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D views
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera, then click and drag to draw a camera arrow pointed at thefront of the base cabinet.
2. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser

to open the Library Browser side window.

3. In the Search field, type "drawer" and then select the "Drawer Fronts" Folder
Doors, Drawers, & Panels.

264

located in Architectural> Cabinet

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. In the Folders panel, the tree list expands to show the Browse to show the Cabinet Doors, Drawers and Panels folder.
Open the Drawer Fronts folder and select the "Beaded Framed Drawer".
5. Move your mouse pointer into the view window and position it over the cabinet. Notice that it displays the Replacefrom Libraryicon.

6. Click anywhere on the base cabinet to apply the selected drawer front to the cabinet.
l

Library items specified as drawer fronts will be assigned to any drawers or false drawer front items on acabinet.

l

Library items specified as doors will be assigned to any door or door panel front items on a cabinet.

7. Select the new drawer base cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button and on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel,

notice the information for the Drawer line items in the Face Items table:l

The top drawer, "2 Drawer" has "Default: Slab" reported as its drawer panel. "Default" indicates that this is thecabinet's Main Drawer Style, specified on the DOOR/DRAWER panel.

l

The other two drawers have "Beaded Framed Drawer", which is a secondary style applied to the individual face
items.

8. When you are finished, Save

your work and select File> Close View to return to plan view.

265Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

The new drawer base can be further customized to serve as a vanity in the Bath.

To change cabinet box construction and overlay
1. Select the drawer bank in the Kitchen and click the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click once along the lower horizontal wall in the Bath, in front of the door, to place a copy of the drawer bank atthat location.

l

Select the new cabinet and move it into the lower right corner of the Bath using its edit handles.

2. With the new cabinet selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lUnder the Box Construction heading, select Framed.

l

Under the Door/Drawer Overlay heading, select Inset.

266

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

4. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, notice the information for the Drawer line items in the Face Items table:l

The top drawer, "2 Drawer" has "Default: Slab" reported as its drawer panel. "Default" indicates that this is thecabinet's Main Drawer Style.

l

The other two drawers have "Beaded Framed Drawer", which is a secondary style applied to the individual face
items.

5. Still on the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:l

Click on line item "3 Separation - Horizontal" in the list of Face Items.

lSpecify the Item Height as 1/2".

lSpecify the Item Height of line item "5 Separation - Horizontal" as 1/2", as well.

6. Specify the Item Height of the top drawer as 8 3/4" and the Item Height of the bottom two drawers as 9".
7. With the drawers essentially the same size, it makes sense for them to use the same Main Drawer Panel:lSelect the middle drawer face item and click the Specify button for Appliance/Door/Drawer under the
Selected Item Properties heading.

l

In the Drawer Face Item Specification dialog, select "Use Default" from the Door Panel Style drop-down list,
then click OK.

l

Select the bottom drawer and make it "Use Default" as well.

8. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

267

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To create a split cabinet front
1. Open the Base Cabinet Specification dialog again and on the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 48".
2. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, divide the cabinet front into two vertical sections:lClick on "Vertical Layout Parent" at the top of the Face Items list to select it.

lClick the Split Vertical button to divide the stack of drawers into two stacks, side by side.

3. Vertically divide the stack of drawers on the left to make a total of three vertical sections:l

In the Face Items list, click on line item "1.1 Layout - Vertical" to select it.

l

Notice that the vertical section on the left side of the cabinet becomes selected in the preview pane.

l

Click the Split Vertical button to divide the stack of drawers into two smaller stacks, side by side.

4. Specify the Item Widths of the three vertical sections:268

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet StyleslWith "1.1 Layout - Vertical" still selected, specify the Item Width as 10".

l

Scroll down the Face Items list, select "1.5 Layout - Vertical" and specify its Item Width as 10" as well.

l

Select "1.3 Layout - Vertical" in the Face Items list and confirm that its Item Width is 22".

5. Specify the Item Widths of the two vertical separation pieces:lSelect line item "1.2 Separation - Vertical" and specify its Item Width as 1/2".

lSpecify the Item Width of "1.4 Separation - Vertical" as 1/2".

6. Replace the three drawers in the center with a door:lClick on the top drawer in the middle vertical selection and click the Delete button.

lDelete the top drawer once more.

lSelect the remaining middle drawer and specify its Item Type as "Door - Double".

269

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

7. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel:l

Under the Door Handle heading, select the Distance From Top radio button and set this value as 3 3/4".

lUnder the Drawer Panel heading, click the Main Style Library button and select the "Beaded Framed
Drawer" panel, as described above.

8. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

To add cabinet feet
1. Select the base cabinet in the Bath and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Toe Kick Height as 6".
3. On the ACCESSORIES panel, click the Library button next to Foot Style.
4. In the Select Library Object dialogl

The content is filtered by Typeso that it only lists Millwork.

l

In the Search field, type "feet" and select the Cabinet Feet s Folder

in the drop-down filter list.

lT tree list in the Folders panel expands to show the contents of the Chief Architect Core Catalogs>
Architectural> Millwork> Cabinet Feet folder.

lSelect "Narrow Taper" and click OK.

270

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

5. Click OK to close the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, as well.
When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

A sink can be added to this cabinet later on. See "To add a drop-in sink" on page 304 of the Appliances and Fixtures
Tutorial.
Custom materials can be assigned to this bathroom vanity, as well. See Applying Custom Materials on page 273.

UPDATING CABINET DEFAULTS
Once a base cabinet has been customized to meet your needs, you can apply its attributes to the Base Cabinet Defaults
dialog so that the Base Cabinet tool creates new cabinets that are identical to the one you modified.

To use the Set as Default tool
1. Select the customized drawer base cabinet in the Kitchen.
2. Click the Set as Default

edit button.

3. A message will confirm that the Base Cabinet Defaults have been updated.
The Wall Cabinet Defaults can also be updated; however, first the wall cabinet’s Door Style should be set to match that of
the base cabinets.

271

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To use the Match Properties tool
1. Select either of the base cabinets in the Kitchen and click the Match Properties

edit button.

2. In the Match Properties dialog:lType "door" in the Search field and notice that Found Properties matching your search term are moved to the topof the list.

lCheck the box beside "Main Door Style", then click OK.

3. Notice that now, all of the base cabinets are group-selected.
lThis is because they have the same "Beaded Recessed Panel Door".

l

The wall cabinet is not included in the selection set, though, because it has a different Door Style.

4. Next, click the Apply Properties

edit button and click once on the wall cabinet. Notice that it is added to theselection set when you do this.
5. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the wall cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

6. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel of the Wall Cabinet Specification dialog, confirm that the Door Style is now the"Beaded Recessed Panel Door", then click OK.
7. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Set as Default

edit button.

Many of the customized features of your wall cabinet can also be applied to full height cabinets, and then saved as thedefaults for those cabinet types, as well.

272

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To create a matching full height cabinet
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Full Height, then click to place a tall cabinet in the bottom right corner of the Kitchen.

2. Select the customized wall cabinet in the Kitchen and click the Match Properties

edit button.

3. In the Match Properties dialog:lType "door" in the Search field and check the box beside "Main Door Style".

lDelete "door" from the Search field and replace it with "molding".

l

Check the box beside "Moldings".

lClick OK.

4. Next, click the Apply Properties
5. Click the Select Objects

edit button and click once on the full height cabinet.

button, then select the full height cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

6. On the GENERAL panel of the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog:lSpecify the Height as 92 5/8", which is the top height of the wall cabinet created earlier.

lSpecify the Depth as 12".

7. On the MOLDINGS panel:l

Notice that the "CM02 - Crown Molding" crown molding is assigned to the cabinet with the same -3" Vertical
Offset as the wall cabinet.

lSelect the "Light Rail" line item and click the Delete button, then click OK.

8. With the full height cabinet still selected, click the Set as Default

edit button

9. A message will confirm that the Full Height Cabinet Defaults have been updated.
10. Remember to Save

your work.

APPLYING CUSTOM MATERIALS
Material Defaults offer a way to specify the default material for broad categories of objects - including those placed fromthe library - rather than specific types of objects. Cabinets offer a good example of their usefulness, which can be seen in 3D
views.

To set the Material Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand

the category, select "Base Cabinet" and click the Edit button.

273

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog:l

Notice that nearly all of the items in the list of components has "Default" stated before the material name.

lThis means that these components are drawing their material assignments from the Material Defaults dialog.

lClick Cancel to return to the Default Settings dialog.

3. Select "Materials" in the list and click the Edit button.
4. In the Material Defaults dialog is where cabinets and a variety of other object types inherit their default materials
from.
l

Scroll to find the "Cabinet" line item .Click on "Cabinet", hold down the Shift key and click on "Cabinet
Door/Drawer" and note that they are both set to use "Color - White".

lClick on "Countertop" and note that it is set to use "Black-Granite".

lClick on "Hardware" and note that it is set to use "Aluminum - Brushed"

5. Click on "Cabinet", hold down the Shift key and click on "Cabinet Door/Drawer" and note that they are both set touse "Color - White".

274

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

6. Click OK and then Done to close all dialogs.

To set the base cabinet material defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand

the category, select "Base Cabinet" and click the Edit button.
2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog, click on the Cabinet component in the tree list to
select it and note that "Default: Color - White" is currently specified as its material.
3. Click the Select Material button to open the Select Material dialog, select the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material inyour Beach Palette folder in the User Catalog, and click OK.
4. Returning to the Base Cabinet Defaults dialog, notice that it no longer says "Default:" before the material namebecause the material is not being drawn from the Material Defaults dialog any longer.
5. Assign the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material to the following components: Panel, Shelves, Toe Kick, Beaded Frame
Main, and the Framed Panel Frame and Panel.

6. Select the EM-05 - Edge Molding's Molding component and click the Select Material button. On the PLAN
MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, select "Black-Granite" from the list of materials used in the plan,
then click OK.
7. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
8. Create a Camera

view in the Kitchen to see the results, and notice that the cabinet doors and drawers selectedfrom the Library are still using the "Color - White" material. This is because they are still set to derive theirmaterials from Material Defaults.

275

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

Customizing materials on individual cabinets is best done after doors, drawers, hardware, millwork, and moldings is havebeen finalized. This is because these objects use the materials set in the Material Defaults dialog by default. When applying
custom finish materials to a cabinet, the Material Painter Modes can be very helpful.

To specify custom materials on cabinets
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then select one of the base cabinets and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the MATERIALS panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:l

Notice that all of the components that are still using "Default: Color - White" are associated with objects thatwere assigned to the cabinet from the Library: the Beaded Frame drawer, Framed Recessed Panel Door, andEM-05 - Edge Molding countertop profile.

lAssign the "Color - Robin’s Egg" material to the Beaded Frame and Framed Panel door components.

lAssign the "Black-Granite" material to the EM-05 - Edge Molding's Molding component, then click OK.

3. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Object Mode
4. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Eyedropper.

, then click on any surface displaying the "Color - Robin’s

Egg" material.

276

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

5. When the mouse pointer displays a spray can icon, click on a surface of the drawer base that has the "Color - White"material to replace it with "Color - Robin’s Egg".
6. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Component Mode
7. Use the Material Eyedropper.

to assign the "Black-Granite" material to the countertop profile on the drawerbase.

8. Select File> Close View to return to plan view and Zoom

out so that the Bath can be seen.

9. Assign the materials "Ash" and "Soapstone - Graphite" to the vanity cabinet in the Bath as described in step 2.
10. When you are finished, Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Cabinet Layout tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Cabinet Style.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for setting the style of the default cabinets.
To switch to a different saved plan view

257

277

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Styles

To specify a custom door or drawer style257

To customize a countertop

258

To specify a backsplash

258

To specify a counter edge profile259

To find the finished ceiling height260

To apply crown molding260

To add a light rail262

To create a drawer base263

To apply a secondary door or drawer style in 3D views

264

To change cabinet box construction and overlay

266

To create a split cabinet front

268

To add cabinet feet270

To use the Set as Default tool

271

To use the Match Properties tool272

To create a matching full height cabinet273

To set the Material Defaults

273

To set the base cabinet material defaults

275

To specify custom materials on cabinets

276

To save a plan revision

277

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 14 - Cabinet Styles
What are two ways that cabinet doors and drawers can be assigned to a cabinet?
lCabinet doors and drawers can be assigned on the Door/Drawer panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.

lThey can also be assigned directly from the Library: select a door or drawer and then click on a cabinet in the drawing
area.

What type of object is used to add counter edge profiles and light rails to cabinets?
lCounter edge profiles and light rails can be added to cabinets using moldings assigned on the Moldings panel of the
Cabinet Specification dialog.

What option in the Cabinet Specification dialog lets you create a set of drawers next to a door?
lOn the Front/Sides/Back panel, click the Split Vertical button to divide a face item into two identical items, side byside.

What does the Set as Default edit tool do?
l

The Set as Default edit tool lets you apply the settings in a selected object’s specification dialog to the defaults for thattype of object.

What tool lets you assign certain properties of one object to another object in the plan?
l

The Match Properties edit tool let’s you apply specific attributes assigned to one object to another object.

What defaults can you use to help ensure that all cabinets use the same materials?

278

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet LayoutlAssigning Material Defaults to objects like cabinets helps ensure that they use the same materials in the current plan.

Cabinet Layout
Laying out cabinets with different sizes and face items requires precision, and is made easy with snapping, bumping, and avariety of editing tools.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing and arranging cabinets. Concepts introduced include:
File Management279

Productivity Tips

279

Setting the Defaults

280

Using Plan Views

280

Laying out Base Cabinets

280

Creating a Kitchen Island

287

Adding Wall Cabinets and Soffits

291

Placing Full Height Cabinets

293

Creating Schedules

295

Adding Annotations

295

Creating File Revisions

297

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Cabinet Styles tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-CabinetStyle and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-CabinetStyle.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 297.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to lay out a cabinet design in a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglCreate a single drawer base or other special cabinet and then copy it to produce any additional ones that you need.

l

Use the Center Object

edit tool to center cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.

279

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layoutl

The Reflect About Object
Copy/Paste

edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with theedit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.

ContentlCreate Architectural Blocks of cabinet groupings like islands and add them to the library for future use.

InterfacelBecause cabinets often have different combinations of face items, it is often helpful to design their layout in a Wall
Elevation or other camera view.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding cabinets to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before placing cabinets, it is a good idea to set the Cabinet Defaults so that they meet your needs. Cabinet style,construction, and materials can all be set in advance. See "Cabinet Styles" on page 255 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.
When a cabinet door, drawer, or panel is inserted into a cabinet, it inherits the default "Cabinet Door/Drawer" material set in
the Material Defaults dialog for the current plan. See "To set the Material Defaults" on page 273 of the Cabinet Styles
Tutorial.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Kitchen & Bath Plan View is ideal for adding cabinets to a plan. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page257 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.

LAYING OUT BASE CABINETS
Several cabinets were placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default edit
tool. Additional cabinets can now be added to create a kitchen cabinet layout. See the Cabinet Styles tutorial.

To bump and push cabinets
1. Zoom in on the Kitchen area in plan view.
2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on either of the base cabinets that were placed in the Cabinet Styles

tutorial.

280

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. Move your mouse pointer over the square Move edit handle located at the cabinet’s center, then click and drag tomove the cabinet in the direction of the other cabinet.
lWhen the selected cabinet’s editing preview outline reaches the other cabinet, it bumps into it and stops.

4. Release the mouse button again, and then repeat the same action: click and drag the Move edit handle towards theother cabinet.
lNotice that this time, the selected cabinet pushes the other cabinet, moving them both.

lDrag upward until the cabinets bump into the corner of the room.

To place base cabinets
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet, then click to place a base cabinet along the left vertical wall in the

kitchen, in front of the middle window. Notice that its back snaps to the wall surface automatically.
2. Place another base cabinet in the middle of the room and notice that it is oriented so that its front faces down onscreen.
3. Move the mouse pointer into the bottom left corner of the Kitchen room and notice that the shape of the cabinet
preview outline changes. Click to place a corner cabinet.
4. Place one more cabinet along the wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room, just to the right of the cornercabinet.

281

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

Often, the base cabinet located under a window is wider than average to accommodate a sink.

To resize a cabinet
1. A cabinet can be selected in several ways:lClick on it while the Select Objects

tool is active.

l

Click on it while the Cabinet Tool

used to create it is active.

l

Right-click on it when any tool is active.

2. Select the cabinet under the window, and notice that edit handles and a front indicator display.

3. Move your mouse pointer over its various edit handles. The arrow that displays indicates what function that handle
performs, as does the Status Bar.
4. Click and drag one of the cabinet’s horizontal sides to adjust its width.
l

As you drag, notice the Temporary Dimension that reports its width changes in 3" increments. Cabinets resize inthis manner to conform to standard cabinet sizes.

lNotice that its label updates as well. When it is 24" wide, the label is B24R; when it is 27" wide, it becomes B27R.

l

Do not release the mouse button. Instead, press the Esc key to restore the cabinet to its original size.

282

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

5. Click the Open Object

edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify

the Width as 30" and click OK.
6. Specify the other base cabinet along the left vertical wall that is not in a corner as 30" wide, as well.
7. Using either its edit handles or specification dialog, make the cabinet next to the diagonal-front corner cabinet 18" inwidth.

When a cabinet is located under a window, it is typically centered on it.

To center a cabinet
1. With the base cabinet still selected, click the Center Objects

edit button.

2. Move your mouse pointer over the middle window.
3. When a dashed horizontal centering axis displays in the window, click once.

While default cabinets are easily placed using the Base Cabinet tool, special cabinets like the drawer base take some time tocreate. When more than one is needed, though, it can be copied and pasted. The drawer base in this plan can be
distinguished in plan view by its label; however, it is much easier to see in a Wall Elevation view.

283

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To copy and paste cabinets
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchenroom, pointed towards the left vertical wall. Click to the left of the cabinet in the middle of the room and be sure to
draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Select the drawer base on the right, click the Copy/Paste

edit button, then click the Sticky Mode

edit

button.
3. Click the Reflect About Object

edit button, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the 2-door cabinet to its left.

lWhen a dashed vertical reflection axis displays, click once.

l

A copy of the original drawer base is created on the other side of the door base.

4. With the newly pasted drawer base selected, click the Reflect About Object

edit button.

5. Move your mouse pointer over the 2-door sink base cabinet to its left.
lWhen a dashed vertical reflection axis displays, click once.

l

Another copy of the drawer base is created on the left side of the sink base.

6. Click Main Edit Modeto get out of Sticky Mode but leave the new cabinet selected.

7. Resize the selected drawer base to a Width of 18", then click and drag it to the left until it bumps into the cornercabinet.
8. To finish the layout, select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
sink base and the drawer base to its left.

284

and click to place a cabinet in the gap between theChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

Small gaps between cabinets or between cabinets and walls are filled in with fillers automatically.

To control module lines and filler locations
1. Zoomin on the right half of the Kitchen room and notice that the partition between the sink base and the drawerbase to its right is wider than the others.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the drawer bank on the right to select it.

285

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. Click the cabinet’s Move edit handle and drag slowly to the left.

lWhen you see the cabinet and two cabinets to its left shift and bump against the sink base cabinet, release themouse button.

l

Notice that the wider than average separation now is located on the far right, next to the wall.

l

Select File> Close View to return to plan view and Zoom

in on the top left corner of the Kitchen. Note thatcabinet fillers can also be see in plan view.

4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:l

Locate the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer in the list.

lClick in the Display column for this layer to remove the check mark.

lClick OK and notice that the dashed lines representing the sides of base cabinet boxes no longer display.

5. Select Edit> Undo

to turn the display of the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer on again.

6. Pan down to the bottom left corner of the kitchen:286

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet LayoutllSelect Window> Pan Window

or click and hold the middle mouse button.

Drag the mouse pointer in an upward direction, then release the mouse button when the lower left corner of the
Kitchen comes into view.

7. Select the drawer base located against the left vertical wall, next to the corner cabinet.
8. Click the cabinet’s Move edit handle and drag slowly upward.
lWhen you see the cabinet and the one to its right shift and bump against the sink base, release the mouse button.

l

Notice that there is a wider than average separation between the corner cabinet and the drawer base.

9. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CREATING A KITCHEN ISLAND
Kitchen islands can have a wide variety of cabinet configurations and styles.

To create a cabinet island
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the base cabinet located in the middle of the kitchen to select it.

2. Using either its edit handles or its specification dialog, increase its Width to 30".

287

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. With the cabinet still selected, rotate it so it faces to the left:lMove your mouse pointer over the triangular Rotate edit handle.

l

Click and drag in a circular motion until the cabinet has rotated 180°, then release the mouse button.

lWith the cabinet still selected:

4. Place 18" wide drawer bases on both sides of the island cabinet:lSelect the drawer base located on either side of the corner cabinetlClick the Copy/Pastel

Click once on each side of the island cabinet.

lNotice that the pasted drawer bases are oriented in the same direction as the cabinet that they are placed beside.

l

Click Main Edit Modeedit button, then click the Sticky Modeedit button.

to get out of Sticky Mode but leave the new cabinet selected.

5. Select the three island cabinets as a group:lWith one of the drawer bases still selected, hold down the Shift key.

l

Click on each of the other island cabinets to add them to the selection set.

l

The total number of selected objects is stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

6. Click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, under theCountertop heading:lUncheck the box beside Uniform.

lSpecify the Back as 0".

l

Notice that the Active Defaults

icon in the text field loses its check mark. This means this value is not using

the Dynamic Default.
7. Still on the GENERAL panel, uncheck the box beside Backsplash, then click OK.

288

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

8.

With the three cabinets still group-selected, center the island on the side of the sink base:lClick the Center Object

edit button and move your mouse pointer over the top horizontal edge of the sink

base.
l

When a dashed horizontal centering axis displays along the edge of the sink base, click once to center thegrouped kitchen island cabinets relative to that edge.

9. At this point, you may find it helpful to move the Kitchen room label. See "To control the display of room labels" onpage 38 of the Interior Walls Tutorial.
Using a number of the techniques introduced in the Cabinet Styles tutorial, a base cabinet can also be modified to serve as
the support for a breakfast bar.

To add a breakfast bar
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet, then click to place a base cabinet at the back of the island cabinets.

2. Select the new cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Height as 42" and the Depth as 7".

289

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

4. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:

5. Select the drawer and click the Delete button.
l

Select the door and specify its Item Type as "Side Panel - Applied".

6. On the ACCESSORIES panel, click the Library button next to Panel Style.
7. In the Select Library Object dialog, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Cabinet Doors,
Drawers & Panels> Doors, select the "Beaded Beadboard Door" panel and click OK.
8. On the MATERIALS panel, select the "Beaded Beadboard Door" component, assign the "Color - Robin’s Egg"
material to it.
9. On the LABEL panel, check the box beside Suppress Label and click OK.
10. Using the edit handles, snap each side of the cabinet to the sides of the drawer bases so that its Width equals the total
width of the other three island cabinets.

290

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To create a custom countertop
1. With the back cabinet still selected, click the Generate Custom Countertop

edit button.

2. Click on the right vertical edge of the countertop polyline to select it, then:
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports the overhang distance from the selected edge to the cabinet box.
4. You may need to Zoom

in on this dimension in order to click on it.

5. In the inline text field, type 12" and press the Enter key.

Custom Countertops can be edited into a wide variety of custom shapes. For more information, visit chiefarchitect.com.
Like furnishings, cabinets can be blocked together into a single unit. See "Using Architectural Blocks" on page 248 of theInterior Furnishings Tutorial.

To create an architectural block
1. Zoomout so that the entire kitchen island can be seen.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Kitchen room label to select it.

3. Hold down the Shift key, then click and drag to draw a rectangular selection marquee around the island.
lWhen you release the mouse button, the four cabinets and the Custom Countertop will become selected, while theroom label will become deselected.

l

The total number of selected objects will be stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

4. With the five objects that make up the island selected, click the Make Architectural Block
5. When you are finished, remember to Save

edit button.

your work.

ADDING WALL CABINETS AND SOFFITS
Wall cabinets and soffits can be added in much the same manner as base cabinets.
A wall cabinet was placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default edit tool.
Additional wall cabinets can now be placed. See Cabinet Styles on page 255.

291

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To place and edit wall cabinets
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Wall Cabinet.

2. Move the mouse pointer into the lower left corner of the Kitchen, and when the preview outline changes from astandard rectangular to a corner cabinet shape, click once.
3. Click once on either side of the corner cabinet to create a wall cabinet on the left vertical wall, and one on thehorizontal wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room.
4. Select the wall cabinet in the upper left corner of the Kitchen and:lMove it into the corner using its Move edit handle.

l

Resize it to 36" in width.

5. Select the wall cabinet between the corner cabinet and the windows and resize it to 12" in width.
6. Select the wall cabinet on the right side of the corner cabinet and resize it to 30" in width.
7. Create a Full Camera view of the Kitchen to see the results.

The Soffit tool is a versatile tool that can be used for a wide variety of applications, but its primary purpose is to fill in gaps
between wall and full height cabinets and the ceiling. In Chic Cottage, the wall cabinets are positioned so that their crownmolding reaches the ceiling. Rather than use a full height cabinet with a custom height to do the same thing, a standard
height cabinet can be used, and the space above filled with a soffit.

To set the soffit defaults
1. Click the Select Objects
Open Object

button, then click on the full height cabinet in the Kitchen to select it and click theedit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog, specify the Height as 84".
3. On the MOLDINGS panel, select the "CM02 - Crown Molding", click the Delete button, and then click OK.
4. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow next to "Cabinets" to expand

the category, select "Soffit" and click the Edit button.
5. On the GENERAL panel of the Soffit Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 24", the Height as 12", the Depth as 12",and the Floor to Bottom value as 84". Then, click OK.

292

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To place soffits
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit

then click above the full height cabinet in the Kitchen to place a soffit above it.

2. Create a Camera view in the Kitchen, pointed towards the wall cabinet.
3. Notice that the room’s crown molding wraps around the soffit automatically.
4. Use the Material Eyedropper

to assign the "Color - Butter" material on the walls to the soffit so they match.

5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view, and remember to Save

your work.

PLACING FULL HEIGHT CABINETS
A full height cabinet was placed in the Cabinet Styles tutorial for the purposes of setting defaults using the Set as Default
edit tool.

To place and edit full height cabinets
1. Select Build> Cabinet> Full Height, then click along the back horizontal wall of the Garage to place a cabinet

at that location.
2. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel, specify the Width as 36", the Height as 72", and the Depth as 18".
4. On the BOX CONSTRUCTION panel, click the radio buttons beside Framed and Inset.
5. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:lSelect the upper door and click the Delete button.

l

Notice that it is replaced by an "Opening" item with shelves. Delete it as well.

6. On the DOOR/DRAWER panel:lSelect "Slab" from the Door Style drop-down list.

lSelect "Pull Vertical" from the Door Handle Main Style drop-down list.

293

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet LayoutlSpecify Horizontal the Distance From Edge value as 2".

7. On the ACCESSORIES panel:lSpecify "Caster" as the Foot Style.

l

Check the box beside Always Present.

lSee "To add cabinet feet" on page 270 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.

8. On the MOLDINGS panel, select the crown molding and click the Delete button.
9. On the MATERIALS panel, assign the "Color - Mouse" material to the following components: Cabinet,
Doors/Drawers/Panels, and Shelves.

10. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
The shelves in all Door and Opening cabinet face items are adjustable.

To adjust cabinet shelves
1. With the full height cabinet still selected, click the Open Object
Specification dialog again.
2. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel:lSelect the Door face item.

lClick the Specify button to the right of the Shelves label.

294

edit button to open the Full Height Cabinet

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. In the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog:lClick the radio button beside Manual.

lSpecify the Number of Shelves as 5, then click OK.

4. Click OK to close the Full Height Cabinet Specification dialog and apply your change.
5. Remember to Save

your work.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Like doors, windows, and furnishings, cabinets can be listed in dynamic, customizable schedules. See "Creating Schedules"
on page 104 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial and "Creating a Schedule" on page 249 of the Interior Furnishings
Tutorial.
See, too, "To change schedule numbering" on page 129 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith cabinets in place, annotations can be added. The Kitchen and Bath Plan View is active, so "Kitchen and Bath Text
Defaults" are in use. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 257 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.
Kitchen and bath views are often printed at a larger scale than other types of views, but their annotations should still beconsistent in size with annotations in other views.

To set the rich text defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Right-click on "Kitchen and Bath Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

295

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit

button to theright of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Kitchen and Bath Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s titlebar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:lll

Click the Uppercase

button.

Notice that the character size is set at 3" and recall that in the "Roof Rich Text Defaults", the character size is6". See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.
Click the Print Sizebutton to open the Print Size Calculator dialog. At a printed scale of 1/4" = 1’, acapital A will be 1/16" tall when printed, whereas in the "Roof Rich Text Defaults" it will be 1/8" tall whenprinted.
lChange the Printed Scale to 1/2" = 1’, then change the Desired Print Size to 1/8" and notice that at this scale,3" character size will produce the same size printed text as the "Roof Rich Text Defaults".

6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath" layer by default when thisSaved Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add Rich Text cabinet annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

then click near right side of the Kitchen island.

2. In the Rich Text Specification dialog:l

In the text field, type the following: breakfast bar.

lClick OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object.

3. Click on the newly created text object to select it, then click and drag its triangular Rotate edit handle to rotate it 90°
to the left.

4. Move it so that is next to the edge of the breakfast bar countertop.

296

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

To customize a cabinet label
1. Select the 3DB18 base cabinet located next to the corner cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lSelect the Specify Label radio button and delete the label text.

lClick the Insert Macro button, browse to Object Specific in the menu, and select "Automatic Label".

l

Press the Enter key to wrap to a second line and type "w/ cd" to indicate a cutlery drawer.

l

Select "Centered" from the Alignment drop-down list.

lWhen you are satisfied with the label’s appearance, click OK.

3. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

Cabinet floor plans often have key notes. Notes created in the Kitchen & Bath Plan View use "Kitchen and Bath Note
Defaults" and are placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath" layer. See "To add plan notes" on page 85 of the Interior Stairs
Tutorial.
You can continue working on this plan in the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Cabinets.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

297

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Cabinet Layout

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing cabinets. It also discussed the important default settings associated withcabinets.
To bump and push cabinets

280

To place base cabinets

281

To resize a cabinet282

To center a cabinet283

To copy and paste cabinets

284

To control module lines and filler locations

285

To create a cabinet island287

To add a breakfast bar

289

To create a custom countertop

291

To create an architectural block291

To place and edit wall cabinets

292

To set the soffit defaults

292

To place soffits

293

To place and edit full height cabinets

293

To adjust cabinet shelves

294

To set the rich text defaults

295

To add Rich Text cabinet annotations

296

To customize a cabinet label297

To save a plan revision

297

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 15 - Cabinet Layout
What edit tool can be used to align a cabinet with another object, such as a window?
l

Use the Center Object edit tool to center objects like cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.

What two edit tools can be used to create identical cabinets on either side of cabinet?
l

The Reflect About Object edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with the
Copy/Paste edit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.

How do you remove the dashed lines between cabinet boxes in plan view?
lTurn off the display of the "Cabinets, Module Lines" layer in the current plan view.

What tool allows you to create a counter that is independent of any base cabinet?
l

The Generate Custom Countertop edit tool creates an independent custom countertop over a selected cabinet.

What tool can be used to create an island that can be selected and edited like a single object?

298

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixturesl

The Make Architectural Block edit tool groups a set of selected object into an architectural block which can be moved,
rotated, or deleted as a single object.

What is the primary purpose of the Soffit tool?
l

The Soffit tool is meant to be used to fill in the space between wall or full height cabinets and the ceiling.

Appliances and Fixtures
Along with cabinets, fixtures and appliances are essential to kitchen and bath layouts.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing appliances and fixtures. Concepts introduced include:
File Management299

Productivity Tips

299

Setting the Defaults

300

Using Plan Views

300

Placing Appliances

300

Placing Fixtures

304

Editing Appliances and Fixtures

308

Creating a Kitchen Elevation

309

Creating Schedules

314

Adding Annotations

316

Creating File Revisions

322

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Cabinet Layout tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Cabinets and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Cabinets.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 322.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to place appliances in a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

299

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Center Objectl

The Reflect About Object
Copy/Paste

edit tool to center cabinets relative to windows, other cabinets, or other objects.
edit tool lets you move a cabinet to the other side of another cabinet; use with theedit tool to create identical cabinets on either side.

Contentl

A wide selection of name brand appliances are available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. SelectLibrary> Get Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

lCreate Architectural Blocks of cabinet groupings like cooktop islands and add them to the library for future use.

InterfacelBecause appliances are often placed in or beside cabinets, it is often helpful to design their layout in a Wall Elevationor other camera view.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + L - Library BrowserlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whenplacing symbols from the Library, the settings in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful.
Some appliances in the library have been assigned particular materials because those are the standard for that particular
item, and they initially use those materials regardless of the overall style of the plans they are placed into. Some appliances,
however, are available in multiple finishes and are set up inherit the default appliance materials that can set differently foreach plan in the Material Defaults dialog.
When adding fixtures and appliances to a plan, it is helpful to set the Material Defaults for "Appliances", "Appliance Trim","Fixtures, and "Fixture Trim".

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Kitchen and Bath Plan View is ideal for adding cabinets to a plan and will work well for appliances as well. See "Using
Plan Views" on page 256 of the Cabinet Styles Tutorial.

PLACING APPLIANCES
Unlike objects like cabinets that have drawing tools, appliances and fixtures are placed into plans from the Library. As such,they do not have default settings.

300

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Appliances fall into two basic categories: freestanding and built-in.

To place built-in appliances
1. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser

to open the Library Browser.

2. In the Folders panel, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Appliances> Dishwashers.
3. Select a dishwasher for placement, and move your mouse pointer into the drawing area. Notice that the pointerdisplays the Fixturesicon.
4. Click once on the 24" wide cabinet located just below the sink base to place a dishwasher at that location. Noticethat the cabinet label is replaced by the dishwasher’s label.

Note: Only one front mounted fixture can be inserted into a cabinet inthis manner. Additional front fixtures can be added in the Cabinet
Specification dialog.

To place freestanding appliances
1. In the Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances> Refrigerators> Standard Size.
2. Select a Bottom Mount Refrigerator, then click along the wall separating the Kitchen from the Dining room to placea refrigerator next to the cabinets.

301

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

3. Now is a good time to specify a final position for the doorway to the Dining room:l

Click on the doorway to select it.

lClick on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the doorway is from the vertical wall on the right.

l

In the inline text field, type 24" and press the Enter key.

Like furnishings, Appliances and cabinets can be blocked together to form a single unit. See "Using Architectural Blocks"
on page 248 of the Interior Furnishings Tutorial.

To modify an architectural block
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the kitchen island Architectural Block to select it.

2. Click the Explode Architectural Block

edit button to break the block into its component objects.

3. Select the 30" wide middle cabinet and Deleteit.

4. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Appliances> Ranges> Slide-In and select the "Flat Top
Range".
5. Move the mouse pointer into the space left by the deleted cabinet and click once to place the range.
6. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances>Hoods> Large, selectthe "Glass Island Hood", and place it in front of the island.
lClick on the hood to select it, then move over the island using its edit handle.

l

If necessary, Rotate it so it faces the same direction as the range.

l

Use the Center Objects

edit tool to center the hood over the range. See "To center a cabinet" on page 283of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.
7. Group-select the appliances and cabinets that make up the island and click the Make Architectural Blockbutton. See "To create an architectural block" on page 291 of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.
Some appliances are free-standing, but designed to mount under a cabinet.

302

edit

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To place an undermount appliance
1. Create a Camera view in the Kitchen, pointed at the wall cabinet in the upper left corner.
2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the wall cabinet to select it, and use the Resize edit handle locatedalong its bottom edge to raise the bottom edge up until the Temporary Dimension reports its height as 27".

3. With the wall cabinet still selected, click the Open Object

edit button, and on the MOLDINGS panel of the Wall

Cabinet Specification dialog, select the "Light Rail", click the Delete button, and then click OK.
4. Select Window> Tile Vertically, then click in the plan view window to make it the active view and Zoom

in on the upper left corner of the Kitchen.
5. In the Library Browser, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Appliances>Microwave
Ovens.
6. Select the "Under Cabinet Microwave", then move the mouse pointer over the wall cabinet at the top left corner ofthe Kitchen.
7. Click on the wall cabinet in the plan view window to place a microwave under it.

303

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

8. If need be, you can use the Center Objects

edit tool to center the microwave under the wall cabinet. See "Tocenter a cabinet" on page 283 of the Cabinet Layout Tutorial.
9. When you are finished, close the Camera view and Save

your work.

PLACING FIXTURES
Like appliances, plumbing fixtures can be either free-standing or inserted into cabinets.

To add a drop-in sink
1. In the Search field, type "bathroom sink" and select the "Bathroom Sinks" Folder

located at Architectural>

Fixtures> Sinks> Bathroom Sinks.
2. Open the Vanity folder and select the "Rectangular Sink".
3. Move your mouse pointer into the drawing area and click once on base cabinet located in the Bath to insert the sink
into that cabinet.

l

A warning message will note that to accommodate the sink, all top drawers will be converted to False Drawers.
Click OK.

4. Select the cabinet and click the Open Object

edit button.

304

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

5. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lClick on the top left drawer in the preview to select it and change its Item Type to "Drawer",lSpecify the top right drawer as a "Drawer" as well, then click OK.
You can also specify a drop-in fixture for a cabinet as well as its
position in the Base Cabinet Specification dialog.

Drop-in and undermount sinks are inserted objects. Vessel and apron sinks, on the other hand, are stand-alone objects. To
place an apron sink, the cabinet that holds it must first be modified and an optional Custom Backsplash drawn.

To create an apron sink base
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the 30" wide sink base cabinet located under the windows in the

Kitchen.
2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog:lSpecify the Height as 28".

lUncheck Countertop.

3. On the FRONT/SIDES/BACK panel, click on the drawer in the preview pane, then click the Delete button and clickOK.
4. On the MOLDINGS panel, click the Delete button to remove the "EM-05 - Counter Edge Profile" from this cabinet
and click OK.

305

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To add a Custom Backsplash
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchen,pointed towards the apron sink. Be sure to draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Make sure that Object Snaps

are enabled.

3. Select Build> Cabinet> Custom Backsplash, then:lMove your mouse pointer the top left corner of the sink base.

lWhen you see an Endpoint

Snap Indicator, click and drag up and to the right until you reach the top rightcorner of the space that needs a backsplash.
lWhen you see an Intersection

Snap Indicator, release the mouse button.

4. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.

306Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To place an apron sink
1. In the Library Browser, type "apron" in the Search field and click on the "Apron Front" Folderline item in theFilters drop-down list.
2. The tree list in the Folders panel will now expand to show Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Fixtures> Sinks> Kitchen
Sinks> Apron Front.
3. Select the "Apron Front Sink" and click on the edited base cabinet to place the sink on top of it.
4. Create a Full Camera

view in the Kitchen to see the results.

5. If you want, you can select the Custom Backsplash behind the sink and adjust its bottom edge upwards using its edit
handles.
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View.

To place bathroom fixtures
1. In plan view, Zoom

in on the Bath.

2. In the Library, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Plumbing Fixtures> Bathtubs> Standard
Tubs and select "Standard Tub 1".
3. Move the mouse pointer into left side of the Bath, then:lMove the mouse pointer from wall to wall and notice that the bathtub’s preview outline snaps to the nearest
wall.

l

When the preview outline is snapped to the left vertical wall and the V-shaped front indicator points to theright, click once to place the bathtub.

4. Click on the tub to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button. On the General panel of the Fixture

Specification dialog, specify the Width as 60" and click OK.
5. With the tub still selected, us the Center Object

edit tool to center it along the left wall of the bathroom.

6. Browse to the Plumbing Fixtures> Toilets folder and select the "Standard Toilet".

307

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

7. Move your mouse pointer into the space between the bathtub and the cabinet and click once to place the toilet at thatlocation.

8. When you are finished, Save

your work.

EDITING APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES
Like most objects, fixtures and appliances can be modified using their edit handles and their specification dialogs.

To reverse a fixture symbol
1. Click on the bathtub to select it and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:l

Check Reflect Geometry and click OK.

l

Notice that the faucet and drain move to the other side of the tub.

3. Zoomout so the Kitchen can be seen.

4. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera, then click and drag to draw a camera arrow in the

Kitchen, pointed at the refrigerator.

308

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the refrigerator to select it.

6. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check the box

next to Reflect Geometry and click OK.
7. Notice that the door handle moves to the opposite side of the refrigerator.

8. When you are finished, close the Camera view and Save

your work.

CREATING A KITCHEN ELEVATION
Kitchen and bath plans often require cabinet elevations with dimensions. Wall Elevation views are often ideal for this task
because they only include objects in the same room as the camera.
The automatic dimension tools each have their own defaults dialogs. In addition, automatic dimensions inherit many of their
settings from the currently active Saved Dimension Defaults.

309

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To set the Wall Elevation dimension defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside "Camera Tools" to expand the category.

l

Select "Wall Elevation" and click the Edit button.

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Wall Elevation Defaults dialog:lJust like plan views, elevation views have saved defaults associated with them.

lThese are the defaults that are active when a new Wall Elevation view is created.

l

Notice, too, that Wall Elevations are set to use the "Kitchen and Bath Elevation Layer Set".

l

Click the Edit Default

button to the right of the Dimensions drop-down list.

3. In the Dimension Defaults dialog:l

Notice that Kitchen and Bath Dimension Defaults is stated in the title bar.

l

On the SETUP AUTOMATIC panel, notice that you can specify which sides of the elevation Auto Elevation
Dimensions generate.

l

On the LOCATE AUTO ELEVATION panel, you can choose to add an Outer Dimension as well as specify whether avariety of different objects are located by Auto Elevation Dimensions.

l

On the LAYER panel, notice that dimensions are created on the "Dimensions, Kitchen & Bath" layer when the
Kitchen and Bath Dimension Defaults are in use.

l

On the TEXT STYLE panel, notice that dimensions use the 1/2" Text Style, which is assigned to their default layer,when this saved default is active.

4. Click Cancel and then Done to close all dialogs.

To create a Wall Elevation view
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click one or two plan inches to the left of the

Kitchen island cabinets and drag a horizontal camera arrow from right to left.
2. In the Wall Elevation view that is created when you release the mouse button, notice:l

Only the Kitchen can be seen in the view.

l

The Active Layer Display Options side window reports that the "Kitchen and Bath Elevation Layer Set" is now
active.

3. Select Tools> Edit Active View

and on the GENERAL panel of the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog,

notice that Clip to Room is checked and click Cancel.
Automatic dimensions can be created with a single click, and then edited in a variety of ways.

310

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To create Auto Elevation Dimensions
1. Select CAD> Automatic Dimensions> Auto Elevation Dimensions.

2. A complete set of dimensions are created around all four sides of the wall elevation.
Auto Elevation Dimensions on all four sides typically locate more objects than you actually need. Once created, though,they are easily edited.
Extension line edit handles sometimes display in front of other objects and may not be easy to see. To make them easier touse, you can change their fill color.

To change the edit handle fill color
1. Select Edit> Preferencesin Windows or Chief Architect> Preferences in macOS.

2. On the COLORS panel of the Preferences dialog, click the Handle Fill Color button and choose a bright, easy to see
color, then click OK.

To move an extension line
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the horizontal dimension line located above the model that has threeCenterline dimensions. Notice:l

The end points and each extension are numbered from left to right.

l

Diamond-shaped edit handles under each CL extension are positioned on the surface of the object the extension
line locates. These are Move Extension Line edit handles.

311

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

2. Click on the diamond-shaped Move Extension Line edit handle associated with extension 2, located at the top centerof the under mount microwave and drag it to the left. Notice:l

As you drag, an extension line preview snaps to the location of each object that the dimension line can locate.

l

The dimension value previews on either side of extension 2 update to reflect the line’s current location.

3. When the extension line locates the center of the right window, release the mouse button.
4. A message will confirm whether you want to turn off Auto Refresh Elevation Dimensions. Click the Yes button.
This particular extension line is not actually required, however, so it can be removed. There are two ways to do this.

To delete an extension line
1. Click and drag the extension line 2’s Move Extension Line edit handle to the right until it meets and replaces
extension 3.
2. Select Edit> Undo.

3. Click and drag the extension line 2’s Move Extension Line edit handle upwards, away from the dimension line
entirely. When the extension line’s number no longer displays, release the mouse button.

312

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

4. When you are finished editing extension lines, you may want to return to the COLORS panel of the Preferences dialog
and change the Handle Fill Color back to a pale grey color.
Extensions can also be added to dimension lines. See "To position a ceiling light" on page 329 of the Light Fixtures
Tutorial.

To reposition a dimension label
1. With the dimension line still selected, move your mouse pointer over the small, square Move Dimension Label edit
handle located in the middle of a dimension segment label.
2. When the mouse pointer turns into a four-headed arrow, click and drag to move the label.

Cabinet elevations sometimes use cross boxes to cover objects that are clipped in the view. CAD objects drawn in anelevation are placed on the view’s Current CAD Layer.

To set kitchen and bath CAD defaults
1. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View.

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Wall Elevation Defaults dialog, note that the Current CAD Layer in thisview is "CAD, Kitchen and Bath" and click OK.

To add a cross box
1. Make sure that Object Snaps
2. Select CAD> Boxes> Cross Box

are enabled.
, then:l

Click on the top back corner of the refrigerator and drag across and down to the bottom front corner.

lWhen you release the mouse button, a cross box is created.

3. You can resize the cross box if you want:l

Click and drag a corner edit handle and notice that both adjacent edges move and/or resize but the corner angle
remains 90°.

l

CAD Box objects like Cross Boxes always have four 90° corners.

313

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Cabinet elevations are often included in construction documents, so this Wall Elevation view can be saved for use later on.
See "Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout" on page 528 of the Sending Views to Layout Tutorial.

To save and name a camera
1. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View
2. Select Tools> Edit Active View.

to open the Camera Specification dialog.

l

On the GENERAL panel, type a short, descriptive Name for the camera, like "Kitchen Elevation".

l

On the PLAN DISPLAY panel, notice that the camera is set to display as a callout in plan view, and that its Callout
Label is E1.

l

On the LAYER panel, notice that the camera is located on the "Cameras" layer. This layer controls its display inplan view.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

3. Select File> Close View to close the camera view and return to plan view.
4. Remember to Save

your work.

Saved camera views are listed in the Project Browser using their camera Name.

CREATING SCHEDULES
Several different schedules have been created in previous tutorials. Here, two different types of schedules will be createdusing the same Fixture Schedule tool: one for appliances and one for plumbing fixtures.

To set fixture schedule defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Schedules, select"Fixture Schedule" from the list, and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Fixture Schedule Defaults dialog:lUnder Categories to Include, expand the "Fixture" category and uncheck everything except "Appliances" and"Plumbing".

314

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

Under Columns to Include, remove all of the columns except "Qty", "Description", "Code", "Manufacturer", and"Comments".

l

3. On the LABELS panel, select the Use Label radio button.
4. Click OK and Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be placed in CAD Detail windows.
You can access these views in the Project Browser as well as via the CAD menu.

To create appliance and plumbing fixture schedules
1. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

2. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select "Schedules Detail" and click the Open button.
3. Select Tools> Schedules> Fixture Schedule, then click once in an empty space near the other schedules.

4. If you wish, you can use Extension Snaps to align the Fixture Schedule below, above, or beside the other schedules
created previously. See "To create a room moldings schedule" on page 236 of the Room Moldings Tutorial.
5. Select the schedule and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Fixture ScheduleSpecification dialog:lChange the Main Title to "Kitchen Appliance Schedule".

lUncheck Include Objects from All Floors.

lSelect "Kitchen" from the Include Objects from Room drop-down list.

lUnder Objects to Include, uncheck "Plumbing".

lClick OK.

6. Create a second Fixture Schedule for plumbing fixtures using the steps above:l

Change the Main Title to "Plumbing Fixture Schedule".

l

Add "Room Name" to the list of Columns to Include and move it to the top of the list.

lUnder Objects to Include, uncheck "Appliances".

7. If you want, you can adjust the schedules' column widths so they are aligned. See To edit schedule columns on page60.

An easy way to locate an object listed in a schedule is using the Find in Plan edit tool.

315

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To customize an object’s Description
1. Select Window> Tile Vertically, then click in the plan view to make it the active window.

2. Click on the Apron Front Sink line item in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule to select it, then click the Find in Plan
edit button. The apron front sink will become selected in the plan view window.
3. Notice that its label reports the same information as the Description column in the Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
4. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:l

Notice that the symbol's Name is "Apron Front Sink"l

Notice, too, that "Width" is selected as the Include Size option. This is what produces the [29 1/2W] in its name.

l

Click the drop-down list and select "None" instead.

5. On the OBJECT INFORMATION panel, notice:l%automatic_description% is used as the symbol's Description.

l

Code, Manufacturer, and Comment information can be added, as well, if you wish.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

6. Notice that the sink's automatic label updates to reflect your change.
7. Click on the Schedules Detail view tab and confirm that the sink’s Description in the Plumbing Fixture Schedulealso shows this change.
8. Other fixtures’ Descriptions can be modified, as well, if you wish.
9. When you are finished, close the "Schedules Detail" window and Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONS
Additional annotations for appliances can be added in plan view. Text objects can be used for this purpose as they havebeen in previous tutorials, but so can the appliances’ object labels.
Object labels always use the Text Style assigned to their layer. An easy way to access this and other layer information isusing the Active Layer Display Options side window.

To set the defaults for fixture labels
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options
window:

316. In the Active Layer Display Options side

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

2. Click the Options

button at the bottom left corner of the side window, then:lClick on Columns in the contextual menu that opens.

lClick on Text Style in the submenu to add a check mark.

l

Notice that in the list of layers above, there is now a Text Style column on the right.

3. Type "label" in the Name Filter field to show only layers with this word in their name, and notice that most of them
use the "1/2" Text Style". This allows various types of object labels to have the same, consistent appearance in views
using a particular layer set: here, the "Kitchen and Bath Layer Set".

317

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

4. Select a base cabinet in the drawing and notice that:lNow, only seven layers display: the selected object’s layer, plus six others.

lWhen an object is selected, only the layers that affect that object’s appearance are listed.

5. Now select the refrigerator and notice that only two layer display: the "Fixtures, Interior" and "Fixtures, Labels"
layer.
6. Click on the "Fixtures, Labels" layer to select it, and notice that information about this layer displays and can beedited at the bottom of the side window.

7. Click the Define button to the right of the Text Style drop-down list.
8. In the Saved Text Styles Defaults dialog, which opens next:lNotice that there are a number of different Saved Text Styles set up for particular drawing scales and tasks.

l"1/2" Text Style" is selected in the list because it is assigned to the "Fixtures, Labels" layer.

lWith the "1/2" Scale Text Style" selected, click the Edit button.

9. In the Text Style Defaults dialog, make sure that the box beside Uppercase is checked.

318

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

10. Click OK to close all dialogs.
Currently, the only appliance with a label showing is the dishwasher. This is because it is an inserted fixture that will
essentially replace an actual cabinet at that location. As such, its label displays along with the cabinet labels. The otherappliance labels can be turned on in any of several ways.

To turn on the display of appliance labels
1. Click to add a check mark in the Disp column for the "Fixtures, Labels" layer in the Active Layer Display Options
side window.
2. There are other ways to turn on the display of the "Fixtures, Labels" layer, as well:l

Select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options

to open the Layer Display Options dialog.

lWith the refrigerator or any other fixture selected, click the Object Layer Properties

edit button to open the

Object Layer Properties dialog.
Automatic symbol labels like the Apron Front Sink's report a symbol's Name and optional Include Size information. See To
customize an object’s Description on page 316, above. There are other ways to include size information in an object’s labelthat give you more control over the formatting.

To specify an automatic label
1. Zoomin on the kitchen island.

2. Click the Select Next Object

button, then click on the front of the range symbol visible to the left of the range

hood.
l

l

l

The Architectural Block will become selected rather than the fixture symbol, which you can confirm bychecking the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window.
Click the Select Next Object

edit button to select the range.

When the range is selected, its label can be seen from beneath the hood and the Status Bar will report that an
Interior Fixture is selected.

3. With the flat top range selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the 3D panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, notice that the Name and Include Size selection match theinformation in the range's automatic label.
5. On the LABEL panel:l

Click the Specify Label radio button.

l

The text of the range's Name and Include Size information now populate the label text field.

lDelete this text and instead type: Flat Top Range

319

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

6. Next, click the Insert Macrobutton and:l

In the menu that opens, browse to and select Object Specific> Width.

l

When you click on Width, "%width%" is added to the text field, after "Range".

l

In the preview pane, you can see that the width is formatted with the inch sign ".

l

Add a space after "Range", a W after %width%, and brackets [ ] around "%width% W".

7. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
In some cases, you may want to move or rotate an object label to improve its visibility.

To move and rotate object labels
1. Zoomin further on the flat top range.

2. With the range still selected, notice its edit handles. To the right of the square Move edit handle located at its center,
there is a small square Move Label handle.
3. Drag the Move Label edit handle to the left, past the edge of the range symbol.

4. Now click the Open Object
ledit button. On the Label panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

Under the Plan View Position and Orientation heading, notice that Y Offset value is not 0 like the X Offset is.
This is the result of moving the label using its edit handle.

320

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixturesl

Set this value to as 18" and click OK.

5. Next, Panor Zoom

as needed so the under cabinet microwave can be seen at the top left corner of the

kitchen.
6. Select the microwave and notice that its label can now be seen.
7. Click the Move Label edit handle and drag to the right, past the edge of the countertop.
8. With the microwave symbol still selected:lNotice the small triangular Rotate Label handle located near the Move Label handle.

l

Click and drag the Rotate Label handle so the label is oriented horizontally instead of vertically.

9. Move the label closer to the back wall of the kitchen so it does not interfere with nearby cabinet labels.
10. With the microwave symbol still selected, click the Open Object
11. On the LABEL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog:

321

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and FixtureslNotice the Plan View Position and Orientation settings.

lChange the X Offset, Y Offset, and Angle settings all to 0 and press the Tab key to update the dialog.

l

Notice that the label in the preview pane is returned to its original position in the middle of the symbol.

lClick Cancel.

To suppress an individual label
1. Select the apron sink in the kitchen and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check Suppress Label and click OK.
3. Remember to Save

your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Fixtures.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing fixtures and appliances.
To place built-in appliances

301

To place freestanding appliances

301

To modify an architectural block302

To place an undermount appliance303

To add a drop-in sink304

To create an apron sink base305

To add a Custom Backsplash

306

To place an apron sink307

To place bathroom fixtures

307

To reverse a fixture symbol308

To set the Wall Elevation dimension defaults

310

To create a Wall Elevation view310

To create Auto Elevation Dimensions

311

322

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Appliances and Fixtures

To change the edit handle fill color

311

To move an extension line

311

To delete an extension line

312

To reposition a dimension label313

To set kitchen and bath CAD defaults

313

To add a cross box

313

To save and name a camera

314

To set fixture schedule defaults

314

To create appliance and plumbing fixture schedules

315

To customize an object’s Description

316

To set the defaults for fixture labels

316

To turn on the display of appliance labels

319

To specify an automatic label319

To move and rotate object labels

320

To suppress an individual label322

To save a plan revision

322

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 16 - Appliances and Fixtures
What are the two broad categories of appliance fixtures that describe how they are placed?
lFreestanding appliances can be placed as independent objects.

lBuilt-in cabinets are designed to be inserted into cabinets, either in the front or in the countertop.

How can a cabinet drawer be removed?
l

On the Front/Sides/Back panel of the Base Cabinet Specification dialog, click on the drawer in the preview pane, thenclick the Delete button.

How are apron sink symbols different from drop-in sinks?
lDrop-in and undermount sinks are built-in or inserted objects. Vessel and apron sinks, on the other hand, are standalone objects.

What tool can be used to position one object relative to a point on another object?
l

The Point to Point Move edit tool lets you move an object by clicking on a point on that object, then clicking on adifferent point somewhere else, including on another object.

What setting lets you flip features like opening handles from one side of a fixture to the other?
lOn the General panel of the Fixture Specification dialog, check or uncheck the box beside Reverse Symbol.

What camera tool creates an elevation view of a single room?
l

The Wall Elevation tool creates an elevation view of one wall in the room that the camera is created in.

What tool allows you to create dimensions around the sides of an elevation view?

323

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixturesl

The Auto Elevation Dimensions tool creates dimensions above, below, and on both sides of the model in a crosssection or elevation view.

What are two ways to remove an extension from a dimension line?
lBoth methods use the Move Extension Line edit handle: click and drag this handle to move an extension line to thelocation of another extension line, or click and drag it away from the dimension line entirely.

Where do object labels get their appearance from?
l

Object labels get their appearance from the Text Style that is assigned to their layer. Appliance labels, for example, gettheir Text Style from the "Fixtures, Labels" layer by default.

What are two ways to move or rotate an object label?
l

Object labels have their own Move and Rotate edit handles.

l

You can also specify a label’s position and orientation in its object’s specification dialog, on the Label pane.

Light Fixtures
Lighting is an important practical and aesthetic consideration in any building plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for adding light fixtures to a plan. Concepts introduced include:
File Management324

Productivity Tips

325

Setting the Defaults

325

Using Plan Views

327

Adding Ceiling Lighting

327

Adding Wall Lights

337

Adding Table and Floor Lights

340

Creating Schedules

341

Adding Annotations

342

Creating File Revisions

344

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Appliances
and CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Appliances.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 344.

324

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add lighting to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Center Objectl

The Reflect About Object
Copy/Pasteledit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.
edit tool lets you move one light to the other side of another light; use with theedit tool to create a row of evenly spaced fixtures.

Use the Center Object

edit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.

Contentl

A selection of Lighting catalogs is available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

lCreate template plans that have your custom light fixtures set as the defaults and ready for use when you begin a newplan.

InterfacelDefault Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, an electrical plan.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + L - Library BrowserlSpacebar - Select Objectsl

Tab while moving - Enter CoordinateslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding light fixtures to a plan, there are several defaults that should be set in advance.
When positioning electrical objects, it is a good idea to make sure your Dimension Defaults are set to meet your needs. See
To set the dimension defaults on page 328.
Unlike other drawing tools, the Electrical Tools place symbol objects. You can specify which symbols are placed by thesetools in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Here, the default Light fixtures will be set; however, the defaults for outlets andswitches can also be specified.

325

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside “Electrical” to expand the category.

l

Select “General Electrical” and click the Edit button.

2. In the Electrical Defaults dialog, notice that there is a scrollable list of electrical objects for a variety of different
purposes.
l

Select "Light - Ceiling" and notice that the default symbol is a 4" Recessed can light.

l

Select "Light - Outdoor" and notice that the default symbol is a bollard light.

3. Select "Light - Wall" and click the Library button:l

In the Select Library Object dialog, the content is filtered by Typel

The currently selected library object's Folder

so that it only lists Electrical objects.

, Flush Mounted, is selected as a filter and shown in the

Folders tree list.
lClick on the Flush Mounted Folder

to remove it from use as a filter and in the Search field, type "lighting".

l

In the Filters drop-down list, click on the "Lighting Suites" Folder.

l

The Folders panel tree list now expands to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Lighting> Lighting Suites.

lOpen the Small Cone folder and select the Small Cone Sconce, then click OK.

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
5. Select File> Saveto save these changes.

326

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As noted in the Exterior Walls tutorial, Saved Plan Views have a number of important settings associated with them,including active Layer Set and saved defaults. See "To examine a saved plan view’s settings" on page 7 of the Exterior
Walls Tutorial.
When you know that a particular task will require you to make changes to multiple layers and to create annotations using
different saved defaults, you can save time by opening a Saved Plan View created for that task.

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Electrical Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Electrical Plan View.
4. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, notice that the Active Layer Set Options side window reportsthat the "Electrical Layer Set" is now active, and that:l

Kitchen and Bath text as well as door, window, cabinet labels no longer display.

lFurnishings do not display.

l

The saved section view camera symbol does not display.

5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
6. Right-click on the "Electrical Plan View" in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Electrical", then click Cancel.
An electrical plan can now be drawn and annotated, without affecting the appearance of the kitchen plan or other planviews.

ADDING CEILING LIGHTING
The Light tool will place a different fixture, depending on where you click: when you click on a wall, an interior or exteriorsconce will be placed; when you click in the middle of a room, a ceiling mounted fixture will be placed; if you click outside
a structure, a path light will be created.
Lighting is often described as having three categories: ambient, task, and accent. Ceiling lights provide examples of all
three.
Light fixtures can be placed using the Light tool as well as from the Library.

To add ceiling light fixtures
1. Select Build> Electrical> Light, then click in the Kitchen, between the island and the dishwasher. A recessed

can light, as specified in the Electrical Defaults dialog, is created.

327

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

2. Select View> Library Browser

to open the Library Browser:lBrowse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting> Chandeliers> Pendant Chandeliers.

lSelect the "Bowl Chandelier" and click in the Dining area to place a copy at that location.

lBrowse to the Lighting> Ceiling Mounted> Flush Mount folder, select the "Half Dome" symbol, and click in
the Foyer, near the front door.

lBrowse to the Lighting> Ceiling Mounted> Recessed folder, select the "Recessed Eyeball Light (rotated)" andclick in the Foyer, in line with the door to the Garage.

lBrowse to the Lighting> Pendants folder, select the "Craftsman Lantern", and click an empty space in the
Deck.

Once a room has a can light in it, that light can be positioned and then replicated to produce evenly spaced ambient lights.

To set the dimension defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, click the arrow next to "Dimension" to expand the category, then select"Dimensions" and click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Dimension Defaults dialog that opens next, notice that "Electrical Dimension Defaults" is selected andclick the Edit button.
3. On the SETUP panel of the Dimension Defaults dialog:l

Notice that "Electrical Dimension Defaults" is stated in the title bar.

l

Notice, too, the Reach setting. This value controls how close an eligible object must be in order for adimension line to locate it as it is drawn.

328

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

4. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel, under the Locate Objects heading:l

Under the Cabinets heading, check the box beside Sides.

l

Under the Fixtures/Appliances heading, check the box beside Sides/Corners.

l

Under the Other Objects heading, make sure that Electrical is checked.

lClick OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

Ceiling can lights are often positioned at regular intervals. There are several ways to achieve this.

To position a ceiling light
1. Zoomin on the Kitchen.

2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the recessed can light to select it.

3. Select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimension, then click and drag to draw a vertical dimension line from thefront of the refrigerator to the bottom edge of the island.

lDraw the dimension line on the far right side of the refrigerator so it is more than 24" away from the recessed
can light, leaving it beyond the default Reach distance.

4. Use the dimension line to position the island Architectural Block 3' 6" away from the refrigerator:l

Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the island.

lMove your mouse pointer over the dimension line.

lWhen the arrow changes to a pointing hand, click once.

lType 42" in the inline text field and click OK.

329

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

5. Select the dimension line and add an extension line that locates the recessed can light:lClick and drag the diamond-shaped Add Extension Line edit handle towards the light.

lWhen an extension line to the light displays, release the mouse button.

l

The dimension line now locates the light fixture as well as the two cabinets.

lClick on the can light to select it.

l

If the dimension line is selected instead, click the Select Next Object

edit button or press the Tab key as

needed until the light becomes selected.
l

The type of object currently selected is stated at the bottom left corner of the program window, in the Status Bar.

330

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

6. With the light fixture selected:lClick on one of the dimension labels.

l

In the inline text field, type in a new dimension and press the Enter key.

l

The light will move to the new position that you specified.

l

The space between the island and refrigerator is 3’ 6" wide, so typing 1' 9" will center the light between thetwo.

7. Center the light in the 42" space between the dishwasher and the island cabinets:l

Draw a Manual Dimension

from the dishwasher to the can light.

l

Select the can light, then click on the dimension line.

l

In the inline text field, type 21" and press the Enter key.

8. When you are finished, the dimension lines can be deleted if you wish. See "To delete a dimension line" on page 44of the Interior Walls Tutorial.
There are a number of ways to replicate objects like light fixtures. The best method to use will depend on the specificcircumstances and your needs.

331Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To specify ceiling light spacing
1. Click on the can light to select it, then click the Copy/Paste

edit button.

2. Click and drag the Move edit handle upward and with the mouse button held down, press the Tab key.

3. In the Enter Coordinates dialog, specify End Point Y Position as 40".

4. When you click OK, a copy of the can light is created 40" above the original on-screen.

5. With the new can light still selected, hold down the Shift key and click on the other can light to add it to theselection set. Then:

332

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixturesl

Click the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the Reflect About Object

edit button.

lMove your mouse pointer over the kitchen island Architectural Block and look for a horizontal dashedreflection axis line.

lWhen you see the reflection axis, click once to make a copy of the lights identically spaced on the other side of
the island.

6. Use the Shift key to select all four can lights as a group and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button.

In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:l

Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 1.

lUnder the Move heading, specify the X Delta value as 6’ 6".

lClick OK.

7. With the four newly pasted can lights selected, click on the two middle lights one at a time to remove them from theselection set.

333

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

8. With the top and bottom lights still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button and:l

Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 1.

lSpecify the X Delta value as - 3’ 3". This value is half the distance used previously, and the negative value will
position the copies to the left of the originals rather than to the right.

lClick OK.

9. Remember to Save

your work.

In some spaces, a regularly spaced array of ceiling lights is required.

334

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To create an array of lights
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0.

2. Select Build> Electrical> Light, and place a can light in the lower left corner of the basement.

3. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension, then click and drag to draw dimension lines between the

can light and the two nearest exterior walls.
4. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the can light to select it.

5. Click on each dimension line, and in the inline text field, type 5’ and press the Enter key.

6. With the can light still selected, click the Multiple Copy

335

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

7. Next, click the Multiple Copy Interval

edit button, and in the Multiple Copy Interval dialog:l

For General Objects, specify the Primary Offset as 50".

l

For General Objects, specify the Secondary Offset as 52".

l

Click OK.

8. Move the mouse pointer over the can light, and when the pointer displays the Multiple Copy
drag upward to create a row of evenly-spaced copies.

336

icon, right-click andChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

9. Release the right mouse button, then:lWith no mouse button pressed, drag to the right, across the wider portion of the basement.

lClick once to create an array of lights in the wider portion of the basement.

10. With the top right can light selected:lHold down the Shift key and select the light immediately below it to select it as well.

l

Click the Multiple Copyl

Left-click and drag to the right to create three more pairs of lights.

11. When you are finished, Save

edit button.

your work.

ADDING WALL LIGHTS
Wall lights can also add ambient, task and accent lighting.

337

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To add wall lights
1. Select Build> Electrical> Light, then click in the Kitchen, on the wall over the sink to place a sconce light atthat location.

2. Click on the light to select it and click the Open Object

edit button. In the Electrical Service Specification

dialog, note that the light is the "Small Cone Sconce" specified as the default interior wall light, then click theCancel button.
3. With the Light

tool still active, click in the Deck, to the right of the sliding door.

4. Select this new light and click the Open Object

edit button. Notice that this light is the "Wide Brim Sconce"

specified as the default exterior wall light, then click the Cancel button.
5. In the Library Browser, browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting> Wall Mounted>

Flush Mount.
6. Select the "Prism Sconce", then click in the Bath to place two sconces: one above each side of the vanity.

Once placed, wall lights can be modified. Properties like height are sometimes most easily adjusted in a 3D view.

338Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

To edit wall lights
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click and drag a camera arrow in the Kitchenroom, pointed towards the left vertical wall. Be sure to draw the camera arrow perfectly horizontal.
2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the wall sconce to select it.

3. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog,change the Height to Center to 86" and click OK.
4. With the sconce still selected, center it over the left window:l

Click the Center Object

edit button.

lMove your mouse pointer over the left window.

l

Look for an outline to display around the window and a vertical dashed centering axis to display below it, near
the bottom of the view extents.

lWhen the outline and centering axis can be seen, click once to center the sconce.

339

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

5. Click the Copy/Paste

edit button, then drag the sconce’s Move edit handle to create a copy over the middle

window.
6. Use the Center Object

edit tool to center the new sconce over the middle window.

7. Repeat steps 4 - 6 to create a light centered over the right window as well.

8. The position of the bathroom sconces can be adjusted in the same manner.
9. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
10. Remember to Save

your work.

ADDING TABLE AND FLOOR LIGHTS
A variety of additional light fixtures are available in the Library Browser that are designed to be cabinet-mounted or rest ona table or the floor.
In order to place table and floor lamps, the display of furnishings should be turned on.

To add table and floor lights
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:l

Begin typing "furniture" in the Name Filter field.

lSelect the "Furniture, Interior" layer and click in the Disp. column to add a check mark.

2. In the Library Browser, type "table lamp" in the Search field and click on the Table Lamps Folder

Filters drop-down list.

340

in theChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixturesl

The Folders panel expands to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting>
Lamps> Table Lamps.

lSelect the "Table Lamp", move the mouse pointer into the Bedroom, and click to place a lamp on each of thenight stands.

3. In the Library, search for "floor lamp and select the Floor Lamps Folder

in the Filters drop-down list.

4. Select a "Floor Lamp", and click to place a lamp in the top right corner of the Living room.

CREATING SCHEDULES
In previous tutorials, schedules were created using the Schedule Tools. Another option allows you to quickly create aschedule of objects located in a single room.
Although a typical plan is unlikely to have more than one electrical schedule, it is still a good idea to set up the scheduledefaults the way you want them in your template plans. "To set schedule defaults" on page 105 of the Doors and Windows
Tutorial.

To create a kitchen lighting schedule
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click in an empty space in the Kitchen to select it.

2. Click the Create Schedule from Room

edit button.

3. In the Create Room Schedule dialog, select Electrical and click OK.
4. Click once in the plan view to place a schedule at that location.
5. Select the schedule and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical ScheduleSpecification dialog:lChange the Main Title to "Kitchen Lighting Schedule".

lNotice that "Kitchen 13’-0" x 15’ x 7"" is selected in the Include Objects from Room drop-down list.

341

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixturesl

Under Objects to Include, uncheck Outlets, Switches, and Other so that only Lighting is selected.

lClick OK.

To prevent your plan views from becoming unnecessarily cluttered, schedules should be placed in CAD Detail windows.

To move a schedule to a CAD Detail
1. With the schedule still selected select Edit> Cut
2. Select CAD> CAD Detail Management.

.

3. In the CAD Detail Management dialog, select the "Schedules Detail" and click Open.
4. Select Edit> Paste> Pasteand click once in an empty space to the right of the other schedules to place theelectrical schedule at that location.
5. Select File> Close View to close the Schedule Detail window.
6. When you are finished, Save

your work.

Lights are often included in electrical legends, as well. See "Adding a Legend" on page 356 of the Electrical Objects
Tutorial.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith lighting in place, relevant annotations can be added.
In previous tutorials, the "Kitchen & Bath Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Kitchen and Bath Rich
Text Defaults", and were placed on the "Text, Kitchen & Bath", layer. That layer was turned off, however, when the"Electrical Plan View" was opened. See Light Fixtures on page 324.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing lighting and other electrical objects, another benefit of switching to
the "Electrical Plan View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means thatelectrical annotations will display in the electrical plan but not in other views.

To set the Rich Text defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser
2. Right-click on "Electrical Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit

button to theright of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Electrical Rich Text Defaults" is stated in the dialog box’s title bar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:342

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

Click the Uppercaselbutton.

Notice that the character size is set at 6". This is the same size as used in the Working Plan View and Roof Plan
View, and will produce a capital A that is 1/8" tall when printed. See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of
the Dormers Tutorial.

l

6. On the APPEARANCE panel, note that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Electrical" layer by default when this Saved
Default is active.
7. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
Text macros can be used to insert dynamic information about an object into a text object with a line with arrow that points
to that object.

To use a text macro in rich text annotations
1. Zoomin on the Deck room.

2. Select CAD> Text> Leader Line, then:l

Click on the center of the ceiling light and drag a line to the left. When the line is one or two plan feet in length,
release the mouse button.

l

You can click and drag to draw a second line segment attached to the end of the first line if you wish. See "To set
leader line preferences" on page 107 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.

l

Alternatively, simply click an additional time to draw no additional leader line segments.

lEither way, when you release the mouse button, the Rich Text Specification dialog opens.

3. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lType the following macro into the text field: %description%lClick OK.

4. Instead of displaying the text that you typed, the Rich Text object reports the Description of the light fixture that theleader line is snapped to: in this case, "CRAFTSMAN LANTERN".

5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

Lights and other electrical symbols are often listed in an electrical legend. See Adding a Legend on page 356.

343

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Light Fixtures

You can continue working on this plan in the Electrical Objects tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Lighting.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding lighting to a plan.
To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures326

To switch to a different saved plan view327

To add ceiling light fixtures327

To set the dimension defaults

328

To position a ceiling light329

To specify ceiling light spacing332

To create an array of lights

335

To add wall lights

338

To edit wall lights

339

To add table and floor lights

340

To create a kitchen lighting schedule341

To move a schedule to a CAD Detail342

To set the Rich Text defaults

342

To use a text macro in rich text annotations

343

To save a plan revision

344

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 17 - Light Fixtures
How does the Light tool behave differently depending on where you click?

344

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objectsl

The Light tool will place a different fixture, depending on where you click: when you click on a wall, an interior orexterior sconce will be placed; when you click in the middle of a room, a ceiling mounted fixture will be placed; if you
click outside of a structure, a path light will be created.

What are two ways you can get a dimension line to locate a light fixture?
lDimension lines can be drawn directly from a light fixture to another object.

l

A dimension line can also be drawn between two objects, and then an extension line can be added to the dimension
line, locating the light fixture as well.

What are two edit tools that can be used to create an evenly spaced set of ceiling lights?
l

The Transform/Replicate Object and Multiple Copy edit tools can both be used to create evenly spaced sets of ceilinglights.

What edit tool lets you efficiently create an array or grid of ceiling lights?
l

The Multiple Copy tool lets you create an array of objects like ceiling lights.

What edit tool lets you create a schedule of objects located in a specific room?
l

The Create Schedule from Room edit tool lets you create a schedule of objects that are located in the currently selectedroom.

Electrical Objects
Like lighting, electrical switches and outlets are an important practical consideration. So, too, are data and security items
like jacks and smoke detectors.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for placing electrical, data, and security items. Concepts introduced
include:Productivity Tips

346

Setting the Defaults

346

Using Plan Views

347

Placing Outlets

347

Placing Switches

352

Drawing Electrical Connections

353

Adding Data and Security Items

355

Adding a Legend

356

Creating File Revisions

356

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Light Fixtures tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Lighting and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Lighting.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan
Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.

345. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 356.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add electrical objects to a plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Center Objectl

The Reflect About Object
Copy/Pasteledit tool to center a light fixture relative to a window, cabinet, or other object.
edit tool lets you move one outlet to the other side of another outlet; use with theedit tool to create a row of evenly spaced outlets.

Make a dimension line locate an additional object by adding an extension line to it.

Contentl

A selection of special outlets, switches, and data and security items is available in the Core Catalogs of the Library
Browser.

lCreate template plans that have your preferred switches and outlets set as the defaults and ready for use when you
begin a new plan.

InterfacelWall mounted items like outlets and switches are often best edited in camera views.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + L - Library BrowserlSpacebar - Select Objectsl

Tab while moving - Enter CoordinateslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding electrical objects to a plan, it is a good idea to set your Electrical Defaults in advance.
Unlike other drawing tools, Electrical Tools place symbols from the Library. You can specify which symbols are placed bythese tools in the Electrical Defaults dialog. See "To set the Electrical Defaults for light fixtures" on page 326 of the Light
Fixtures Tutorial.
An electrical layout is an example of a plan view that requires its own set of annotations and layer settings. See To switch toa different saved plan view on page 327.

346

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Electrical Plan View will work well for adding electrical and data items, as it did when adding lighting in the Light
Fixtures tutorial. See "To switch to a different saved plan view" on page 327 of the Light Fixtures Tutorial.

PLACING OUTLETS
Electrical Outlets can be placed using the 110V, GFCI, and 220V Outlet tools, as well as from the Library. The type ofoutlet symbol that is created by the Outlet tools depends on the location where it is placed.

To place wall and floor outlets
1. Zoomin on the Kitchen.

2. Select Build> Electrical> 110V Outlet, then click along the wall at the back of the refrigerator to place a 110V

outlet at that location.
3. Place another 110V Outlet to the left of the sliding door to the Deck.
4. Place a third in the Deck room, also to the left of the sliding door.
lNote that its symbol includes the letters WP, which stands for "weatherproof".

lThis outlet is currently offset from the wall because it is attached to the stone layer of the lower exterior ponywall. This will be addressed in a moment.

5. Move the mouse pointer an empty space in the Kitchen and notice that the object preview outline has a squarearound it, indicating that a floor outlet will be placed at that location if you click.

6. Click the Select Objectslbutton, then click on one of the 110 Volt outlets to select it.

If you select a different object like a wall, cabinet, or fixture instead, click the Select Next Object

edit

button until the outlet becomes selected.
l

You can see what kind of object is currently selected on the left side of the Status Bar.

lWith the outlet selected, click the Open Object

edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical

Service Specification dialog, notice that the Height to Center is 11 1/2" and click Cancel.

347

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To recess a wall-mounted electrical object
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click in the Deck room and drag a camera arrow

downward, towards the main house.
2. Zoomin on outlet to the right of the siding door.

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the outlet to select it.

4. Click the Open Object

edit button and on the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Service Specification dialog,change the Distance from Wall value to -4", then click OK.

5. Click the Select Objects

button once more to deselect the outlet and notice that it is no longer visible because itis embedded 4" into the wall.
6. Select Build> Wall> Wall Material Region, then and drag to draw a rectangular region around the area where

the outlet is located.
7. When you release the mouse button and the region is created, the outlet becomes visible.
8. Select the Wall Material Region and click the Open Object
Service Specification dialog:

348

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the ElectricalChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objectsl

Notice that Cut Finish Layers of Parent is checked.

lThis explains why the front of the outlet became visible when the region was created: all of the wall's exterior
layers do not generate within the region's area.

l

Click the Cancel button.

9. With the Wall Material Region still selected, use its edit handles to resize it so it matches the size and shape of theoutlet.
10. When you are finished, close the Wall Elevation view and notice that the waterproof outlet on the Deck is nowaligned with the wall in plan view.

To place an outlet above the countertop
1. Select Build> Electrical> GFCI Outlet,

2. Click along the left vertical wall of the Kitchen, under a window, to place a GFCI outlet at that location.

3. Click on the outlet to select it and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical

Service Specification dialog:l

Notice that the Height to Center is 43" rather than 11".

lThis is because this outlet was placed using an Outlet tool at a location where a countertop is present.

lBecause this outlet should be under the window, change the Height to Center is 39", then click OK.

To rotate a wall-mounted electrical symbol
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Wall Elevation, then click between the kitchen island and the cabinets

to the left, and drag a camera arrow to the left.
2. In the Wall Elevation view, Zoom
3. Click the Select Objects

in on the outlet.

button, then click on the outlet to select it and rotate it so that it is oriented horizontallyinstead of vertically:

349

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical ObjectslMove your mouse pointer over the triangular Rotate edit handle.

l

Click and drag in a circular motion until the cabinet has rotated 90°, then release the mouse button.

4. A Question message will ask if you want to regenerate the outlet’s 2D plan view symbol.
l

Be sure to click No to continue using the standard symbol for 110V outlets.

l

If you click Yes, the standard CAD symbol for 110V outlets will be replaced by a thin rectangle representing
the outlet’s shape, as viewed looking straight down on it.

To lay out kitchen counter outlets
1. With the outlet still selected, click the Center Object

edit button.

2. Move the mouse pointer over the apron sink base, and when a vertical centering axis displays, click once to center
the outlet under the window.
3. Click the outlet’s square Move edit handle and drag to the right, and with the mouse button held down, press the Tab
key.
4. In the Enter Coordinates dialog:l

Make sure Relative to Start is selected.

lSpecify the End Point X Position as 72" and make sure the End Point Y Position is 0".

350

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical ObjectslClick OK.

5. With the outlet still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Objects

edit button.

6. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, which opens next:l

Check the box beside Copy and set the Number of Copies to be 3.

l

The box beside Move should be checked. If there is not, click to add a check mark.

l

In the Y Delta field, type -48".

l

Make sure that Relative to Itself is checked and click OK.

7. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.
8. Copy and paste one more GFCI outlets on the horizontal wall, to the left of the refrigerator:l

Select one of the existing GFCI outlets.

l

Click the Copy/Pastel

Click once along the horizontal wall to place a final GFCI outlet.

edit button.

To add outlets from the library
1. If it is not already open, select View> Library Browser.

2. In the Library Search field, type "outlets" and select the "Outlets" Folderline item in the Filters drop-down list.

3. The Folders panel will expand to show the contents of Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical,
Plumbing> Electrical> Outlets.
4. Browse to Floor Mounted> 220V and select the 220V Receptacle symbol.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the kitchen island click once to place a 220 volt floor outlet for the range.
6. Next, browse to Outlets> Surface Mounted> Appliances and place a wall-mounted Garbage Disposal outlet behindthe sink base
7. Place a wall-mounted Garbage Disposal outlet behind the sink base.

351

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

PLACING SWITCHES
With lights and outlets in place, electrical switches to control them are needed. Switches can be placed using the Switch tool
as well as by selecting symbols from the Library Browser.

To place switches
1. Select Build> Electrical> Switch, then click on the back horizontal wall, to the right of the sliding door to the

Deck to place a switch at that location.
2. Place a second switch to the right of the doorway into the Dining room.
3. Select View> Library Browser, then browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical,

Plumbing> Electrical> Switches.
4. Select the "Air Switch - Countertop" symbol, then on the countertop near the sink to place an air switch for the
garbage disposal at that location.

352

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

Multiple single switches can be positioned side-by-side to form multi-gang switches. Multi-gang outlets can also be createdusing this technique.

To create multi-gang switches
1. Zoomin on the switch located near the sliding door to the Deck.

2. Use the Switch

tool to place two more switches to the right of the existing switch.

3. Adjust the switches' positions using either their edit handles or the Arrow keys on the keyboard so they are spaced
the way you want them.

4. Place a second switch to the right of the doorway to the Dining room as well.
5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

DRAWING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONSWith lights, outlets, and switches in place, wiring connections can be drawn.

353

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To draw electrical connections
1. Select Build> Electrical> Electrical Connection, then click on the switch that is closest to the sliding door to

the Deck.
2. Hold the mouse button down, drag a line to the exterior wall light on the Deck, and release the mouse button tocreate an Electrical Connection spline.
3. Draw a second spline between the wall light and the Deck ceiling light.

To create three way connections
1. Use the Electrical Connection

tool to draw an Electrical Connection spline between the middle switch to theright of the sliding door and the top right can light in the Kitchen.
2. Draw another spline between the top right can light and the light located below it.

3. Continue drawing splines to connect the four lights on the right side of the Kitchen.

354

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

4. Draw a final spline from the bottom right can light to a switch located to the right of the doorway to the Diningroom.

5. Notice that when the circuit has switches on each end, they automatically become 3 Way switches.

6. When you are finished, be sure to Save

your work.

Once drawn, Electrical Connection splines can be selected and edited like other spline-based objects.

ADDING DATA AND SECURITY ITEMS
A selection of data and security objects is available in the Library.

355

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

To add data and security symbols
1. Select View> Library Browser

to open the Library Browser side window.

2. Browse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing> Electrical.
3. Notice that there is a selection of Detectors and Alarms, Jacks, and other Special Symbols.
4. Select any of these symbols to place them in your plan.
5. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

ADDING A LEGENDAn electrical legend can be created using an Electrical Schedule.

To create an electrical legend
1. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser, then:l

Click the arrow next to CAD Details to expand the category.

l

Right-click on "Legends and Notes" and select Open View from the contextual menu.

l

You can also open CAD Detail windows by selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management

2. Select Tools> Schedules> Electrical Schedule.

, then click in an empty space near the Wall Legend to place anElectrical Schedule.
3. Select the new schedule and click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Electrical Schedule Specification dialog:lClick in the Main Title text field and rename the schedule "Electrical Legend".

l

Make sure both Scale Images and Use Plan View Scale are checked.

5. Remember to Save

your work.

You can continue working on this plan in the Floor Framing tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.

356

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Electrical Objects

3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Electrical.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for placing electrical outlets and switches.
To save a plan revision

356

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 18 - Electrical Objects
How does the Outlet tool behave differently depending on where you click?
l

The Outlet tool will place a different outlet type, depending on where you click:oClick on a wall in an interior room to place a standard 110V outlet.

oClick on a wall in an exterior room or on the building’s exterior to place a weatherproof outlet.

oClick in the middle of a room to place a floor mounted outlet.

How do you create multi-gang Switches?
lMultiple single switches can be positioned side-by-side to form multi-gang switches. Multi-gang outlet can also becreated using this technique.

What tool can be used to connect Switches to Lights and Outlets?
l

The Connect Electrical tool can be used to draw splines connecting switches to lights and outlet.

Where can you specify whether an outlet is floor or ceiling mounted?
lWhere an outlet mounts is specified on the Options panel of its Electrical Service Specification dialog.

What setting allows or prevents a symbol’s CAD block from being replaced when the symbol is resized or rotated?
l

The Auto Generate Block options on the 2D Block panel of the Symbol Object Specification dialogs control whether
or not a symbol’s CAD block gets replaced.

What dialog lists all of the CAD blocks referenced by the current plan?
l

The CAD Block Management dialog lists all of the CAD blocks referenced by the current plan.

What edit tool lets you make changes to the individual components objects in a CAD block?
l

The Explode CAD Block edit tool breaks a CAD block into its individual components so they can be edited.

357

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Framing Tutorials

Framing Tutorials

Chapter 5

The Framing Tutorials describe best practices for generating and editing framing in Chief Architect Premier:

TOPICS
Floor Framing
Wall Framing
Roof and Ceiling Framing

359
377
393

358

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

Floor Framing
Floor platforms are framed using joists and beams, often using a combination of automatic and manually edited framing.
Lowered ceilings can be added under floor platforms, as well.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating floor and ceiling framing. Concepts introduced
include:File Management359

Productivity Tips

359

Setting the Defaults

360

Using Plan Views

361

Generating Floor and Lowered Ceiling Framing

361

Using Bearing Walls

364

Adding Posts and Beams

366

Editing Floor and Ceiling Framing

371

Adding Annotations

374

Creating File Revisions

376

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Electrical Objects tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Electrical and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Electrical.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create floor and ceiling framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker

at the point where you would like the framing

layout to be measured from.
l

Most framing plans are a combination of manually drawn and automatically generated framing objects.

359

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

ContentlCreate template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

InterfacelWhen drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps. Object Snaps, however, shouldbe left on.
lDefault Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, framing plans.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding floor and ceiling framing to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also affect the heights of floor andceiling platforms.
Floor Defaults also include the default Ceiling Heights and Floor and Ceiling Platform Thicknesses.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, as well.
Deck framing automatically generates separate from interior floor framing using settings from the Deck Room Defaults
dialog.
The default floor framing structures were set in the Exterior Walls tutorial; however, additional floor framing defaults canalso be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.
Snap settings play an important role when framing objects are drawn and edited. It is usually helpful to toggle Grid Snaps
off. Object Snaps, however, should be toggled on.

To set the Snap Settings
1. Begin by turning off Grid Snaps: select Edit> Snap Settings> and notice whether there is a small check mark in theicon to the left of Grid Snaps.
l

If there is a check mark, Grid Snaps are currently toggled on. To turn them off, click on Grid Snaps
submenu.

l

If there is no check mark, Grid Snaps are already toggled off.

2. Make sure that Object Snaps are turned on: select Edit> Snap Settings> Object Snaps

360.

in theChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Several different Saved Plan Views have been used in previous tutorials. Framing is another example of a drawing task thatis made easier and more efficient by using a Saved Plan View created for that purpose.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the twoviews’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View.
A more efficient way to switch between Saved Plan Views is using the Saved Plan View Control drop-down in the
toolbars.

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Framing, Floor Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Framing, Floor Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. Note that the Active Layer Set Options

side window reports that the "Framing, Floor Layer Set" is now active, and that:lCabinets, fixtures, and electrical objects no longer display.

l

Room Labels do not display.

l

Doors and window openings now display only header lines using a dashed line style and do not include casingor sills.

5. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser. Next:l

Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.

l

Right-click on the "Framing, Floor Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

6. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Framing" and end with "Floor", then click Cancel.
The settings in the "Framing, Floor Plan View" are typical of floor framing drawings and will make working on floor
framing easier.

GENERATING FLOOR AND LOWERED CEILING FRAMING
The floor framing for a given floor level is always generated or manually drawn on the floor level below.
The default floor framing structures were set in the Exterior Walls tutorial; however, additional floor framing defaults canalso be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.

361

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To set the default joist width
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog.

lClick the arrow beside “Framing” to expand the category.

l

Select "General Framing" and click the Edit button.

2. On the FOUNDATION panel of the Framing Defaults dialog, under the "Subfloor for Floor 1" heading:l

Notice that the Floor Structure is 12" in depth, as set in the Exterior Walls tutorial.

l

Make sure the Spacing is set to 16".

lSpecify the Width of the joists as 1 1/2".

3. Repeat step #2 on the 1ST and 2nd panels, as well.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.
Before generating framing, it is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker to specify the point where the framing
layout is measured from.

To place a Framing Reference Marker
1. Go to Floor 1 and Zoom

in on the lower left corner of the structure.

2. Select Build> Framing> Framing Reference Marker
3. When an Endpoint

and move the mouse pointer over the wall intersection.

Snap Indicator displays at the outside corner of the wall framing, click once to place a

Framing Reference Marker at that location.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

The Framing, Floor Plan View is set up specifically to show floor framing. For the purposes of exploring how floor andlowered ceiling framing work, both types of joists need to display. One solution is to create a custom layer set.

362

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To create and use a custom Layer Set
1. If it is not already open, select View>Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:l

Note that "Framing, Floor Layer Set" is selected at the top of the window.

l

Click the Copy Set button.

2. In the New Layer Set dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for the new Layer Set, such as "Framing Set - Working"and click OK.

3. Notice that "Framing Set - Working" is now the selected layer set.
4. Turn on the "Framing, Ceiling Joists" layer.
The "Framing Set - Working" can now be changed as needed while editing framing objects, while the original "Framing,
Floor Layer Set" will be ready for use when it is time to create framing plans for printing.

To generate floor and ceiling framing
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0 and select Window> Fill Window

2. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing.

3. In the Build Framing dialog:

363.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framingl

You can choose which categories of framing to generate, as well as specify whether they automatically rebuildwhen changes are made to the model.

l

Under the Automatically Rebuild Framing option, check the boxes beside Floors and Ceilings.

lClick OK.
Note: When floor or ceiling framing is set to generate
automatically in the Build Framing dialog, it will do so
automatically for all floors, and will rebuild any time changes are
made to the model that affect floor or ceiling platforms.

There are several ways to change the direction of floor and ceiling joists. The Joist Direction Line tool is one of them,although it is typically only useful in situations where joists can span in either direction and still be structurally sound.

To use a Joist Direction Line
1. Select Build> Framing> Joist Direction.

2. Click inside the basement room and drag to draw a horizontal line.
3. When you release the mouse button, notice that the floor and ceiling joists rebuild to follow the same direction as the
Joist Direction Line.

4. Select the Joist Direction Line and use its Rotate handle to rotate it 90°. With Auto Rebuild Floor and Ceiling
Framing checked, both the floor and ceiling joists rebuild vertically to follow the Joist Direction Line.
5. Select the Joist Direction Line and Delete

it. Notice that both floor and lowered ceiling joists change back totheir original directions.
6. Select Edit> Undo

to restore the vertical Joist Direction Line.

7. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing

and clear the check box next to Automatically Build Framing, which

will prevent all categories of framing from automatically rebuilding, then click OK.
8. Delete

the Joist Direction Line and notice that this time, none of the joists are modified.

9. When you are finished, Save

your work.

USING BEARING WALLS
Another way to control joist direction is by specifying key walls as Bearing Walls that floor and ceiling joists can bear on.
This is the recommended method in most situations because it affects the structure by allowing shorter joist spans.

364

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To specify an interior bearing wall
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the wall to the left of the staircase to select it.

l

If a different object is selected instead, click the Select Next Objectl

The type of object selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button.

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:l

Check the box beside Foundation Wall.

l

Notice that a footing is added under the wall in its dialog preview.

3. On the STRUCTURE panel, check the box beside Bearing Wall and click OK.
Because Auto Rebuild Floor and Ceiling Framing has been turned off, the program must be directed to rebuild the floor
joists.

To rebuild floor framing for a single floor level
1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing.

2. In the Build Framing dialog:lUnder the Build Framing Once option, check the box beside Floors.

lSelect "Floor 1" from the drop-down list to only rebuild the floor joists for that floor level.

lClick OK.

3. Notice that the floor joists change direction, running horizontally and bearing on the Bearing Wall created above,
while the lowered ceiling framing is unchanged.

365

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING POSTS AND BEAMS
One other way to modify the structure and produce shorter joist spans is by adding beams that floor and ceiling joists canbear on.

To set the post and beam defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog, select "Framing" in the list and click the Edit

button.
2. On the BEAMS panel of the Framing Defaults dialog:lClick the radio button beside With Joists.

l

Click the Edit Floor Beam Defaults button. Note that the default beams are Lumber measuring 12" x 3 1/2",
then click OK.

3. On the POSTS panel:l

Click the radio button beside Square.

lNotice that you can specify the defaults for Post Footings created using the Post with Footing tool.

l

Click the Edit Post Defaults button. Note that the default posts are set as Lumber measuring 3 1/2" x 3 1/2",
then click OK.

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.
It is easier to place posts and draw beams when no joists are present in the view. When placing posts in walls, displaying
wall layers is also helpful. An easy way to achieve both is to switch to the "Working Layer Set".

366

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To add a post
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options

and then:lSelect "Working Layer Set" from the Layer Sets drop-down list.

lNotice that the display of framing is turned off while the display of wall layers is turned on.

2. Zoomin on the top end of the interior wall next to the stairwell.

3. Select Build> Framing> Post with Footing, then move the mouse pointer over the end of the wall and click

once to place a post inside the wall’s framing layer.

4. A message will ask whether you want to turn on the "Framing, Posts" layer. Click the Yes button.
5. Place a second Post with Footing in the corner of the wall furring at the top left corner of the Garage area.

With the posts in place, beams can be drawn. When With Joists is specified in the Framing Defaults dialog, Floor/Ceiling
Beams will draw with the same top height as joists.

367

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To draw a beam at joist level
1. Zoomin on the post located at top end of the wall next to the staircase.

2. Select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam, then:lMove the mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the post.

lWhen the MidpointlDrag upward to draw a floor beam.

3. Zoomsnap indicator displays, click the mouse button.

out as needed so the back wall of the basement can be seen.
If you zoom out using the mouse scroll wheel, the beam willremain selected.

4. Extend the floor beam upward until it reaches the outside surface of the back basement wall’s furring layer.
5. You can add a Post with Footing

to support this end of the beam, as well.

6. Select the beam and click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification(Floor Beam) dialog:

368

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor FraminglNotice that the Top Height is -3/4", which puts it directly underneath the subfloor on Floor 1, even with thetops of the joists.

l

Click Cancel.

To create a beam that runs under the floor joists, you can either change the default Placement setting for beams to Under
Joists, or you can draw a beam and then edit its height.

To position a beam below floor joists
1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beamfrom the post located near the Garage to the back basement wall, as describedabove.
2. Add a Post with Footing

at the top end of the beam.

3. Select the beam and click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Floor Beam) dialog:l

The Top Height is -3/4", which puts it directly underneath the subfloor on Floor 1, even with the tops of thejoists.

l

Check the box beside Raise/Lower, and in the field to the right, type -11 7/8", which is the depth of the floor
joists.

5. Click the Apply button and:l

Notice that the Top and Bottom Height values adjust to this change.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply the change in height to the beam.

6. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, select "Framing Set - Working" as the active layer set again.

369

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

7. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing, and in the Build Framing dialog:lUnder the Build Framing Once option, check the box beside Floors.

lSelect "Floor 1" from the drop-down list to only rebuild the floor joists for that floor level.

lClick OK.

8. Notice:l

The joists butt against the beam on the left.

l

The joists lap over the beam on the right.

l

To make this easier to see, you can temporarily turn off the "Soffits" and "Framing, Ceiling Joists" layers.

9. The difference can also be seen in a Back Clipped Cross Section view. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View>
Back Clipped Cross Section, then click and drag a short camera arrow in the basement area. Be sure to draw
the camera arrow straight up on-screen.

370

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

10. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
You can also create joists that pass over a beam without breaking.

To prevent joists from breaking over a beam
1. Select the beam on the right and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Floor Beam) dialog, uncheck Bearing Beam and click OK.
3. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing, and build Floor framing for Floor 1, as described above.

4. The joists now run across the top of the beam on the right without interruption.
5. Remember to Save

your work.

EDITING FLOOR AND CEILING FRAMING
Once floor and ceiling framing have been generated, it can be modified. Floor and ceiling framing can be moved and resizedusing their edit handles, edit tools, and specification dialogs.
The lowered ceiling framing in Chic Cottage is for sound-proofing only, so it does not need to extend over the exterior
concrete walls like the structural floor platform does.

To move joists
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options
window:lFirst, make sure that the "Framing Set - Working" layer set is in use.

lTurn off the display of the "Framing, Floor Joists" layer.

lTurn off the "Footings" layer.

lTurn on the "Walls, Layers".

lTurn off the "Walls, Main Layer Only"l

Lock the "Walls, Foundation" layer.

371. In the Active Layer Display Options side

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

2. Zoomin on the bottom left corner of the basement.

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the horizontal ceiling joist located over air gap in the basement

wall assembly.

l

If a different object is selected instead, click the Select Next Object

edit button.

lWhen the joist is selected, it will display the grey Selection Fill color, which you can customize on the Colors
panel of the Preferences dialog.

l

The type of object selected is also stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

4. Click the joist’s Moveedit handle and drag upwards until its bottom edge aligns with the outside edge of thebasement wall’s furring layer.
5. As you drag upwards, notice that the vertical joists display the Selection Fill color and are bumped upwards by theselected joist.

6. Zoomin on the top left corner of the basement. Notice:l

The vertical joists extend through the exterior wall's air gap to the edge of the concrete layer.

l

The horizontal ceiling joist positioned at their ends was also pushed and is now located in the concrete layer.

7. Select Edit>Snap Settings>Bumping/Pushingto turn off the bumping and pushing behavior.

372

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

8. Select the horizontal joist and drag its Moveedit handle downward until its top edge aligns with the outside edgeof the basement wall’s furring layer.
9. Notice that now, the vertical ceiling joists do not get pushed and extend through the horizontal joist after it is moved.
10. Select Edit>Snap Settings>Bumping/Pushingto turn the bumping and pushing behavior on again.

To trim joists
1. With the horizontal ceiling joist still selected:lClick the Trim Object(s)lClick the Sticky Modeedit button.
edit button.

2. Move your mouse pointer just below the select joist, between the ends of the vertical ceiling joists that extend overthe concrete wall.
3. Click and drag a temporary cutting line through one or more of the vertical ceiling joists' ends.

4. When you release the mouse button, the vertical joists are trimmed to the top edge of the selected horizontal ceilingjoist.

5. Continue clicking and dragging to trim all of the vertical joists that extend over the selected horizontal joist.

373

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

To delete a joist
1. Select the vertical lowered ceiling joist located over the left basement wall.
2. Click the Delete

edit button or press the Delete key.

3. Once you are done editing floor and ceiling framing, open the Active Layer Display Options side window and switch
back to the Framing, Floor Layer Set.
4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith the floor framing in place, some framing annotations can be added.
In the Light Fixtures and Electrical Objects Tutorials, the "Electrical Plan View" was active, annotations were added using"Electrical Rich Text Defaults", and were placed on the "Text, Electrical" layer. That layer was turned off, however, whenthe "Framing, Floor Plan View" was opened.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for generating, editing, and displaying floor framing, another benefit ofswitching to the "Framing, Floor Plan View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer.
This means that floor framing annotations will display in the floor framing plan but not in other views.

To set the rich text defaults
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Right-click on "Framing, Floor Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
3. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Saved Plan View Specification dialog, click the Edit

button to theright of Rich Text to open the Rich Text Defaults dialog.
4. In the Rich Text Defaults dialog, notice that "Framing Rich Text Defaults, Floor" is stated in the dialog box’s titlebar.
5. On the RICH TEXT panel:l

Click the UppercaselClick the Align Centerlbutton.
button.

Notice that the character size is set at 6". This is the same size as used in the Working, Roof, and Electrical
Plan Views and will produce a capital A that is 1/8" tall when printed.

374

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

6. On the APPEARANCE panel:lNote that Rich Text is placed on the "Text, Framing - Floor" Layer by default when this Saved Default is
active.

l

Check the box beside Border to produce a border around Rich Text objects when "Framing Rich Text
Defaults, Floor" is active and notice that the border’s default Color, Line Style, and Line Weight can be
specified.

7. Also on the APPEARANCE panel, increase the Margins to 6".
8. Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To add rich text annotations
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the view, near the front left corner of the drawing on Floor 0.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lConfirm that Uppercase is active.

l

In the text field, type the following: all floor joists are u.n.o.:lPress the Enter key and note that the text wraps to a second line.

lType: 2x12s SPF #2 or better @16" O.C.

3. Use your mouse to highlight the first line of text, then click the Underline

button to apply that attribute to theselection.
4. Use your mouse to highlight just the letter x in 2x12, then click the Uppercase
from the selection.
5. Select the letter s after 2x12 and remove its Uppercase

375

attribute as well.

button to remove that attribute

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Floor Framing

6. Click OK to close the dialog and create a Rich Text object with a border.

7. Select the newly created Rich Text object and click the Copy/Paste

edit button.

8. Click once near the deck joists at the back of the drawing to create a copy of the text at that location.
9. With the newly pasted text selected, modify its text:lClick the Open Objectl

On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, replace the word "floor" with "deck".

lReplace the number "12" with "10", then click OK.

10. Remember to Save

edit button.

your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Floor Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating and editing floor and lowered ceiling framing.

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 19 - Floor Framing
What does a Framing Reference Marker do?

376

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framingl

A Framing Reference Marker specifies the point where framing layout is measured from. Before generating framing, it
is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker.

When working on framing, what is helpful about switching to the Framing, Floor Plan View?
l

The Framing Layer Set becomes active, so unnecessary objects like wall layers and cabinets no longer display.

l

Most of the Active Defaults’ names begin with the word "Framing", which means that they are set up for use
specifically in framing plans and will create objects on layers that only display when the Framing Layer Set is active.

How does the presence of soffits against the ceiling affect lowered ceiling framing?
l

The ceiling finish layers, including lowered ceiling framing, do not generate anywhere a soffit touches the ceilingsurface.

What determines the direction of automatically generated joists?
l

By default, floor and ceiling joists will generate in whatever direction results in the shortest spans. The Joist Direction
Line tool can be used to specify joist direction regardless of span. Interior bearing walls and bearing beams can change
the direction of shortest span.

What effect does an interior bearing wall have on the floor framing in Chic Cottage?
l

The interior bearing wall on Floor 0 causes the floor joists to change direction and bear on that wall instead of thehorizontal exterior walls. Lowered ceiling framing is not affected.

What is the difference between the two floor beams drawn in Chic Cottage?
l

One beam is drawn at the same height as the floor joists and one is drawn lower, so the joists bear directly on top of it.

What edit tool can be used to adjust the lengths of multiple joists?
l

The Trim Objects edit tool allows you to trim framing members to the edge of a selected object.

Wall Framing
Wall framing is typically generated automatically, and can be edited in a Wall Detail view.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating wall framing. Concepts introduced include:

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Floor Framing tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Floor Framing and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Floor Framing.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

377

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create wall framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker

at the point where you would like the framing

layout to be measured from.
lWall framing can often be edited most effectively in a Wall Detail view.

ContentlCreate template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

InterfacelWall Details and other saved views are listed in and can be opened from the Project Browser side window.

lWhen drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps. Object Snaps, however, shouldbe left on.
lDefault Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, framing plans.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select Objectsl‘ - Layer Display OptionslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding wall framing to a plan, there are a number of defaults of particular importance.
Many of the defaults associated with wall framing are set in the Wall Type Definitions assigned to the walls in the plan.
Settings in the Floor Defaults dialogs that affect the overall height of a structure will also naturally affect wall heights.
The structure of individual rooms can be customized, and may also affect wall heights.
The defaults for wall top and bottom plates, headers, and more can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.
Door and window rough openings, headers, and more are specified in their respective defaults dialogs, and can becustomized in their individual specification dialogs.
Before generating framing, it is a good idea to place a Framing Reference Marker to specify the point where the framing
layout is measured from.
When working with framing objects, it is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps
toggled on.

378

off. Object Snaps, however, should beChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Wall framing is not typically shown in most plan views in construction documents; however, it can be useful to see and edit
it in plan view while working on a design. For this purpose, switch to the Working Plan View, then select "Framing Set Working" as the active layer set in the Active Layer Display Options side window.

GENERATING WALL FRAMING
Wall framing is always generated automatically using the Build Framing dialog.

To generate wall framing
1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing.

2. In the Build Framing dialog, under the Build Framing Once heading, check the box next to Walls and click OK.
3. In plan view, only wall studs and headers will display, regardless of which layers are turned on.
4. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 1 and notice that door and window headers receive automatic labels describing theirsize and number.
5. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Framing Overview
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View and Saveto see the plates and sills.

your work.

EDITING WALL FRAMING
Once generated, wall framing can be edited to produce a variety of configurations.
Because wall framing is generated inside walls, it is helpful to modify some layer settings before trying to select and edit it.

To modify layer settings
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options.

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window:lTurn off the display of the "Framing, Ceiling Joists" and "Framing, Rim Joists" layers.

l

Lock the "Walls, Railings" layer.

379

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To edit wall studs
1. Still on Floor 1, Zoom

in on the lower left corner of the Porch.

2. Click on the vertical corner wall stud positioned above the horizontal stud and use its Moveedit handle to moveit upward, out of the corner.

3. Select the horizontal corner wall stud and click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button. In theTransform/Replicate Object dialog:l

Check the box beside Copy and specify the Number of Copies as 3.

lConfirm that the box beside Move is checked and specify the Y Delta value as 1 1/2".

lClick OK to create a total of 4 horizontal corner studs.

4. Select the vertical corner stud that was moved in step 2 and click the Open Object

380

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Wall Framing) dialog:lSpecify the Width as 3 1/2".

lMake sure that Flat to Inside is selected.

lClick OK.

6. With the vertical stud still selected, click the Point to Point Moveledit button, then:Move the mouse pointer over the stud’s lower right corner. When the Endpoint

Snap Indicator displays,

click once.
lMove the mouse pointer over the top right corner of the top horizontal corner stud. When the Endpoint
Snap Indicator displays, click once.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

SPECIFYING STUD SPACING
By default, stud spacing is set in the properties of the material assigned to each wall type’s framing layer. Although like all
defaults, it is best to set this up as early as possible, you can change a wall type’s stud spacing after wall framing is built.
Although not a common requirement, it is possible to specify stud thickness and spacing for all walls in throughout a plan.

To specify stud spacing by wall type
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0.

2. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall Types.

381

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. In the Wall Type Definitions dialog:lSelect the "8" Concrete with Furring" wall type from the drop-down list at the top left corner of the dialog.

lClick on Layer 3 to select it.

l

On the Material Properties panel, note that the structure Type is "Framing" and the Spacing is 16" On Center.

4. Change the Spacing to 24" On Center.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change to this wall type.
6. Be sure to Save

your work when you are done.

Notice that the framing in the basement walls does not change. In order for it to update, it will have to be regenerated.

REGENERATING WALL FRAMING
In order for changes to a setting like stud spacing to affect framing, the framing needs to be rebuilt. There are three waysthat this can be accomplished:l

Set wall framing to build automatically in the Build Framing dialog.

l

Check the box beside Wall under Build Framing Once in the Build Framing dialog.

l

Use the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit tool.

When wall framing is generated using the Build Framing dialog, wall framing is generated plan-wide. This means thatmanually edited wall framing will be deleted and replaced unless precautions are taken.

To regenerate all wall framing
1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing, check the box beside Wall under Build Framing Once in the Build

Framing dialog, and click OK.
2. Notice that:l

The spacing of the basement wall framing increases.

l

Although the "Walls, Foundation" layer is currently locked, it is still possible to make changes to these walls. If
objects are on a locked layer, it only means that they cannot be selected.

3. Go Up One Floor
4. Zoomto Floor 1.

in on the Porch and notice that the customized wall corner framing has been replaced.

5. Select Edit> Undo

to undo the previous action and restore the wall corner framing.

To rebuild framing in selected walls
1. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0 and notice that the basement wall framing is spaced at 16" on center again.

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, unlock the "Walls, Foundation" layer.

382

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the basement walls as a group:l

Click on one of the basement walls to select it.

lHold down the Shift key and click on the other walls that define the basement area to add them to the selection
set.

4. When all six of the basement walls are selected, click the Build Framing for Selected Object(s)edit button.

Wall framing should only be edited when you are confident that you will not need to regenerate wall framing throughout theplan. To avoid losing your work, though, you can specify that a wall’s framing not be rebuilt.

To retain wall framing
1. Go Up One Floor

to Floor 1.

2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, unlock the "Walls, Railings" layer.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the front railing of the Porch to select it.

4. Press the Shift key and click on the side Porch railing to add it to the selection set.
5. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the STRUCTURE panel of the Railing Specification dialog, check

Retain Wall Framing and click OK.

6. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing, and on the WALL panel of the Build Framing dialog, check Build

Wall Framing and click OK.
7. Notice that this time, the customized wall corner framing is not replaced.
8. When you are finished, Save

your work.

WORKING IN WALL DETAILS
Wall Details are a special type of view in which only the studs, plates and headers used to frame a selected wall display.
By default, Wall Details use the naming convention "Wall Detail - X", where X is simply a number. A more descriptive
name can be assigned to any Wall Detail by customizing the associated wall’s label.

383

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To specify a Wall Detail’s name
1. In plan view, click the Select Objects
2. Click the Open Object

button, then click on the wall that contains the kitchen windows.

edit button and on the LABEL panel of the Wall Specification dialog:

3. Click the radio button beside Specify Label.
4. Notice that the text field becomes populated by the name of the Wall Detail associated with the wall.
5. Delete the default name and type a short description like "Kitchen Window Wall", then click OK.
6. A Wall Detail can be opened in either of two ways: by selecting a wall and clicking the Wall Detailedit button,

and using the Project Browser.

To find and open a Wall Detail view
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Click the arrow next to "Wall Details" to expand a list of subfolders, one for each floor in the plan.
3. Click the arrow next to the "1st Floor" subfolder to expand a list of the Wall Details for all walls on Floor 1 of the
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan.

4. The "Kitchen Window Wall" detail should be the first item in the "1st Floor" folder. Right-click on it and select384

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

Open View from the contextual menu.

Wall framing can be selected and edited in a Wall Detail. Wall Details are also the only views in which Wall Bridging canbe drawn.

To draw Blocking in a Wall Detail
1. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing, and on the WALL panel of the Build Framing dialog, note that

Stagger Blocking is checked, then click Cancel.
2. Select Build> Framing> Blocking

3. When the Midpoint, then move your mouse pointer over the midpoint of either end wall stud.

Snap Indicator displays, click and drag a horizontal line across the wall until you reach theside of the first window.

385

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

4. Repeat these steps to create blocking between the windows and at the other end of the wall.

5. When you are finished, Save

your work but leave the Wall Detail view open.

If you rebuild wall framing after manually editing in a Wall Detail, your changes will be lost. To protect changes made to awall’s framing, check Retain Wall Framing in the Wall Specification dialog.

DIMENSIONING A WALL DETAIL
Dimensions and annotations can be added to Wall Detail views, and just like plan, elevation, and other CAD Detail views,
Wall Details have saved defaults associated with them. Wall Details use the Default Set that was active when they werecreated and are assigned the "Detail Layer Set" by default. Once created, though, both can be changed and will be savedwith the view.

To set the Dimension Defaults
1. Select Tools> Active View> Edit Active View.

2. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the CAD Detail Specification dialog:l

Notice that the Default Set the Wall Detail view is Currently Using is the "Plan Default Set" and that most of
the Selected Defaults’ names begin with "Plan", as well.

l

Recall that the Working, Roof, and Electrical Plan Views have defaults set up for printing at a 1/4" = 1’ scale.
See "To set the rich text defaults" on page 182 of the Dormers Tutorial.

3. Details are typically printed at a larger scale than plan views are, so select "1/2" Scale Default Set" from theCurrently Using drop-down list.
4. The 1/2" Scale defaults are not task-specific and may be used in any view, whereas Wall Details have a few
formatting requirements that are not needed in all views.
llClick the New Default

button to the right of Dimension.

In the New Default dialog, type a short, descriptive name like, "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults" and clickOK.

5. In the Dimension Defaults dialog which opens next, notice that "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults" is stated in the
dialog box’s title bar.

386

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

6. On the PRIMARY FORMAT panel:lSelect " from the Units drop-down list.

l

Make sure that Smallest Fraction is selected and that 16 is set as the denominator.

7. On the LOCATE MANUAL panel, make sure under "Framing", Both Sides is selected.
8. On the LOCATE END TO END panel, make sure under "Framing", Both Sides is selected.
9. On the TEXT STYLE panel:l

Notice that the "1" Text Style" is in use and that it uses a Character Height of 1".

l

Select Use Custom Text Style.

lSpecify a Character Height of 6".

10. On the ARROW panel, specify the Size as 6", as well.
11.

Click OK to return to the CAD Detail Specification dialog and notice:l

The Selected Defaults for Dimensions is "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults".

l

The Default Set that the Wall Detail is Currently Using is now described as "Active Defaults". This is because
there is no saved Default Set that uses the new "Wall Detail Dimension Defaults".

12. Click the Save New Active Default

button to the right of the Currently Using drop-down list and in the New

Default Set dialog, type a short, descriptive name like, "Wall Detail Default Set" and click OK.
The new Wall Detail Default Set is now in use in the currently open Wall Detail, and will be available in other views, aswell.

To draw dimension lines
1. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension
Dimension, then click and drag to draw a vertical End to End

line on the left side of the wall framing, measuring the wall’s total height

2. Draw a horizontal End to End Dimension

line about 12" above the wall’s top plate.

387

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click on the Moveedit handle that displays where you clicked on theline and drag upwards above the top plate 24".
4. Draw another horizontal End to End Dimension

line identical to the one created in step 3, and in the original

location.
5. Draw an End to End Dimension

inside each of the two window openings.

To add a secondary dimension label
1. Select the topmost horizontal dimension line and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the SECONDARY FORMAT panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog:lUncheck Use Default Formatting.

l

Check Use Second Format.

lSelect ’ from the Units drop-down list.

lUnder the Accuracy heading, select Smallest Fraction.

lClick OK.

388

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

To add extension lines
1. Click on the lower 336" long horizontal dimension line to select it.
2. Notice the diamond shaped edit handle located just above the location where you clicked.
3. Click and drag this Add Extension Line edit handle towards the bottom midpoint of the left window header.

4. When a new extension line locating the header displays, and the Midpoint

Snap Indicator can be seen, release themouse button.
5. Repeat these steps to add an extension line that locates the header on the right.
6. Using the same technique, add extension lines that locates both sides of the blocking for the interior wall.
7. Select the vertical dimension line and add an extension line locating the horizontal blocking.

389

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

The Running Dimension tool creates cumulative dimension lines that can be used to measure the framing members that
support window openings. Running Dimensions use the settings on the Locate Manual panel of the Dimension Defaults
dialog.

To draw a Running Dimension line
1. Zoomin on the right half of the wall framing.

2. Select CAD> Dimensions> Running Dimension, then click and drag to draw a vertical dimension line on theright side of the window opening, from the bottom of the wall framing to the bottom of the header.
3. Click on the dimension line to select it, then click on the Moveedit handle that displays where you clicked on theline and drag to the right until it is about 12" past the last stud.

4. Running Dimensions have a number of special features:lA circle indicating the starting end of the dimension line.

l

Arrows that only point in one direction: away from the starting end.

lEach dimension label is positioned near the arrow associated with its segment.

390

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framingl

The dimension values in each segment of this dimension line are cumulative: each measures from the same
point at the bottom of the wall.

l

These features are more easily seen when extra extension lines are removed.

To move and remove extension lines
1. Click on the Running Dimension line to select it.
2. Notice the diamond shaped edit handles located at the far ends of each of the extension lines. These are Extension
Line handles.
3. Click on the Extension Line handle located at the top of the window sill board and drag it to the left until it snaps tothe bottom of the sill board of the other window opening.
4. Click and drag the extension line locating the bottom surface of the wall’s bottom plate and drag it to the right, past
the dimension line itself. When you release the mouse button, it will be removed from the dimension line.

5. When you are finished, select File> Close View to return to plan view.
6. Remember to Save

your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Wall Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

391

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Wall Framing

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for generating and editing wall framing.
To generate wall framing379

To modify layer settings

379

To edit wall studs

380

To specify stud spacing by wall type381

To regenerate all wall framing382

To rebuild framing in selected walls

382

To retain wall framing383

To specify a Wall Detail’s name384

To find and open a Wall Detail view384

To draw Blocking in a Wall Detail385

To set the Dimension Defaults

386

To draw dimension lines387

To add a secondary dimension label388

To add extension lines389

To draw a Running Dimension line390

To move and remove extension lines391

To save a plan revision

391

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 20 - Wall Framing
What are the two types of wall framing object that can be seen in plan view?
lWall studs and headers are the only types of wall framing that can be seen in plan view.

Where should wall stud spacing be set in most cases?
lWall stud spacing should be set in the Wall Type Definition.

Where is the default rough opening size for doors and windows set?
l

Door and window rough openings are specified in their respective defaults dialogs, and can be customized in theirindividual specification dialogs.

What can you do to prevent objects on a particular layer from being selected?
l

If you lock a layer in the Layer Display Options dialog, objects on that layer cannot be selected.

What are two ways that manually edited wall framing can be protected when other wall framing needs to be rebuilt?
l

You can rebuild framing in a selected wall only by clicking the Build Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button.

l

You can also check the box beside Retain Wall Framing on the Structure panel of the Wall Specification dialog toprevent the selected wall's framing from being rebuilt.

How is wall Blocking drawn?

392

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling FraminglWall Blocking can only be drawn in a Wall Detail view using the Blocking tool.

How do you get a dimension line to display two dimension labels instead of one?
l

A second label can be specified on the Secondary Format panel of the Dimension Line Specification dialog.

What Dimension tool allows you to create a dimension line with segments that all measure from the same point?
l

The Running Dimension tool creates dimension lines that measure all segments from the same beginning point.

Roof and Ceiling Framing
Roof and ceiling framing are typically generated automatically and then edited as needed.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for generating roof framing. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips

393

Setting the Defaults

394

Using Plan Views

394

Generating Roof Framing

395

Modifying Roof Framing

397

Editing Roof Framing

399

Generating Ceiling Framing

404

Editing Ceiling Framing

406

Adding Annotations

408

Creating File Revisions

409

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Wall Framing tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Wall Framing and
CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working.
However, Chic Cottage-Wall Framing.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left
unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create roof framing, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

393

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

Drawing and Editingl

The Paste Hold Position

tool lets you create a copy of an object at the identical position as the original, but on adifferent floor.
lSelect a group of objects of the same type by activating the tool used to draw them, holding down the Shift key, andthen drawing a selection marquee.

ContentlCreate template plans that have your preferred structural defaults set and ready for use when you begin a new plan.

lTemplate plans can also include custom Layer Sets.

InterfacelWhen drawing and editing framing, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps. Object Snaps, however, shouldbe left on.
lTiling 2D and 3D views can help in the positioning of objects like posts.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslF9 - Reference DisplaylCtrl/Command + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/Command + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. When
adding roof framing to a plan, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Primarily, since roof framing generates inside the roof planes, it is important that the roof be completely correct before youbuild roof framing. If you design a roof and then later on decide that its structure needs to be changed, you need to either
edit the roof planes or rebuild the roof.
Before generating framing, place a Framing Reference Marker to set where framing layout is pulled from.
As with other types of framing objects, when working on roof and ceiling framing it is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps
off. Object Snaps, however, should be toggled on.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
As with floor framing, roof framing is an example of a drawing task that is made easier and more efficient by using a Saved
Plan View created for that purpose.

394

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Framing, Roof Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Framing, Roof Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. Note that the Active Layer Set Options

side window reports that the "Framing, Roof Layer Set" is now active, and that it is similar in most ways to the otherframing layer sets.
5. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser. Next:l

Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.

l

Right-click on the "Framing, Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

6. In the Saved Plan View Specification dialog:l

On the GENERAL panel, select "2nd Floor" as the Floor that is used whenever this view is opened.

l

On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel, notice that the names of the Saved Defaults associated with this view all
begin with "Framing" and end with "Roof".

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

The settings in the "Framing, Roof Plan View" are typical of roof framing drawings and will make working on roof framingeasier.

GENERATING ROOF FRAMING
Roof defaults can be set in both the Framing Defaults and the Build Roof dialogs. The settings used to actually generateroof framing are those in each roof plane's specification dialog, regardless of whether they are using the defaults.

To generate roof framing
1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof.

2. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Build Roof dialog:l

Check Use Framing Reference.

lSpecify the Rafter Spacing as 16" On Center.

l

Under the Roof Layers heading, click the Edit button to the right of Structure.

3. In the Roof Structure Definition dialog, increase the depth of the framing to 11 1/4" and click OK.

395

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

4. Returning to the STRUCTURE panel:lSpecify the Width of the Ridge board as 3 1/2" and its Depth as 15 1/4".

lCheck the box beside Build Roof Framing and click OK.

5. Notice that a message warns that the changes made to the roof framing defaults will not affect the existing roof
planes.
l

This will be addressed in the Modifying Roof Framing on page 397 section, below.

lClick OK to close the message box.

The meaning of the warning message becomes clear when the newly generated roof framing is examined. Roof framing canbe viewed in both 2D and 3D views.

To examine roof framing
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on a roof rafter to select it.

2. Click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter) dialog, notethat the Depth is 9 1/4" rather than the 11 1/4" specified above, then click Cancel.

396

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

3. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Framing Overview
4. Zoom.

in on the ridge of the roof.

5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the ridge board to select it. Notice that a Temporary Dimension

reports its depth as 11 1/4" rather than the 15 1/4" specified above

6. With the ridge board selected, click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the Framing

Specification (Rafter Ridge) dialog, confirm that the Depth is 11 1/4", then click Cancel.
7. Select File> Close View and Save

your work.

The reason why the roof framing does not reflect the current defaults is that the roof framing is generated based on thecurrent state of the roof planes in the plan - not on the defaults. The roof planes in this plan were created using earlier
structural default settings and as a result, they have framing specifications that are different from the current defaults. In
order to produce roof framing that does use the new defaults, the roof will need to be edited and the framing, rebuilt.

MODIFYING ROOF FRAMING
In order to apply changes made to the roof framing defaults to the roof already drawn in a plan, the roof must either berebuilt, or edited. Since some of Chic Cottage’s roof planes have been manually edited, it will be more efficient to edit theexisting roof planes.
The Edit All Roof Planes tool allows you to open the Roof Plane Specification dialog shared by all roof planes in thecurrent plan. A wide variety of style and structural settings can be modified, but bear in mind that changes to structure depth
using this tool are not recommended because they can have unintended effects on roof height and connections between roof
planes.

397

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To modify the entire roof structure
1. Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:

3. Notice:l

Most of the values are reported as "No Change". This is because this dialog is shared by all roof planes in theplan, as though they had been group-selected, and not all roof planes have the same height values.

l

The Baseline Height for all roofs is locked and a different height reference cannot be selected. This means that
if the depth of the roof planes' Structure or Ceiling Layers is modified, the tops of the roofs will remain at thesame heights but the bottom will change.

4. On the STRUCTURE panel, some settings can be modified without affecting roof depth:lSpecify the Rafter Spacing as 16".

lSpecify the Ridge Width as 3 1/2".

lClick OK to close the dialog, apply your changes to all roof planes.

5. Select Build>Framing>Build Framing.

6. In the Build Framing dialog, under the Build Framing Once heading, check the box next to Roofs and click OK.
7. Select a ridge board to confirm that it is 3 1/2" wide. See To examine roof framing on page 396, above.
A similar approach can be used to modify the framing for a single roof plane. An easy way to select a roof plane when roof
framing displays is using the Roof Plane tool.

To modify a single roof plane’s structure
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Planel, then click on the roof plane over the Deck room to select it.

With the Roof Plane tool active, framing members and other types of objects cannot be selected: only roof
planes.

398

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

2. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel, notice:l

The Top Plate Height is reported for reference, and that it is locked by default. In this example, it will remain
locked.

lWhen a single roof plane is selected, you can instead lock another Height reference to control which part of theroof plane adjusts when its depth is changed.

lNotice too, that the Baseline Height is 122 13/16".

3. On the STRUCTURE panel of the Roof Plane Specification dialog:lSpecify the Rafter Spacing as 24".

l

Click the Edit button to the right of Structure and specify the framing depth as 11 1/4".

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the selected roof plane.

4. Return to the GENERAL panel:l

Notice that the roof plane's Top Plate Height did not change, while its Baseline Height increased from 122
13/16" to 124 7/8".

lThis means that the top/exterior surface of the roof plane is 1 15/16" higher than it was, while thebottom/interior did not move.

5. With the roof plane still selected, click the Build Framing for Selected Object(s)edit button.

6. Select a roof rafter over the Deck to confirm its size.
7. Remember to Save

your work.

EDITING ROOF FRAMING
Like other types of framing, roof framing can be edited after it is created. Here, the ridge board will be divided in two andsupported by posts where the two boards meet.
The default 3 1/2" square Posts will work well for this task. See Adding Posts and Beams on page 366.

399

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

To break the ridge beam over a post
1. Zoomin on the vertical wall on the right side of the Stairwell on Floor 2.

2. Select Build> Framing> Post

, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the point where the roof ridge passes over the center of the vertical wall.

l

When the Intersection

Snap Indicator displays, click once to place a post that is centered in the wall andunder the roof ridge.
3. Click the Select Objectsl

If another object becomes selected instead, click the Select Next ObjectlWhen the ridge board is selected, the selected object will be described as a Rafter Ridge in the Status Bar.

4. Click the Add Breaklbutton, then click on the horizontal ridge board that runs along the ridge of the roof.

edit button, then:Move your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the post.

400

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling FraminglWhen the Midpoint

Snap Indicator displays, click once to break the ridge board in two along the center line of thepost.

To stack load-bearing posts
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section, then click and drag a horizontal camera

arrow pointed at the new post. Make sure that the camera arrow is perfectly horizontal and that it extends past thepost.
2. In the Active Layer Display Options side window, select "3D Framing Set" as the active layer set. Notice that now,
only framing objects and foundation walls display in the cross section view.
3. Select Window> Tile Verticallyto tile the cross section and plan views side by side, then click in the plan viewto make it the active window.

4. Click the Select Objects

button and click on the post to select it. If necessary, use the Select Next Object

edit tool, then:lSelect Edit> Copy.

l

Go Down One Floorl

Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position

to Floor 1.
to create a copy of the post in the same location as original.

401

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling FraminglNotice that although a new post has been created, it cannot be seen in the cross section. This is because
although it is on a different floor, it has the same absolute height as the original.

5. With the newly pasted post still selected, click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the

Framing Specification (Post) dialog:l

Notice that the Top Height is 206 1/4", which is the ceiling height for rooms on Floor 2.

l

Check the box beside Raise/Lower and type -97 1/8" in the text field.

lClick the Apply button and notice that the Top Height is now 109 1/8". This is the height of the subflooringon Floor 2.

l

In the Raise/Lower field, type -3/4" and click the Apply button once more to align the top of the post with thefloor joists, then click OK.

6. Go Down One Floor

to Floor 0 and use Paste Hold Position

7. With the newly pasted post still selected, click the Open Object

to create one more post.
edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the

Framing Specification (Post) dialog:lClick the Lock Total Height radio button.

lSpecify the Top Height as -3/4" to position the post's top at the same height as Floor 1's floor joists, then clickOK.

8. In order to see the results in the cross section view, click in that view window to make it active and turn off the"Walls, Foundation" layer.
9. Select the post on Floor 0 and use its end edit handle to extend its bottom end downward until it snaps to the wall's
bottom plate.

402

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

You can add a footing under the new post on Floor 0 bycopying and pasting one of the other post's footings. Use
the Center Object Snap to center the footing on the post.

10. Using their edit handles, edit the heights of the other two posts:lSelect the post on Floor 1 make sure it snaps to the post below it and the top of the floor framing above it.

lSelect the post on Floor 2, snap its bottom end to the top of the post below it, and extend its top end upward so
it snaps to the roof ridge rafter.

Displaying foundation walls in Framing Overviews is useful, so leaving the "Walls, Foundation" layer turned off in the
3D Framing Set not a good idea. A better solution is to place the interior wall with footings on a different layer.

To place a wall on a non-default layer
1. Click in plan view to make it the active view.
2. Go to Floor 0 and select the interior wall to the left of the stairs.
3. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the LAYER panel of the Wall Specification dialog, select "Walls,

Normal" from the Layer drop-down list and click OK.

403

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

4. Use the Active Layer Display Options side window to turn the "Walls, Foundation" layer on in the 3D Framing Set.
5. When you are finished, close the Back Clipped Cross Section view and Save

your work.

GENERATING CEILING FRAMINGOn Floors 0 and 1, all of the ceilings are supported by floor platforms. There is no living space above Floor 2, so the ceilingjoists do not need to be as deep as floor joists are.
Framing defaults can be set in the Framing Defaults dialog.

To customize joist direction
1. Begin by selecting "Framing, Ceiling Plan View" from the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which islocated in the top toolbar by default.
2. Next, go to Floor 2 and notice:l

Ceiling framing was generated earlier when Automatically Build Floor and Ceiling Framing was checked.
See "To generate floor and ceiling framing" on page 363 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.

lCeiling joists are all horizontally oriented and are only generated in the area where a flat, full-height ceiling ispresent.

404

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

3. Specify a vertical direction for the ceiling joists:lSelect Build> Framing> Joist DirectionlClick and drag to draw a vertical Joist Direction Line to the right of the staircase.

4. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing.

and click the Framing Defaults button.

5. On the 2ND panel of the Build Framing dialog:l

Check Use Framing Reference.

l

Make sure the Spacing is set to 16" on center.

l

Click OK.

6. Returning to the Build Framing dialog:lUnder the Build Framing Once heading.

lSelect Ceilings and choose "Floor 2" from the drop-down list, then click OK.

7. Select Build>Framing>Bearing Line, then click and drag to draw a horizontal line along the bottom edge ofthe full-length joist just above the short joists.
8. Draw a horizontal Joist Direction

line in the area of the short joists.

9. Select Build> Framing> Build Framing

and build the ceiling framing for Floor 2 once more, as describedabove.

405

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

10. Saveyour work.

EDITING CEILING FRAMING
Ceiling joists can be edited in the same ways that floor joists can.
Here, the ceiling framing layout will be shifted so that the joists butt against the sides of the rafters rather than being alignedwith their centers.

To customize the Reference Display
1. Select Window> Fill Window

or Zoom

out until the entire floor plan can be seen.

2. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference Display.

3. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Change Floor/Referenceor click the toolbar button that reports thecurrent floor level.
4. In the Change Floor/Reference dialog:l

Notice the table under the "Reference Display" heading. The Reference Display can be set to show a specificfloor level of your choosing and use the layer set that you specify. It can even display information from anotherplan file.

l

Row #1 is the Reference Display. Specify that it display the 2nd Floor.

lClick on the "Define" cell in row #1 to open the Layer Display Options dialog.

406

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

5. In the Layer Display Options dialog, notice that the "Reference Display Layer Set" is the selected Layer Set.
6. In the Name Filter field, type the word "roof", then:lTurn on the display of the "Framing, Roof Rafters" layer.

lTurn off the display of the "Roof Planes" layer.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

7. Notice that roof rafters are now represented in the Reference Display, and that they are aligned with the ceilingjoists.
The ceiling framing on Floor 2 can be easily selected while the Joist tool is active.

To shift the ceiling framing layout
1. Select Build> Framing> Joist, then hold down the Shift key and click and drag a rectangular selection marqueearound the drawing.
2. When you release the mouse button, notice that the Status Bar reports the number of objects that are selected.
3. To confirm that all of the selected objects are ceiling joists, click the Open Objectl

Note that the title of the dialog that opens is Framing Specification (Ceiling Joist).

l

Click the Cancel button.

4. With the array of ceiling joists still selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object

edit button:

edit button. In theTransform/Replicate Objects dialog:l

Check the box beside Move.

lSpecify the X Delta value as 1 1/2", then click OK.

5. Zoomin on the joists and confirm that they are now positioned against the sides of the rafters instead of beingaligned with them.

407

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

6. Repeat steps 1-4 to offset the shorter horizontal joists 1 1/2" upward using the Y Delta setting inTransform/Replicate Object dialog.
7. When you are finished, toggle the Reference Display

off again and Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSWith roof and ceiling framing in place, annotations can be added.
In the Floor Framing tutorial, the "Framing Floor Plan View" was active, annotations were added using "Framing Rich Text
Defaults, Floor", and were placed on the "Text, Framing - Floor", layer. That layer was turned off, however, when the"Framing, Roof Plan View" was opened.
In addition to creating an uncluttered space for drawing roofs, another benefit of switching to the "Framing, Roof Plan
View" is that annotations added while it is active will be placed on their own layer. This means that roof framing
annotations will display in the roof framing plan but not in other views.
Notice that although the layer is turned on, no roof framing labels can be seen. This is because unlike Posts and Beams,
most framing members do not have automatic labels. You can, however, create custom labels for any members that requirethem. Adding a fill color can also bring attention to certain members.

To annotate framing members using their labels
1. Select the "Framing, Roof Plan View" from the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down list in the toolbars.

2. Use the Active Layer Display Options dialog to turn off the display of the "Framing, Bearing Lines" layer so the
Joist Direction Lines are not visible.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then group-select the valley rafters over the garage and porch:lClick on one of the valley rafters on either side of the vertical ridge over the Garage.

lHold down the Ctrl/Command key, then click on the other two valley rafters to add them to the selection set.

4. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the FILL STYLE panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter Ridge)

dialog:l

Select "Solid" from the Pattern Type drop-down list.

lClick the Color bar and choose a grey color from the Select Color dialog.

408

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

5. On the LABEL panel of the Framing Specification (Rafter Ridge) dialog:lSelect the Specify Label radio button.

l

Click the Insert Macrobutton and in the menu that opens, browse to and select Object Specific>

Nominal Size.
l

When you click on Nominal Size, "%nominal_size%" is added to the text field.

6. Click after the inserted macro in the text field and type: VALLEY RAFTER.
7. Click OK to close the dialog.

8. If you want, you can select each valley rafter and use its Move Label edit handle to adjust the position of the label.
9. Remember to Save

your work.

Additional annotations can be added using the Rich Text and Leader Line tools. If you wish, you can also switch to the"Framing, Ceiling Plan View" and add annotations using any of the techniques you have learned.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Roof Framing.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

409

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Roof and Ceiling Framing

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating and editing roof and ceiling framing.

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 21 - Roof and Ceiling Framing
When roof framing is generated, are the current framing defaults used, or the current roof plane specifications?
l

The roof plane’s current specifications are used when roof framing is generated. In order for changes to the framing
defaults to affect roof planes, they must be regenerated or redrawn.

What tool allows you to change the specifications of all roof planes at once?
l

The Edit All Roof Planes tool lets you open the shared specification dialog for all roof planes in the current plan.

What edit tool allows you to rebuild the framing for an individual roof plane?
l

The Rebuild Framing for Selected Object(s) edit button allows you to rebuild the framing for the selected object(s)only.

What tool allows you to create a copy of an object at the same location as the original?
l

The Paste Hold Position tool creates a copy of an object at the same location as the original.

What edit tool can you use to move multiple selected objects a precise distance?
l

The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool lets you move selected objects a precise distance along the X, Y, and/or Z
planes.

410

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Tutorials

Landscaping Tutorials

Chapter 6

The Landscaping Tutorials describe best practices for creating site plans and landscaping in Chief Architect:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Plot Plans
Terrain Elevation
Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads
Landscaping Design

412
434
452
466

411

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Plot Plans
A plot plan is essentially a map of a property’s legal description. Plot plans, or site plans, usually have a North Pointer andcan also include other features such as the location of buildings and setback lines.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect Premier for creating a plot plan. Concepts introduced include:
Productivity Tips

412

Setting the Defaults

413

Tracing a Lot Image

413

Importing a DXF/DWG

413

Using Plan Views

413

Drawing a Lot Perimeter

414

Adding Setback Lines422

Converting a Plot Plan into Terrain

425

Defining the Direction of North

427

Positioning the Structure

429

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial describes how to create a plot plan. Unlike other tutorials in this series, this process will be done in new planrather than in CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT.plan. This will allow the direction of North to be defined in two different ways:
one, for the purposes of a site plan and one for all other purposes.

To save a new plan file
1. Select File> New Plan
2. Select File> Save As

to open a new, blank plan.
. In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents\Chic Cottage folder so that it is

the Save location for your site plan file.
3. For the File name, type Chic Cottage-Plot Plan and click the Save button.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create a plot plan, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

Use the Input Line

tool to create a series of lines with specific starting points, lengths and angles.

l

Use the Concentric Edit Behavior to concentrically resize objects using in increments that you specify.

412

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Interfacel

The Number Style/Angle Style dialog controls how length and angle values are entered and display in dialogs and the
Status Bar.

lDefault Sets let you activate a set of defaults and layer settings for a specific purpose: for example, a plot plan.

lWhen drawing and editing a plot plan polyline, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps. Object Snaps,

however, should be left on.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating a plot plan, it is a good idea to set your CAD and Annotation Defaults in advance.
While the direction of North is typically straight up in a site plan drawing, that is not often the case in most floor plans. To
allow the direction of North to be defined in two different ways: one, for the purposes of a site plan and one for all otherpurposes, create the site plan in a separate plan file.
A plot plan is an example of a plan view that requires text, dimensions, and other annotations to be drawn at a different
scale than other views. You can easily switch to a layer set specifically for plot plans, and enable defaults that place text,
dimensions, and other annotations on special layers for that purpose. See To switch to a different saved plan view on page414.
Before drawing a plot plan, it is helpful to set the General CAD Defaults to meet your needs for this task. See To set theCAD Defaults on page 414.
Creating setback lines is easy to accomplish using the Concentric Edit Behavior. See To create setback lines on page 423.

TRACING A LOT IMAGE
One fast and easy way to create a lot perimeter is to import an image of the lot and then trace over it. To see ademonstration of the process, see the "Trace a Terrain Lot Image to Create a Site Plan or Terrain Perimeter" tutorial video atvideo.chiefarchitect.com.

IMPORTING A DXF/DWG
Often, plot plans and elevation data are available in DXF/DWG file format, which can be imported into Chief Architect.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
When drawing a plot plan, it is helpful to use a Saved Plan View with layer settings and defaults preset for that task. This is
the case even when a plan file is created for a single use.

413

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To switch to a different saved plan view
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default.

2. Select "Plot Plan View" from the drop-down list.
3. The current view window remains open, and now uses the Plot Plan View.
4. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. Note that the Active Layer Set Options

side window reports that the "Plot Plan Layer Set" is now active, and that:l

The Terrain Perimeter created in the Decks and Porches tutorial displays. See "To create a Terrain Perimeter"on page 121 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.

l

Doors, windows, and General Note callout shapes now display.

lRoof framing and framing labels no longer display.

5. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
6. Right-click on the Plot Plan View in the Project Browser and select Edit View from the contextual menu.
7. On the SELECTED DEFAULTS panel of the Plan View Specification dialog, notice that the names of the Saved
Defaults associated with this view all begin with "Plot Plan", then click Cancel.
8. When you are finished, Save

your work.

The settings in the "Plot Plan View" are typical of site plan drawings and will make working on this task easier.

DRAWING A LOT PERIMETER
Plot plans can also be drawn using the CAD Tools. A plot plan can be drawn in plan view or, if you prefer, in a CAD
Detail.

To set the CAD Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog, expand the CAD category, select "General

CAD", and click the Edit button.
2. In the CAD Defaults dialog, click the Define button under the Displayed Line Length Format heading.

414

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

3. In the Displayed Line Length dialog:lClick the Units drop-down and choose either "ft" or the ’ sign from the list.

lSelect the Decimal Places radio button and specify 2 as the number of decimals.

lClick OK.

4. Returning to the CAD Defaults dialog, select the Quadrant Bearing radio button located under the Display Line
Angle as heading.

5. Click OK, then click Done to close both dialogs.
Before drawing a plot perimeter using the lot description, you need to indicate where you want the starting point to belocated in your drawing area. Here, we will place it at the origin.

415

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To define the starting point
1. Select CAD> Points> Input Point

to open the New CAD Point dialog.

2. Select the Absolute Location radio button.
3. Specify both the X and Y Position of the point as 0. This will place the point at the origin of the drawing space:(0,0).
4. Click OK to close the dialog and create a point at (0,0). This is the Current Point that will serve as the Start Point for
the first line of the plot plan.
5. Select Window> Pan Window, then click in the drawing area and drag up and to the right to bring the Current

Point to the center of the view window.
6. For a better view of the plot lines as they are created, you can Zoom

out a bit, as well.

With the starting point of the property description in place, the lines can be added using the Input Line tool.
In this example, this lot description is used:
Distance

Bearing

Radius155.69’N 61 25 10 E ---118.65’

S 28 29 35 E ---154.37

N 49 59 11 E ---150.00---450’

To create a plot plan polyline
1. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line

to open the New CAD Line dialog.

l

Notice that the Start Point is at (0,0): the location of the Current CAD Point.

lClick on the dialog’s title bar and drag it over to the side of the program window so it covers as little of thedrawing window as possible.

416

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

2. Click the Number Style button and in the Number Style/Angle Style dialog:lSelect Decimal Feet as the Number Style;l

Select Quadrant Bearing as the Angle Style.

l

Click OK to return to the New CAD Line dialog.

3. Select Relative to Start Point and check the box beside Polar.
4. Using decimal feet, enter the length of the first side of the property boundary’s legal description in the Distancefield.
5. Enter the direction of that line in the Angle field. To enter an angle using Quadrant Bearings, type:l

The primary direction (N or S), followed by a space; then,l

The angle in degrees, minutes, and seconds with a space after each value; then,l

The secondary direction (E or W).

lPress the Tab key and notice that the program adds degree, minute, and second symbols automatically.

417

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

6. Click Next and notice:l

The Start Point is no longer (0,0).

l

In the drawing area, a line now extends out from the point at (0,0).

l

If you have zoomed out far enough, you can also see that there is a new CAD Point at the end of the line. Thisis the new Current Point.

7. Enter the Distance and Angle of the next property line and click the Next button.
8. Continue until all property lines are entered, then click OK to close the New CAD Line dialog.
In most cases, the resulting polyline will be closed, with the end point of the last line the same as the start point of the first.
Note: The angle of a given line can be described differently depending on
which end is used as the start point. Some property descriptions proceed
in the same direction around the perimeter, whereas some do not.

If you realize that a line is entered incorrectly or that its direction is reversed, you can easily correct the problem. Here, forexample, the first two lines proceed in a clockwise direction around the perimeter while the third line is described in acounterclockwise direction.

418

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To correct an error
1. If a line is incorrect, click OK to close the New CAD Line dialog.
2. Select CAD> Lines> Disconnect Edges, then:l

Click on the incorrect segment to select it.

l

Notice that it is the only segment along the polyline to display edit handles.

3. Click the Delete

button to remove the problem edge.

4. Select CAD> Point> Place Point, then click at the end of the last correct line to create a new Current Point.

5. Select CAD> Lines> Input Lineand continue entering data in the New CAD Line dialog.

If the direction of a lot line is reversed, simply enter the opposite direction letters to address it.

To reverse the direction of a property line
1. Select CAD> Lines> Input Line.

2. In the New CAD Line dialog, enter the Distance in decimal feet as normal.
3. Enter the reversed direction in the Angle field:lType the reversed primary direction (S instead of N or N instead of S), followed by a space; then,lEnter the angle in degrees, minutes, and seconds with a space after each value; then,lType the reversed secondary direction (W instead of E or E instead of W).

lHere, S 69 40 44 W is entered instead of N 69 40 44 E.

The easiest way to create a curved property line is to draw it manually.

419

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To create a curved property line
1. Use the Input Line

tool to input all perimeter edges except for the curved edge, as described above.

2. To ensure that the existing edges do not change length, temporarily toggle off Angle Snaps.
llSelect Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Snaps

to remove the check mark from the tool icon.

Notice that the Angle Snaps icon now follows your mouse pointer to remind you that this important Snap
Behavior is currently toggled off.

3. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line, then move your mouse pointer over one the end points of the open polyline

and drag a line to the other open end of the polyline.

420

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

4. Click on a property line to select it, then click the Change Line/Arc

edit button to turn this line into an arc.

5. If necessary, use the triangular Reshape edit handle to make the arc curve in the same direction as the actual property
edge. Here, the edge curves outward.
6. With the curved edge selected, click the Open Object

edit button to open the Polyline Specification dialog.

7. On the SELECTED ARC panel:l

Click the Lock Chord radio button.

lSpecify the length of the Radius. Here, 450’ is used.

l

Alternatively, the Arc Length could be entered.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes to the Selected Edge.

8. Select CAD> Points> Delete Temporary Points

to remove the CAD points that were added as the plot plan

was created.
9. Select Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Snaps

to turn Angle Snaps back on.

421

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To display line length, bearing, and radius
1. Click the plot plan polyline to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Polyline Specification dialog:l

Check Show Length, Show Angle,lMake sure that All Angles is checked, then click OK.

3. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING SETBACK LINES
Setback lines can be added by creating a copy of the plot plan polyline that is resized using the Concentric Edit Behavior.

422

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

To create setback lines
1. Select Edit> Preferencesin Windows orChief Architect> Preferences

in macOS.

2. On the BEHAVIORS panel of the Preferences dialog:lSelect the Concentric radio button under the Edit Type heading.

l

In the Jump field, type in the required setback distance, such as 10’, and click OK.

lWhen you return to plan view, notice that the Concentric

tool icon follows your mouse pointer, reminding

you that this alternative behavior is active.
3. Click the Select Objects
4. Click the Copy/Paste

button, then click on the plot plan polyline to select it.
edit button, then:423

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot PlanslMove your mouse pointer over a corner edit handle,l

Click and drag towards the center of the polyline.

lWhen a second, inner polyline appears, release the mouse.

5. Select the inner polyline and click the Open Object

edit button to open the Polyline Specification dialog. On theLINE STYLE panel:lSelect a dashed line Style from the drop-down listlUnder the "Display Options" heading, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle, then click OK.
You can also click the Library button to the right of the line
Style and choose from a selection of task-specific line styles
in the Library Browser.

6. When you have finished creating the concentric copy, select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Default

to restore thedefault edit behavior.
If you want, you can place the setback polyline on its own custom layer so that its display can be controlled independent of
the perimeter polyline.

To place the setback polyline on a new layer
1. Select the setback polyline and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Polyline Specification dialog, click the Define button to the right of the Layer dropdown list.
3. In the Layer Display Options dialog, which opens next, notice that the "CAD, Plot Plan" layer is selected in the layer
table.
4. Click the New button below the layer table to open the New Layer Name dialog. Type a short, descriptive name suchas "CAD, Setback Lines", then click OK.
5. Notice that the new "CAD, Setback Lines" layer is selected, then click OK to close the Layer Display Options
dialog.

424

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

6. Returning to the Polyline Specification dialog, notice that the "CAD, Setback Lines" Layer is now assigned to thesetback polyline, then click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

CONVERTING A PLOT PLAN INTO TERRAIN
The plot plan drawn above is a 2D CAD object that will be useful in a site plan. It can also be converted in to a 3D Terrain
Perimeter in which you can model the lot’s slope and landscaping.
So that the terrain and landscaping can be included in the same 3D model as the house, the plot plan perimeter must first be
copied and pasted into the CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan.

To copy the plot plan polyline into plan view
1. Click the Select Objects

tool, then click on the plot plan perimeter to select it. Hold down the Shift key andclick on the setback polyline to add it to the selection set.
2. With the two objects selected, select Edit> Copy
3. Select File> Open Plan.

and open the plan file that your site plan is associated with.

4. Select File> Open Recent Files and select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT to open it.
5. In plan view, go to Floor 1. See "To navigate between floors levels" on page 52 of the Multiple Floors Tutorial.
6. Notice that "Framing, Roof Plan View" is selected in the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, then select"Plot Plan View" instead.
7. Select Edit> Paste> Paste

then click in the drawing area near the house to place a copy of the two polylines.

The exact location isn’t important at this time.

8. If you do not see both plot plan polylines, select Window> Fill Window

or Zoom

out until they come intoview.
9. Notice, too, that the line lengths and bearings are specified in feet and inches and degrees rather than decimal feetand Quadrant Bearings.

425

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot PlanslThis is because the settings in the CAD Defaults dialog, including the line length and angle formats, are viewspecific.

lSince this is not the plot plan drawing, these CAD Defaults do not need to be changed.

If you would like to use the Plot Plan perimeter polyline as your Terrain Perimeter, you must first delete the existing Terrain
Perimeter created in the Decks and Porches tutorial.

To convert to a Terrain Perimeter
1. Select the existing Terrain Perimeter and Deleteit.

2. Select the newly pasted plot plan perimeter polyline and click the Convert Polyline

edit button.

3. In the Convert Polyline dialog:lUnder the "Terrain" heading, select Terrain Perimeter.

l

Under the "Layer Options for Converted Object" heading, make sure that Default Layer for Converted Object
Type (Terrain Perimeter) is selected.

426

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

If the Terrain Perimeter option is greyed out, then a Terrain
Perimeter already exists in your plan. You will need tolocate and delete it before you can convert the polyline.

4. The Terrain Specification dialog will open next. On the GENERAL panel:lUncheck Automatic.

lSpecify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28".

5. On the LINE STYLE panel:l

Notice that the terrain is on the "Terrain Perimeter" layer.

lClick the Define button to the right of the Layer drop-down list.

l

In the Layer Display Options dialog, notice that "Plot Plan Text Style" is specified as the Text Style for thislayer in the Plot Plan Layer Set, then click OK.

6. Click OK once more to close the Terrain Specification dialog and apply your changes.
7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

DEFINING THE DIRECTION OF NORTH
By default, North is assumed to be straight up on-screen, which is typical of most plot plans. Most building entrances do not
face due South, however, so specifying a different direction for North is often necessary.
The North Pointer tool allows you to specify a different direction for North, and affecting the direction of sunlight andshadows, as well as where Quadrant Bearings are measured from.

To add a North Pointer1. Select CAD> North Pointer, then click and drag to create a North Pointer.

2. The North Pointer should initially be drawn so that it points straight up on-screen.
3. Notice that the bearings of the lot’s sides do not change when the North pointer is drawn straight up.

427

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

Currently, the back line of the lot is oriented at an angle on the right side of the polyline. It should, however, be parallelwith the back of the house, or horizontal on-screen. The lot, setback lines, and North Pointer can be rotated together toachieve this.

To rotate the lot
1. Select the setback polyline, Terrain Perimeter, and North Pointer as a group:l

Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the setback polyline to select it.

lHold down the Shift key and click on the plot plan perimeter to add it to the selection set.

lWith the Shift key still pressed, click on the North Pointer to add it to the selection set, as well.

2. With these three objects selected, click the Rotate handle and drag in a counterclockwise motion until the back edgeof the lot appears perpendicular on-screen.
3. To override Angle Snaps, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key while dragging.

If you need to rotate the lot so that a particular edge is at an exact angle, use the Transform/Replicate Object edit tool.
In this example, the back lot line needs to be parallel to the back wall of Chic Cottage.

To rotate the lot to a specific angle
1. Make a note of the angle of the back lot line. Here, it is -1°30’ 25".
2. Select the setback polyline, Terrain Perimeter, and North Pointer as a group, as described above, and click theTransform/Replicate Object
edit button.

428

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

3. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:l

Check the box beside Rotate.

lClick the Number Style button, and in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dialog, select Degrees, Minutes,
Seconds as the Angle Style and click OK.

lReturning to the Transform/Replicate Object dialog, type 1 30 25 in the Angle field.

lPress the Tab key and confirm that the value updates to 1° 30’ 25"lMake sure the Relative Angle radio button is selected and click OK.

4. Before moving on, be sure to Save

your work.

POSITIONING THE STRUCTURE
If a point on the building needs to be located a particular distance from the lot line, or at a particular point relative to a lot
corner, the lot lines can now be moved to meet that requirement. Here, the lot will be positioned so that the main roof at the429

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

back right corner is 50’ from the back setback line, and 30’ from the right setback line.

To position a structure using dimensions
1. Zoom in on the back right portion of the lot so that the back setback line and the back corner of the main roof can beclearly seen.
2. Select CAD> Dimensions> End to End Dimension, then click and drag a dimension line from the roof corner tothe setback line.
3. Click the Select Objects button, then click on the setback polyline to select it. Hold down the Shift key and click on
the Terrain Perimeter to add it to the selection set.
4. With the two objects selected, click on the End to End Dimension line.

5. In the inline text field, type 50’ and press the Enter key.
When the roof line or wall in question is not parallel to the setback line that it needs to be measured from, a different
method can be used.

To position a structure using CAD points
1. Select CAD> Point> Place Point, and then click at a reference point along the perimeter of the building or, as inthis example the corner of the roof.
2. Select CAD> Points> Input Point

to open the New CAD Point dialog.

430

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plansl

Select Relative to Current Point.

l

Make sure that Polar is unchecked.

lUsing the X Position and Y Position fields, specify the distance that a known point on the property line shouldbe from the Current Point placed in step 2.

lHere, a value of 30’ is specified for the Y Position.

3. When you click OK, a point is created at the specified location. Use this point as a reference to accurately position
the setback lines and Terrain Perimeter.

4. Select CAD> Dimensions> Tape Measure, then:l

Click and drag a temporary dimension line from the Current Point to the setback line.

l

Make a note of the distance. Here, it is 3’ 9".

5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the setback polyline to select it. Hold down the Shift key andclick on the Terrain Perimeter to add it to the selection set.
6. With the two objects selected, click the Transform/Replicate Object

431

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

7. In the Transform/Replicate Object dialog:lUncheck the box beside Rotate.

l

Check the box beside Move.

lSpecify the distance that you need to move the selected objects in the X Delta or Y Delta field.

lHere, the X Delta is specified as - 3’ 9". A negative value is used because the selected objects need to move toleft, or in the negative direction along the X axis.

8. Press the Tab key and notice that the value changes to -3.75’. This is because Decimal Feet is still the specified
Number Style.
l

Click the Number Style button and change the Number Style to Fractional Inches.

lChange the Angle Style to Degrees, as well.

l

Click OK to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

9. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
Currently, there are two files open: Chic Cottage - Plot Plan and CHIC COTTAGE CURRENT. Chic Cottage - Plot Plan isa special file created specifically for the purpose of drawing a plot plan. Click on its tab to make it the current view, selectFile> Saveand then File> Close View.
Next, with CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT open, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a copy of the file witha different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Lot Lines.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

432

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Plot Plans

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating a plot plan. It also discussed the important default settings associatedwith drawing CAD objects. These defaults include Default Sets and CAD Defaults.
To save a new plan file412

To switch to a different saved plan view414

To set the CAD Defaults

414

To define the starting point416

To create a plot plan polyline

416

To correct an error

419

To reverse the direction of a property line419

To create a curved property line420

To display line length, bearing, and radius422

To create setback lines423

To place the setback polyline on a new layer424

To copy the plot plan polyline into plan view425

To convert to a Terrain Perimeter426

To add a North Pointer427

To rotate the lot

428

To rotate the lot to a specific angle

428

To position a structure using dimensions

430

To position a structure using CAD points

430

To save a plan revision

432

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 22 - Plot Plans
What is the name of the drawing tool that lets you define lines and arcs by entering their length and bearing?
l

The Input Line tool to create a series of lines with specific starting points, lengths and angles. These lines can then be
converted into arcs using the Change Line/Arc edit tool.

Where can you specify that the length values in dialog boxes be entered using feet instead of inches?
l

To change the format used for length values in dialog boxes, click the Number Style button at the bottom of most
dialogs to open the Number Style/Angle Style dialog.

In what dialog can you specify that the angles of polyline edges be described using Quadrant Bearings in plan view?
l

The angle format of polyline edges is set in the CAD Defaults dialog.

What Edit Behavior is useful for creating setback lines?
l

The Concentric Edit Behavior can be used to create a resized copy of the plot plan polyline that represents setbacklines.

What edit tool allows you to change a CAD polyline into a Terrain Perimeter?

433

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevationl

The Convert Polyline edit tool allows you to change a regular CAD polyline into a variety of polyline-based objects
such as a Terrain Perimeter.

What edit tool can be used to rotate the Terrain, setback lines, and North Pointer to a specific angle?
l

The Transform/Replicate Object edit tool allows you to rotate a selected object or objects to a specific angle.

Terrain Elevation
Adding elevation data to a plan allows you to model sloping terrain.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating sloped terrain. Concepts introduced include:
File Management434

Productivity Tips

434

Setting the Defaults

435

Using Plan Views

436

Adjusting the Building Pad Height

437

Importing Elevation Data

437

Drawing Elevation Data

437

Controlling the Terrain’s Slope

441

Adding a Retaining Wall

448

Adding Annotations

451

Creating File Revisions

451

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Plot Plans tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Lot Lines and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Lot Lines.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See "File Management" on page 4 of theExterior Walls Tutorial.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to add elevation data to terrain, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

434

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

Drawing and Editingl

The distance between two Elevation Lines with different Elevation values influences how steep the terrain not justbetween them but also beyond.

lControl the height of the building relative to the terrain using the Building Pad settings in the Terrain Specification
dialog.

Contentl

Site plans and elevation data are project-specific, but you can still leverage existing content to improve your efficiency
by importing elevation data from DXF/DWG, text, and GPS files.

InterfacelAn important angle like that of a lot line can be added to the list of Allowed Angles, making it easy to draw additional
objects at that exact angle.

lTiling 2D and 3D views is often helpful when drawing and editing Elevation Data.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select Objectsl‘ - Layer Display OptionslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating adding elevation data to a plan, it is a good idea to set your CAD and Annotation Defaults in advance.
Before Elevation Data can be drawn or imported, a Terrain Perimeter must be created. See "Converting a Plot Plan into
Terrain" on page 425 of the Plot Plans Tutorial.
When working with Elevation Data, it is helpful make sure Object Snaps are toggled on. Select Edit> Snap Settings andconfirm that there is a small check mark in the icon to the left of Object Snaps.
In the Plot Plans tutorial, a lot perimeter with accurately angled sides was created and then copied into the CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plan. When adding elevation data to this plan, being able to snap to those specific angles can be
useful.

To specify Allowed Angles
1. Select Edit> Default Settingsand in the Default Settings dialog, click on "Plan" in the list then click the Edit

button.
2. In the General Plan Defaults dialog, click the Number Style button at the bottom of the dialog and in the Dialog
Number/Angle Style dialog, select Quadrant Bearings as the Angle Style and click OK.

435

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

3. Returning to the General Plan Defaults dialog:lUnder the Allowed Angles heading, check the box beside Additional Angles.

l

In the first Additional Angles field, type the bearing of the angled perimeter line on the right side of the lot:
S50° 7' 10"W.

l

Press the Tab key to update the information in the dialog and notice that the format of S50° 7' 10"W does notchange.

4. The settings in the Dialog Number/Angle Style dialog affect the formatting of values entered in all dialogs, andQuadrant Bearings are only useful in specific situations, so:lClick the Number Style button and specify Degrees as the Angle Style again and click OK.

l

Notice that the angle is now described in degrees.

5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
Several different Saved Plan Views have been used in previous tutorials. Terrain and landscaping is another example of adrawing task that is made easier and more efficient by using a Saved Plan View created for that purpose.
In the Chic Cottage Roof tutorial, the Roof Plan View and Working Plan View were open at the same time and the twoviews’ appearance and settings were compared. Then, the Working Plan View was closed and work was done in the Roof
Plan View. See "Using Plan Views" on page 145 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

To copy and customize a Saved Plan View
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser.
2. Click on the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.
3. Make a copy of the "Plot Plan View":lRight-click on the "Plot Plan View" and select Duplicate from the contextual menu.

l

In the New Saved Plan View dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for the new view, such as "Landscaping
Plan View" and click OK.

4. Notice that the new Saved Plan View opens in a second view window, and is the active view, then close the "PlotPlan View" view window.
5. If the Active Layer Display Options side window is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options.

436

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain ElevationlNotice that the "Plot Plan Layer Set" is active, just as it is in the "Plot Plan View".

lClick the Copy Set button and give the new layer set a short, descriptive name such as "Landscaping Layer
Set".

6. With the new layer set now active:lTurn on the display of the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer.

lLock the "Roof Planes" layer.

7. Select Tools> Active View> Save Active View

so the "Landscaping Layer Set" remains associated with the"Landscaping Plan View".
8. Saveyour work.

ADJUSTING THE BUILDING PAD HEIGHT
When a Terrain Perimeter was created in the Decks and Porches tutorial, the Building Pad Elevation was set 28" below themain floor level. See "To create a Terrain Perimeter" on page 121 of the Decks and Porches Tutorial.
That original terrain was deleted and replaced in the Plot Plans tutorial, but the original Building Pad Elevation places theterrain just below the garage floor and should still be used

To set the building pad elevation
1. Select Terrain> Terrain Specification.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Terrain Specification dialog:lUnder the Building Pad heading, uncheck Automatic.

lSpecify the Subfloor Height Above Terrain as 28", then click OK.

lThis will place the terrain 28" below the first floor’s subfloor and about 1" below the slab floor in the Garage.

3. Saveyour work.

IMPORTING ELEVATION DATA
Elevation data for a given parcel is often available in electronic format from a surveyor or assessor’s office. Importing thisdata can save considerable time in developing a 3D model of the terrain.
Elevation data can be imported from files of several different formats, as the "Importing Terrain Elevation Data" video
explains at video.chiefarchitect.com.

DRAWING ELEVATION DATA
Elevation data can be added to a plan using the Elevation Data Tools.

437

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

To draw an Elevation Line
1. Go to Floor 1 and select Window> Fill Window

or Zoom

2. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Line, then:out until the Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

lClick and drag to draw a horizontal line across the entire Terrain Perimeter.

l

The Elevation Line can snap to the edges of the Terrain Perimeter or it can extend past the edges.

lHere, the Elevation Lines extend past the edges because they are easier to see and select.

3. When prompted, click Yes to turn on the display of the "Terrain, Elevation Data" layer in the current view.
4. Select the Elevation Line and click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog, note that its Elevation value is 0".

6. Because Elevation Data is often described using feet and inches, click the Number Style button and in the Number
Style/Angle Style dialog:lSelect Decimal Feet as the Number Style.

l

Click OK to close both dialogs.

438

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

7. With the Elevation Line still selected:l

Use its Move edit handle to snap it to the front wall of the Garage.

lPress the Down Arrow key once to move it 1" from the wall.

Sometimes, Elevation Data can be best worked on and understood when 2D and 3D views are tiled.

To create a slope
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview
2. Select Window> Tile Vertically.

to tile the overview and plan views side by side.

3. Click and drag with the Mouse-Orbit Camera

tool active to orbit the camera around to the right side of themodel so you can better see the slope as it is created.
4. Click in the plan view to make it active, then click the Select Objects
select it.

439

button and click on the Elevation Line toChief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

5. Create a copy of the Elevation Line:l

Click the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the line’s Move edit handle and drag downward towards the bottom of the Terrain Perimeter.

lWhen the mouse pointer is between the bottom setback line and the edge of the terrain, release the mousebutton to create a copy of the Elevation Line at that location.

lNotice that in the 3D Overview window, no change is made to the terrain’s slope.

6. With the newly pasted Elevation Line selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

7. On the GENERAL panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog:lNote that like the original, its Elevation value is 0".

lChange this value to -8’.

lClick OK.

8. In the plan view window, notice that there are now evenly-spaced, horizontal contour lines displaying throughout the
Terrain Perimeter.
9. In the Overview window, notice that the terrain features a single, continuous slope from the front of the lot to the
back.

440

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

10. When you are finished, Save

your work.

CONTROLLING THE TERRAIN’S SLOPE
To produce terrain that changes height, you simply need to add two pieces of Elevation Data with different Elevation values.
To control the slope that is produced, however, you will need to add additional Elevation Data and modify the spacing andheight.

To create changes in slope
1. In the plan view window, select the original Elevation Line and make another copy of it:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the line’s Move edit handle and drag upward towards the back of the Porch.

lWhen the mouse pointer reaches the back of the Porch, release the mouse button to create a copy of the Elevation
Line at that location.

2. In the plan view window, notice:441

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevationl

The contour lines above the top two Elevation Lines are more spread out than those located below them.

l

The contour numbers indicate that the slope continues to climb upward towards the back of the lot.

3. In the 3D Overview window, note that the terrain’s slope flattens out near the front of the house but slowly begins toincrease in elevation again.
4. Move the Elevation Line from the back of the Porch to the back of the Deck and notice that the terrain flattens out
around the house as well as at the back of the lot.

5. Create one more copy of the original Elevation Line near the top edge of the Terrain Perimeter and specify its
Elevation as 6’.

The steepness of a slope is determined by the difference between two elevation lines and the distance between them.

To control slope steepness
1. Select the Elevation Line near the top of the Terrain Perimeter and using its edit handles or Temporary Dimensions,move the new Elevation Line about 4’ from the back of the Deck.

442

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Notice what happens:l

The terrain increases in height by 6’ over a span of only 4’, which produces a steep slope from the Deck that
continues to the back of the lot.

l

In order to produce a smoothly curving terrain that passes through the two Elevation Lines at the back of the
Deck as well as the two other Elevation Lines, a wave shape is created, with a trough located between the two
Elevation Lines at 0’.

3. Now move the selected Elevation Line about 2’ down from the back setback line.

4. Create a copy of the back Elevation Line located between it and the back of the Deck.
5. With this new Elevation Line selected, specify its Elevation value as 5’ and position it 3’ from the back Elevation
Line.

443

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

6. Notice that the slope steepness is shallow behind the Deck but increases near the back of the lot.
Slope direction can be modified by simply changing the angles of your Elevation Lines. There are a number of ways to do
this.
To avoid conflicting data and unexpected results, ElevationLines with different Elevation values should never touch or cross
one another.

To set slope direction
1. Select and rotate the top two Elevation Lines as a group:l

Click on the top Elevation Line.

l

Hold down the Shift key and click on the Elevation Line located below it.

lClick and slowly drag the triangular Rotate edit handle in a clockwise direction.

lNotice that the rotated angle is stated in the Status Bar, near the center.

lWhen the selection is rotated to 15°, release the mouse button.

444

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Select the top Elevation Line and move one of its ends:lClick and drag the square Resize handle located on the right end of the Elevation Line.

lDrag upward until the line snaps at a 15° angle relative to its original orientation.

l

Now hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key to override movement restrictions and drag downward.

lWhen the Status Bar reports a value of around 13°, release the mouse button.

3. To specify a precise angle, click the Open Object

edit button. On the SELECTED LINE panel of the Elevation

Line Specification dialog:lLock the Center.

lSpecify an Angle of -13° and click OK.

4. Select the bottom Elevation Line located near the front of the lot and make it parallel to the chord of the curved lotedge:lClick the Make Parallel

edit button.

lMove the mouse pointer over the bottom edge of either the Terrain Perimeter or the setback lines polyline, neareither corner.

lWhen the polyline becomes highlighted and a nearly horizontal, dashed alignment axis displays, click once.

5. To confirm that the line's angle matches that of the arc's chord, click the Open Object

edit button.

6. On the SELECTED LINE panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog, note the Angle value and click Cancel.
7. Select the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter or the setback lines polyline and click the Open Object

edit

button.
8. On the SELECTED ARC panel of the dialog:lConfirm that the Chord Angle equals the angle of the line, then click Cancel.

lNote that the same angle can be described in one of two ways: using a positive value between 0° and 180°, or
using a negative value between 0° and -180°.

445

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

To create a curved elevation line
1. Select the Elevation Line located near the curved front edge of the Terrain Perimeter.
2. Click the Change Line/Arc

edit button.

3. Click the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag downward to change the location of the arc’s center point.

4. With the arc still selected, click the Open Object

button.

5. On the SELECTED ARC panel of the Elevation Line Specification dialog:lClick the radio button beside Chord to Lock it.

lSpecify the Radius as 450’, then click OK.

An Elevation Polyline is created when two or more Elevation Lines are snapped together. When an Elevation Polyline forms
a closed shape, the result is an Elevation Region. There are several ways to create Elevation Polylines.

To create an Elevation Polyline
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options. In the Active Layer Display Options side

window:l

Press the T key on your keyboard to automatically scroll to the layer names that begin with the letter T.

lLocate the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer and click once in the "Disp" column to remove the check markand turn off this layer in this view again.

446

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

2. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation Line, then:lMove the mouse pointer to the right side of the Terrain Perimeter, between the Elevation Line at back of the
Deck and the lowest end of the angled Elevation Lines.

lClick and drag to draw a horizontal Elevation Line that ends in the middle of the terrain.

3. With the Elevation Line

tool still selected:lMove the mouse pointer over the left end of the new Elevation Line.

l

Click the diamond-shaped edit handle and drag upward and to the left to draw an angled Elevation Line.

l

When the Status Bar reports that the angle of the new Elevation Line is 15° and the line extends through theedge of the Terrain Perimeter, release the mouse button.

l

A polyline with two segments is created. Its initial Elevation value is 0" and does not need to be changed.

447

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

4. Click on the Elevation Line located at the back of the Deck to select it, then:lClick the Add Breakedit button.

lMove the mouse pointer over the right side of the line.

l

Click once to add a new corner and edit handle at that location.

5. Click on the square edit handle located to the right end of new corner and drag downward. When the new line
segment reaches the middle of the house, release the mouse button.
6. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING A RETAINING WALL
Retaining Walls are different from other types of walls in that the Elevation Data on either side of them does not interact
with each other.

To draw a retaining wall
1. In both the plan view and Overview windows, Zoom

in on the back right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.

2. Click in the plan view window to make it the active view and select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Curb> Straight
Retaining Wall
. Next:448

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevationl

Click on the setback polyline, just below the lowest angled Elevation Line.

lDrag in a downward direction, following the path of the setback line.

lBefore the retaining wall preview outline reaches the horizontal Elevation Line, release the mouse button.

3. With the Straight Retaining Wall

tool still selected:lMove the mouse pointer over the top end of the new Retaining Wall.

l

Click and drag upwards and to the left to draw a new angled Retaining Wall.

l

When the Status Bar reports that the angle of the new wall is 15°, release the mouse button.

4. Select Window> Fill Window

or Zoom

out until entire top setback line can be seen.

449

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

5. Select the angled retaining wall, then click and drag its left end edit handle until it reaches the top setback line.

The default height of a retaining wall is determined by the height of the terrain on either side of it.

To specify a retaining wall’s top and bottom heights
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the angled Elevation Line located just above the new Retaining

Wall.
2. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the line is from the wall and in the inline text field, type 8"
and press the Enter key.
3. Select the Elevation Polyline located just below the retaining wall and use the Add Breakedit tool to add four

new breaks to the line.
4. Use the Elevation Polyline’s edit handles to reshape it so that two edges are parallel to the retaining walls.
5. Use Temporary Dimensions to position those two edges 8" from the retaining walls.

6. Remember to Save

your work.

450

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Terrain Elevation

ADDING ANNOTATIONSThe Plot Plans Tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths andbearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additionalannotations that you may need. For example:l

Use the Leader Line tool to add information about the Retaining Wall. See "To use a text macro in rich text
annotations" on page 343 of the Light Fixtures Tutorial.

l

Use a Dimension Line with Additional Text to annotate the setback lines. See "To create a dimension line withadditional text" on page 164 of the Chic Cottage Roof Tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Terrain.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding elevation data to create sloped terrain. It also discussed the importantdefault settings associated with drawing CAD objects. These defaults include Default Sets and CAD Defaults.

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 23 - Terrain Elevation
What dialog is the best place to make adjustments to the height of the terrain relative to the building?
l

The height of the building pad can be specified on the General panel of the Terrain Specification dialog.

What is required in order to have terrain that slopes?
l

To create a slope, at least two Elevation Data objects with different Elevation values must be present in the plan.

How can you turn on the display of contour lines in plan view?
l

The display of the "Terrain, Primary Contours" layer can be turned on and off in the Layer Display Options dialog.

What is the name of the edit tool that changes a straight line into an arc?
l

The Change Line/Arc edit button changes a selected line into an arc, or vice versa.

What is the name of the edit tool that lets you add a new edge to a line or polyline?

451

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roadsl

The Add Break edit tool allows you to divide a line or polyline edge in two separate segments, creating a new corneredit handle between them.

What determines the height of a Retaining Wall?
l

The default height of a retaining wall is determined by the height of the terrain on either side of it.

Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads
Roads, sidewalks, and driveways are an important aspect of a landscaping plan.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating roads, driveways, and sidewalks. Concepts introduced
include:File Management452

Productivity Tips

452

Setting the Defaults

453

Using Plan Views

453

Drawing a Road

453

Adding a Driveway

459

Creating Sidewalks

461

Adding Annotations

464

Creating File Revisions

465

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Terrain Elevation tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic Cottage-Terrain and CHIC
COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue working. However,
Chic Cottage-Terrain.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 465.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to draw roads, driveways, and sidewalks, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglRoad objects only display in 3D views where they cross the Terrain Perimeter.

l

To override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments as you draw or edit, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key.

452

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Interfacell

The Number Style/Angle Style dialog controls how length values are entered and display in dialogs and the Status Bar.
When working with large objects like a road, it can be helpful to set the Dialog Number Style as Feet and Fractional
Inches instead of Fractional Inches.
When drawing and editing road objects, it is usually helpful to make sure that Object Snaps

are toggled on.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whendrawing road objects, it’s a good idea to begin by setting the Road, Driveway, and Sidewalk Defaults to meet your needs.

USING PLAN VIEWS
When a plan file is first opened, a single plan view window is active. Plan files can support multiple Saved Plan Views withcustomized settings for a range of purposes and it is a good idea to consider which plan view to work in for each task.
The Landscaping Plan View is well suited for adding hardscaping to a plan. See "To copy and customize a Saved Plan
View" on page 436 of the Terrain Elevation Tutorial.

DRAWING A ROAD
The location of roads is an important consideration when developing a landscaping plan and are typically included in site
maps, as well.

To set the road defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand thecategory, select "Road" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Road Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 28’.
3. On the CURB panel, note that roads can generate raised curbs along their edges and that those curbs can cut
driveways and sidewalks.
4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.

453

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To draw and edit a road
1. Go to Floor 1 and select Window> Fill Window
2. Select Terrain> Road> Straight Road

or Zoom

out until the Terrain Perimeter can be seen.

, then:lMove the mouse pointer over the bottom right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.

l

Click and drag to the left to draw a road across the bottom of the Terrain Perimeter.

lMove the mouse pointer over the lower left corner, and when a Midpoint

Snap Indicator displays and theRoad preview outline angles downward slightly, release the mouse button.
3. Click on the road to select it, then click the Change Line/Arc

edit button. Next:lClick the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag it toward the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter.

lWhen you see the On Object

Snap Indicator, release the mouse button.

454

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

4. With the road still selected, click the Point to Point Moveedit button, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the top edge of the road.

l

When the MidpointlMove the mouse pointer over the curved edge of the Terrain Perimeter.

lWhen the Midpoint

Snap Indicator displays, click the mouse button.

Snap Indicator displays, click the mouse button.

5. Click the road’s right end edit handle and drag to the right:lMove the mouse pointer over the bottom right corner of the Terrain Perimeter.

lWhen the Endpoint

Snap Indicator displays, release the mouse button.

455

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

Road stripes are often found along the center line of a road, but can be placed anywhere within a road. Here, a road stripe
will mark out a bike lane.

To add a road stripe
1. Select Terrain> Road> Road Stripe, then click and drag from the midpoint on the left side of the road to themid point on the right.
2. Click on the new road stripe to select it and click the Change Line/Arc

edit button.

3. Click and drag the triangular Reshape edit handle towards the center of the road. When the Midpoint

Snap

Indicator displays, release the mouse button.

4. With the Road Stripe still selected:lClick on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Road Stripe is from the bottom edge of the road.

l

In the inline text field, type 6’ and press the Enter key.

In order to display in 3D views, the road must be located inside the Terrain Perimeter.

456

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To display a road in 3D views
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the Terrain Perimeter to select it.

2. Create a copy of the Terrain Perimeter in the same location as the original:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the Paste Hold Positionl

A copy of the Terrain Perimeter is created in the same location as the original, and is selected.

l

Since only one Terrain Perimeter can exist in a plan, the new copy is a CAD polyline.

edit button.

3. With the newly created polyline selected, click the Open Object

edit button. On the Line Style panel of the

Polyline Specification dialog, select "CAD, Plot Plan" from the Layer drop-down list and click OK.
4. Select Terrain Perimeter again.

ll

If the copied polyline becomes selected instead, click the Select Next Object

edit button.

The type of object that is currently selected is stated on the left side of the Status Bar. The Terrain Perimeter
will be described as "Terrain", while the copied polyline will be described as a "Special Polyline".

5. Click the small Resize edit handle on the curved edge and drag downward until the curved polyline edge snaps tobottom edge of road.

457

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

6. With Terrain still selected, click the Open Object

edit button. On the LINE STYLE panel of the Terrain

Specification dialog, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle, click OK.
7. Create a Perspective Full Overview

to see the results.

Roads are flat across their width and measure their height from the height of the terrain along their center line.

458

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To control road height
1. Select Window> Swap Views, to return to plan view without closing the overview camera.

2. Select the curved Elevation Line located near the bottom of the plot plan polyline. Next:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click and drag the Elevation Line’s Move edit handle downward.

lWhen the mouse pointer is positioned near the center of the road, release the mouse button to create a new
curved Elevation Line at that location.

3. Select Window> Swap Views, to return to the overview and notice that the slope down to the road is more

gradual now.

4. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the road and click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Road Specification dialog, note that the Height is 1" and click Cancel.
6. When you are finished, select File> Close View and Save

ADDING A DRIVEWAY
A driveway can now be added to the plan.

459

your work.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To set the driveway defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand thecategory, select "Driveway" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Driveway Defaults dialog:lSpecify the Width as 13’.

lUnder the Flare heading, check the box beside End and specify the Width as 3’.

3. On the MATERIALS panel, select the "Driveway" component in the list on the left, then click the Select Material
button.
4. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog, search for and select the "Blacktop 1" material,
then click OK.
5. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw a driveway
1. Select Terrain> Driveway> Straight DrivewaylMove your mouse pointer in front of the Garage.

lWhen the Midpoint

then:

Snap Indicator displays, click and drag straight down.

2. When the driveway preview outline reaches the road, release the mouse button and create a driveway.

460

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

3. Create a Camera view near the intersection of the driveway and the road to see the results.

CREATING SIDEWALKS
Sidewalks can be generated using two different tools in Chief Architect Premier.

To set the sidewalk defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, click the arrow beside "Terrain" to expand thecategory, select "Sidewalk" and click the Edit button.
2. On the GENERAL panel of the Sidewalk Defaults dialog, specify the Width as 60" or 5’.
3. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To generate automatic sidewalks
1. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the road to select it.

2. Click the Auto Generate Sidewalks

edit button.

3. In the Automatically Generate Sidewalks dialog, specify the Offset from Road as 60" and click OK.
4. Create a Perspective Full Overview and notice that the sidewalk on the far side of the road does not display in 3D
views because it is located outside the Terrain Perimeter.
5. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.

461

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

To draw a sidewalk
1. Zoomin on the area around the front porch stairs.

2. Select Terrain> Terrain> Straight Sidewalk, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the stairs.

lWhen a Midpoint

snap indicator displays, click and drag straight down several plan feet to draw asidewalk.
3. Click along the sidewalk’s right side and drag to draw a second segment towards the driveway.

4. Click on the horizontal sidewalk segment to select it, then click and drag its Move edit handle downward until it

462

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

snaps to the bottom edge of the vertical segment.

A curved sidewalk can be created instead of an L-shape with straight sides.

To create a curved sidewalk
1. Begin by selecting the two sidewalk segments created above and Deleting
2. Select Terrain> Sidewalk> Straight Sidewalkthem.

, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the stairs.

lWhen a Midpoint

snap indicator displays, click and drag at an angle, down and towards the right until itreaches the left edge of the driveway.
l

Notice the Status Bar reports the angle of the sidewalk as it is being drawn. When the Status Bar reports andangle of 315°, release the mouse button.

463

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads

3. Select the newly drawn sidewalk and click the Change Line/Arc

edit button. Then:l

Click the arc’s triangular Reshape edit handle and drag it down and to the left.

lWhen the top edge becomes a horizontal line and the right edge becomes a vertical line, release the mousebutton.

l

To override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments to the sidewalk’s arc, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key
while you drag the Reshape edit handle.

4. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSThe Plot Plans Tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths andbearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additionalannotations that you may need. For example:lInsert a street name for the Road object using its label. See "To specify an automatic label" on page 319 of the
Appliances and Fixtures Tutorial.

l

Add information about the driveway and front sidewalk using Rich Text. See "To set the Snap Settings" on page 360of the Floor Framing Tutorial.

464

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roadsl

Create a custom hardscaping schedule with information about the sidewalk, driveway, and retaining wall. See Creating
Schedules on page 314.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;for example, Chic Cottage-Driveway.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for generating and editing roads, driveways, and sidewalks.
To set the road defaults

453

To draw and edit a road454

To add a road stripe

456

To display a road in 3D views457

To control road height459

To set the driveway defaults

460

To draw a driveway

460

To set the sidewalk defaults

461

To generate automatic sidewalks

461

To draw a sidewalk462

To create a curved sidewalk463

To save a plan revision

465

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 24 - Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads
Where can you set the default for whether driveways cut the curb on roads?
l

You can specify raised curbs along roads and whether or not the curbs cut driveways and sidewalks on the Curb panelof the Road Defaults dialog.

Where must road objects be located in order to be seen in 3D views?
lOnly the portions of road objects that are located within the Terrain Perimeter can be seen in 3D views.

465

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Where can you specify that driveways have flares at their ends?
lDriveway flares can be specified on the General panel of the Driveway Defaults and Driveway Specification dialogs.

What edit tool changes a straight road object into one with a curve?
l

The Change Line/Arc edit button changes a selected line-based object into an arc, or vice versa.

Landscaping Design
With the elevation data and hardscaping in place, planting areas can be created.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating planting areas. Concepts introduced include:
To modify a custom Layer Set

468

To set the material defaults for Garden Beds

468

To create and edit a Garden Bed469

To create a planting border472

To align the planting border edges with other objects

474

To set the fencing defaults

477

To draw and customize fencing

477

To place a gate478

To search using the Plant Chooser

479

To browse the Plants library category

480

To modify plant images

480

To block plants into groups481

To save a plan revision

482

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Driveways, Sidewalks, and Roads tutorial left off. At this point, both the Chic CottageDriveway and CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plans contain the same information, so you could open either one and continue
working. However, Chic Cottage-Driveway.plan was created specifically to serve as a revision or archive file so it will beleft unchanged.
To continue working on the Chic Cottage project, select File> Open Plan

. If need be, browse to Documents\Chic

Cottage, select CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Open Recent Files and choose CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT from the Recent Files List. The
Recent Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing
where your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See File Management on page 4.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to draw terrain features and place plants, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

466

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Drawing and Editingl

The Selected Edge of a polyline-based object can be edited in a variety of ways using the edit tools.

lTo override movement restrictions and make fine adjustments as you draw or edit, hold down the Ctrl/⌘ key.

Contentl

A selection of plant images is available for download from the Chief Architect 3D Library. Select Library> Get
Additional Content Online
to launch your default web browser to that page.

Interfacell

The Status Bar at the bottom of the program window reports useful information like the angle an object is being drawn
at and what type of object is selected.
When drawing and editing a plot plan polyline, it may be helpful to turn off Grid Snaps. Object Snaps,

however, are often very helpful.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select Objectsl

3 - Break edit toollCtrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + Z - Undol

Ctrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Adding
landscaping features, there are several defaults to bear in mind.
Before drawing Fencing, it is a good idea to set the Fencing Defaults to meet your needs. See To set the fencing defaults on
page 477.
When drawing Garden Beds, setting the default material for "Dirt" in the Material Defaults dialog can be helpful. See To set
the material defaults for Garden Beds on page 468.
The default material for generic Terrain Features can also be set; however, Terrain Features use the "Foundation/Slab"material default, which is also the default for slabs and foundation wall footings, so it is best to leave as a concrete material.

USING PLAN VIEWS
In the Terrain Elevation tutorial, a custom Landscaping layer set was created. This layer set can be modified to make it evenbetter suited for working on landscaping drawings.

467

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To modify a custom Layer Set
1. If it is not already open, select View> Active Layer Display Options
2.

.

In the Active Layer Display Options side window, lock the "Roads" and "Roads, Sidewalks" layers:

3. Saveyour work.

CREATING TERRAIN FEATURES
Terrain Features are used to apply special materials over the surface of the terrain - from paving to mulch to water.

To set the material defaults for Garden Beds
1. Select Edit> Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, select "Materials" and click the Edit button.

2. In the Material Defaults dialog, select the "Dirt" component from the list on the left and click the Select Material
button.
3. On the LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material dialog:l

The content is filtered by Typematerial's "Mulch" Folder

so that it only lists Materials and is additionally filtered to show the selected

located at Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Materials> Landscaping and

Roadways> Bark and Mulch> Mulch.
l

In the Folders panel, click the arrow to the left of the "Bark", "Mulch", or "Recycled Mulch" folder and choose
a material for your Garden Beds and click OK.

lHere, "Mulch - Dark" is used.

468

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs.
Garden Beds and other Terrain Features are closed polyline-based objects and can be drawn and edited like other closed
polylines.

To create and edit a Garden Bed
1. Zoomin on the right side of the front porch stairs.

2. Select Terrain> Garden Bed> Polyline Garden Bed, then:lMove your mouse pointer over the bottom left corner of the Garage.

lClick and drag up and to the left until the mouse pointer snaps to the back right corner side of the stairs, where
they meet the porch railing wall.

469

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. Click on the Garden Bed polyline to select it, then:lClick the square edit handle that displays on the bottom edge.

lDrag the handle down until the left.

lWhen it snaps to the top right corner of the sidewalk, release the mouse button.

4. Click the Add Breakedit button, then:lClick once on the right vertical edge of the Garden Bed, where it meets the corner of the Garage.

l

A new diamond-shaped corner edit handle is created at that point.

5. Select the square edit handle that displays just below the new corner handle and drag to the right until the Garden
Bed edge snaps to the driveway.
6. Click the edit handle at the Garden Bed’s bottom right corner and drag downward until it meets the point where thesidewalk meets the driveway.

470

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

7. Click on the angled edge of the Garden Bed to make it the Selected Edge, then:lClick the Change Line/Arc

edit button.

l

Click the triangular Reshape Arc edit button that displays along the curved edge.

lDrag downward until the curved edge snaps to the inside curve of the sidewalk.

471

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

8. The results can be seen in a camera view.

9. Select File> Close View to return to plan view.
A generic Terrain Feature can also be created using the Convert Polyline edit tool. To save time, existing objects are used to
produce the desired shape.

To create a planting border
1. Click the Select Objectslbutton, then click on the Terrain Perimeter.

Check the left side of the Status Bar at the bottom of the program window to confirm that the Terrain Perimeteris selected.

2. With the Terrain Perimeter selected, create an identical copy placed at the same location as the original:lClick the Copy/Paste

edit button.

l

Click the Paste Hold Position

edit button.

472

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. With the new polyline selected, click the Convert Polyline

edit button. In the Convert Polyline dialog, select theradio button beside Terrain Feature and click OK.
4. In the Terrain Feature Specification dialog:l

On the GENERAL panel, specify both the Terrain to Top and Thickness as 1".

l

On the LINE STYLE panel, click to add a check mark to the Layer Default check box to place this terrain
feature on the "Terrain Features" layer like the Garden Bed.

l

Also on the LINE STYLE panel, uncheck Show Length and Show Angle.

l

On the MATERIALS panel, notice that this feature has a concrete material assigned to it. Click the SelectMaterial button and choose the "Mulch - Dark" material.

lClick OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

5. With the Terrain Feature still selected, straighten the curved edge adjacent to the road:l

Click on the curved edge to make it the Selected Edge.

l

Click the Change Line/Arc

edit button.

6. Add two new corner edit handles along the bottom edge of the Terrain Feature:lClick the Add Breakedit button, then click the Sticky Modeedit button.

l

Click on the bottom edge of the Terrain Feature, near the left vertical property line.

l

Click once more on the bottom edge, this time near the right vertical property line.

l

Click the Main Edit Modeedit button.

7. Click the square edit handle located between the two new corner handles and drag upward past the back Deck railingof the house.

473

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

Additional edit tools along with Object Snaps can be used to align the Selected Edge of the Terrain Feature with otherobjects in the drawing such as the setback lines and Retaining Walls.

To align the planting border edges with other objects
1. Click on the inside vertical edge on the right side of the Terrain Feature to make it the Selected Edge.
2. Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular

edit button.

lMove the mouse pointer over the angled setback line on the right.

lWhen the special lot lines polyline becomes highlighted and a dashed alignment axis line displays along its
right edge, click once.

l

The angle of the Selected Edge changes, becoming parallel with the lot edge line.

474

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

3. Click the Selected Edge’s square move handle and drag it until it snaps to the angled setback line.

4. Repeat steps 1-3 to align the other two inside edges of the Terrain Feature with the back and left setback lines.

5. Add an extra inside edge that follows the back Retaining Wall:lWith the Terrain Feature still selected, click the Add Breakl

Click once on the inside edge that follows the back setback line, near the end of the back Retaining Wall.

475

edit button.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping DesignlA new diamond-shaped corner edit handle is created at the point where you click.

6. Click on the inside corner edit handle on the right side of the Terrain Feature, located behind the back Retaining
Wall, then:lDrag downward until the corner snaps to the back corner of the Retaining Walls.

lRelease the mouse button.

7. Using the edit handles, pull the bottom edges on each side of the polyline back so they do not extend past the
sidewalk.
8. Create a Camera

view to see the results.

When you are finished, select File> Close View and Save

your work.

DRAWING TERRAIN WALLS AND FENCING
Like Terrain Features but unlike regular walls, Terrain Walls and Fences follow the contours of the terrain.

476

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To set the fencing defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Walls" toexpand the category, select "Fencing", then click the Edit button.
2. On the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel of the Fencing Defaults dialog:lSpecify the Railing Height as 72".

lSpecify the Newels/Posts Height as 74".

l

Click the Library button to the right of the Type drop-down list for Panels.

3. In the Select Library Object dialog:l

Notice that the dialog opens with the current panel selected in the library tree list.

lBrowse to Chief Architect Core Catalogs> Architectural> Fences and Railings> Ironwork and select the "Pole"panel from the list.

lClick OK.

4. On the RAIL STYLE panel of the Fencing Defaults dialog:l

Check the boxes beside Include Top Rail and Include Bottom Rail.

l

Check Raise Bottom and specify the distance as 2".

5. On the RAILS panel:lSelect "Top Rail" in the rail profiles table.

lSpecify the Height and Width as 5 1/2" and 1 1/2", respectively.

l

Select "Bottom Rail" in the table and assign the same Height and Width values as the Top Rail.

6. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

To draw and customize fencing
1. Select Build> Fencing> Straight Fencing

then click and drag along the left vertical setback line, from the

sidewalk up to the back setback line.
2. Draw two more fences along the back and right angled setback lines.
3. Zoomllin on the back right corner of the lot and:

Notice that the fence drawn along the setback line has replaced the angled Retaining Wall at that location. This isbecause two wall objects cannot be drawn at the same location in Chief Architect.
Select File> Undo

until the Retaining Wall is restored.

477

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Click on the angled Retaining Wall near its bottom end to select it, then:lClick on the Move edit handle that displays along the wall’s edge at the point where you clicked.

l

Avoid the small square Move handles that display on the footing edges.

lDrag slowly towards the left.

lWhen an Endpoint

Snap Indicator displays at the original location of the wall’s bottom left corner, release

the mouse button.
5. Click the Select Objects

button, then select the Elevation Polyline that follows the angled Retaining Wall’s low

side. Use its Move edit handle to position it just outside the Retaining Wall’s footing line.

Because fencing is simply a special type of wall, a gate can be added just the way a door can.

To place a gate
1. Select View> Library Browser

to open the Library Browser.

2. In the Core Catalogs, browse to Architectural> Fences & Railings> Gates and select a gate. Here, the "Wrought Iron
Gate (arched)" is used.
3. Click on the back fence near the left corner to place the selected gate at that location.

478

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. Select the gate and click the Open Object

edit button.

5. On the GENERAL panel of the Interior Door Specification dialog, specify the Height as 72" and click OK.

PLACING PLANTS
Plants are represented using image objects that offer a high degree of realism without significantly increasing the surface
count of the 3D model.
The Plant Chooser allows you to search the plants in the library using a variety of parameters, including the plant’s common
name.

To search using the Plant Chooser
1. Open the Plant Chooser in either of two ways:lClick the Plant Chooser

button at the bottom of the Library Browser.

lSelect Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser.

lType “fir” in the Common Name field.

lClick the Search button at the bottom left corner.

l

The search results are listed on the right side of the dialog.

2. Above the search results, select the Common Name radio button.
3. Select a Balsam Fir from the search results, then:lClick the View Item button to open the Plant Information dialog, where you can read size and growing
information about the selected plant.

lClick the Close button to close the dialog, locate the plant in the Library Browser, and select it for placement.

4. Notice that your mouse pointer displays the Plant icon and that a preview of a 2D tree symbol follows it. Click once
to place a copy of the tree image at that location.

You can continue clicking to place more copies of the selected tree if you wish, or choose a different drawing tool.
You can also browse the Library Browser and select plants for placement in your plan.

479

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

To browse the Plants library category
1. If the Library Browser is not open, select View> Library Browser

to open it.

2. In the Core Catalogs, browse to Plants> Trees> Deciduous.
3. Note the many tree species to choose from. Many of these folders contain subfolders with different varieties of thatspecies.
4. Browse to Betula> Betula papyrifera and select the adult paper birch tree for placement.
5. Place two copies of the selected tree at the back right corner of the lot, in the planting area behind the retaining
walls.

Plants can be edited in both floor plan and 3D views. Making minor changes to plants can make multiple instances of thesame image look more natural.

To modify plant images
1. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Perspective Full Overview

and Orbit

the camera so the trees can beclearly seen.
2. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on one of the birch trees to select it.

3. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the IMAGE panel of the Plant Image Specification dialog, check thebox beside Reverse Image and click OK.

480

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

4. With the tree image still selected:lNotice that it has two edit handles: a Move handle at its center and a Resize handle along its top edge.

lClick and drag the resize handle upward to make the image larger or downward to make it smaller.

Some plants look best when clustered into groups.

To block plants into groups
1. Use the Plant Chooser or browse the library to find the Evergreen Shrub named "Rhododendron (cream)".
2. Place three instances of this shrub in an open space, away from other objects.

3. Edit the three plant images as described above.
4. When they look the way you want them to, select them as a group:l

Click the Select Objects

button, then click on one rhododendron to select it.

lHold down the Shift key, then click on the other two rhododendrons to add them to the selection set.

l

The total number of selected objects will be stated on the left side of the Status Bar.

481

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Design

5. With the three rhododendrons selected, click the Make Architectural Block

edit button.

6. The selected architectural block has two edit handles: a square Move handle and triangular rotate handle. Move theblock into the planting area behind the Retaining Walls and rotate it as you see fit.
7. Use the Copy/Paste

edit button to make additional copies of this architectural block along the length of theangled Retaining Wall, rotating each of them to a different angle.

8. Select one of the blocks and click the Explode Architectural Block

edit button. The individual plants can now

be edited individually.
9. When you are finished, Save

your work.

ADDING ANNOTATIONSThe Plot Plans tutorial explains how to create a plot plan complete with annotations in the form of lot line lengths andbearings, and setback lines. You can use any of the tools and techniques described in previous tutorials to add any additionalannotations that you may need. For example:
Add Rich Text to describe the privacy fence. See "To set the Snap Settings" on page 360 of the Floor Framing Tutorial.
Create a Plant Schedule. See "To add door and window schedules" on page 106 of the Doors and Windows Tutorial.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a plan revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Plan File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chic Cottage folder.
3. For the File name, type a the name of the project followed by a short description of the current state of the drawing;482

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Landscaping Designfor example, Chic Cottage-Landscaping.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for adding planting areas to a landscaping plan.
To modify a custom Layer Set

468

To set the material defaults for Garden Beds

468

To create and edit a Garden Bed469

To create a planting border472

To align the planting border edges with other objects

474

To set the fencing defaults

477

To draw and customize fencing

477

To place a gate478

To search using the Plant Chooser

479

To browse the Plants library category

480

To modify plant images

480

To block plants into groups481

To save a plan revision

482

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 25 - Landscaping Design
Where are the default materials for Garden Beds and regular Terrain Features set?
l

The default materials for Garden Beds and regular Terrain Features are set in the Material Defaults dialog:oThe default material for Garden Beds is the "Dirt" material.

o

The default material for regular Terrain Features is the "Foundation/Slab" material.

What edit tool creates a copy of an object at the same location as the original with one click?
l

The Copy and Paste in Place edit tool creates a copy of an object in the same location as the original.

What edit tool lets you change the angle of an object or an object edge to match that of another object?
l

The Make Parallel/Perpendicular lets you change the selected object or selected edge’s angle to match that of another .

What dialog lets you search the Library for the common names of plants?
l

The Plant Chooser dialog allows you to search for plants using a variety of criteria, including the common name.

483

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Tutorials

Layout Tutorials

Chapter 7

The Layout Tutorials describe best practices for creating layout files in Chief Architect for producing construction
documents:
In this tutorial you will learn about:

TOPICS
Layout Page Templates
Title Blocks and Borders
Sending Views to Layout

485
495
520

484

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

Layout Page Templates
The first step in creating an effective layout template file is to create the required page templates.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating and assigning layout page templates. Concepts introduced
include:File Management

485

Productivity Tips

485

Setting the Defaults

486

Specifying Layout Page Templates

486

Assigning Page Templates

488

Assigning Page Titles

490

Creating a Page Numbering Convention

491

Inserting Layout Pages

492

Creating File Revisions

494

FILE MANAGEMENT
Just as with plan files, it is very important that you use a file naming convention that meets your needs and organize yourfiles effectively. See "File Management" on page 4 of the Exterior Walls Tutorial.
Unlike most of the plan files in this series, the layout file created in this lesson is intended to be used as a template for
future projects rather than for one specific project.

To save a new layout file
1. Begin by selecting File> New Layout
2. Select File> Save As

to open a new, blank layout file.

. In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

3. Open the Chief Architect Premier X16 Data folder, then open the Templates folder.
4. For the File name, type MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE. You have now created a layout file that you can customize tomeet your needs.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create layout page templates, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Contentl

Layout page templates should be set up as part of your layout template files so that they are ready for use wheneveryou begin a new layout.

485

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page TemplatesInterfacel

The Project Browser side window lists the pages of the current layout file and provides a convenient way to organize
and access them.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslF6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. There are no default settings that come into play when setting up and assigning layout page templates; rather, thisinformation will serve as the part of the default setup in your layout template files.

SPECIFYING LAYOUT PAGE TEMPLATES
Layout Page Templates allow you to create one or more title blocks and borders and then assign them to the layout pages ofyour choice. Unlike regular pages with content, Layout Page Templates do not print as part of a print range.
In this example, two Page Templates will be specified: one for the cover sheet and general notes, and one for the sheets that
follow it.

To specify a page template
1. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down

to go to 0.

2. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information, and in the Layout Page Information dialog:l

Notice that the current Title is Page Template.

lChange the Title to "Standard Template".

lConfirm that Use as Page Template is checked under the Page Template Options heading.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

486

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

Page templates can also be specified in the Project Browser, which is docked to the right side of the program window by
default.

To specify a page template in the Project Browser
1. Click on the Project Browser side window tab to make it the active side window. If it is not open, select View>
Project Browser. Next:l

Click the arrow to the left of "Plan Views" to expand the category.

l

Right-click on the "Framing, Roof Plan View" and select Edit View from the contextual menu.

lClick the arrow next to the "Pages" folder to expand a list of the pages in the layout file that are currently inuse. In a new layout, only Pages 0 and 1 will be listed.

l

Notice the icons beside each page. Page 0 is specified as the currently "open" page, while Page 1 is a page with
content.
Page 1 is listed as a page with content because it has a pieceof text on it.

2. Right-click on Page 1 in the Project Browser and select Edit Page Information

487.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

3. In the Layout Page Information dialog:lDelete the information in the Label field.

lChange the Title to "Cover Sheet Template".

l

Check the box beside Use as Page Template and click OK.

4. In the Project Browser, notice that Page 1’s icon has changed and now indicates that it is a Page Template rather
than a page with content.

5. When you are finished, Save

your work.

Using the same steps, you can set aside layout pages for any additional Page Templates that you might need for different
disciplines and sheet types.

ASSIGNING PAGE TEMPLATES
Once multiple Page Templates have been created, they can be assigned to non-template pages: either blank or with content.
You can wait and do this when you actually send views to layout for a project, or you can save time and set aside pages for
specific purposes beforehand.

488

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

To assign the Cover Sheet Template
1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information.

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 2" from the Selected Page drop-down list and then:lUnder the Page Template Options heading, click arrow next to the Page Template and select "Cover Sheet
Template" from the drop-down list.

To assign the Standard page template
1. Still in the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then choose"Standard Template" from the Page Template drop-down list.

2. Repeat this process to assign the "Standard Template" to pages 4, 5, and 6.
3. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

489

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

4. In the Project Browser, notice that notice that pages 2 - 6 are now listed as blank pages.

5. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

ASSIGNING PAGE TITLES
A short, descriptive page title lets you identify the purpose that each layout page has been set up for.

To assign page titles
1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information.

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog:lSelect "Page 2" from the Selected Page drop-down list.

lSpecify the Title as Cover Sheet.

3. Next, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list and specify its Title as General Notes.
4. Next, select "Page 4" from the Selected Page drop-down list and specify its Title as Site Plan.
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.

490

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

6. In the Project Browser, notice that notice that pages 2 - 4 now have titles.

7. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

The remaining layout pages can be assigned Titles when their Page Numbers are assigned.

CREATING A PAGE NUMBERING CONVENTION
There are a number of ways to include page numbers on layout pages. The most versatile uses the Page Label and allows
you to set up custom page numbering conventions using the Layout Page Information dialog.
In your own layout template file, you can assign sheet numbers that you typically use in advance and use the numbering
convention of your choice. Here, a fairly typical variation of the US National CAD Standard page numbering convention isused.

To assign page numbers
1. Select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information.

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, select "Page 3" from the Selected Page drop-down list and then:lNote that its Title is General Notes.

lSpecify the Label as A0.#.

3. Select "Page 4" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:lNote that its Title is Site Plan.

lSpecify the Label as A1.#.

491

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

4. Select "Page 5" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:lSpecify its Title as Floor 1 Plan.

lSpecify the Label as A1.#.

5. Select "Page 6" from the Selected Page drop-down list, then:lSpecify that its Title as Electical Floor 1.

lSpecify the Label as E1.#.

6. Click OK to close the dialog and apply your changes.
7. In the Project Browser, notice that A0, A1, and E1 are all treated as separate prefixes.

If you type a pound sign # in the Label field, the characters
before it will be treated as a numbering prefix, and the # will
be replaced by the current page number on the layout sheet.

8. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

INSERTING LAYOUT PAGES
If you need to add additional disciplines, types, and/or pages, they can be easily inserted at any time: either in a specificproject or in your layout template file.

To insert new layout pages
1. Select Tools> Layout> Change Layout Page or click the button that reports the current page number and go to
page 5, which was set aside for the Floor 1 Plan.

2. Select Tools> Layout> Insert Page Before

to add a page before the current page. The original page 5 will

move to page 6, and will become the active page.

492

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

3. In the Project Browser, notice that page 5 has no sheet number or title.

4. Right-click on page 5 in the Project Browser and selectEdit Page Information. In the Layout Page Information
dialog:l

Notice that the new page’s Label and Title are blank.

lSpecify the Label as A1.#.

l

Specify the Title as Foundation Plan.

l

Confirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.

5. Right-click on page 6 in the Project Browser and select Insert Page After. Page 6 is unchanged, the new page
becomes page 7, and the original page 7 becomes page 8.

6. Right-click on the new page 7 and select Edit Page Information. In the Layout Page Information dialog:lSpecify the Label as A2.#.

lSpecify the Title as Elevations.

lConfirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.

7. Use the Insert Page Afterlcommand to add a new page after page 7.

Notice that the list of pages grows by one and that page 8 is listed as a blank page.

493

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Layout Page Templates

8. Right-click on page 8 and select Edit Page Information. In the Layout Page Information dialog:lSpecify the Label as A2.#.

lSpecify the Title as Sections.

lConfirm that the Page Template is "Standard Template", then click OK.

9. Remember to Save

your work.

Once your Page Templates have been defined as such, you can create a border and title block for each that matches how itwill be used. See Title Blocks and Borders on page 495.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a layout revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Layout File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chief Architect Premier X16 Data\Templates
folder.
3. For the File name, type My Layout Template as the name of the file followed by a short description of the current
state of the drawing; for example, My Layout Template_Page Templates.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for setting up page templates in a layout file.
To save a new layout file485

To specify a page template486

To specify a page template in the Project Browser

487

To assign the Cover Sheet Template

489

494

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To assign the Standard page template489

To assign page titles

490

To assign page numbers

491

To insert new layout pages

492

To save a layout revision

494

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 26 - Layout Page Templates
What is the name of the side window that lists all of the pages of the current layout file?
l

The Project Browser side window lists the pages of the current layout file and provides a convenient way to organize
and access them.

What are three categories of pages that are listed in this side window?
lPage templates, blank pages, and pages with content are listed in the Project Browser side window.

What information should be included on a page template?
l

Layout Page Templates should include any information that you would like to display identically on multiple pages:
typically, title blocks and borders.

What is the name of the dialog in which you can assign sheet titles to layout pages?
lSheet, or page, titles can be specified in the Layout Page Information dialog for each layout page.

What character can you type into a page’s Label to set up custom page numbering conventions?
l

If you type a pound sign # in the Label field, the characters before it will be treated as a numbering prefix, and the #will be replaced by a numeral 1 on the first page with that particular prefix in its Label, and will increase the number
by one on every page that follows if it too has the identical prefix in its Label.

Title Blocks and Borders
This tutorial describes tools and techniques for creating title blocks and borders for construction documents.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for creating title blocks and borders for construction documents.
Concepts introduced include:
File Management

496

Productivity Tips

496

Setting the Defaults

497

Setting up the Drawing Sheet

497

Drawing a Layout Border498

Creating a Title Block

501

Adding Title Block Text

504

Using Text Macros

507

495

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

Including a Revision Table

511

Creating a Cover Sheet Template

513

Creating File Revisions

518

Creating a Custom Layout Template

518

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Layout Page Templates tutorial left off. At this point, both the My Layout Template_Page
Templates and MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout files contain the same information, so you could open either one andcontinue working. However, My Layout Template_Page Templates.layout was created specifically to serve as a revision orarchive file so it will be left unchanged.
To continue working on MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE, select File> Open Layout. If need be, browse toDocuments\Chief Architect Premier X16 Data, select the file, and click Open.
Alternatively, select File> Recent Files and choose MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE from the Recent Files List. The Recent
Files List is a convenient way to access files you have been working on; however, it is not an alternative to knowing where
your files are located and having a good file revision strategy in place. See Creating File Revisions on page 518.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to create layout page templates, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and Editingl

The Center Object

edit tool can be used to center text and other CAD objects inside CAD polylines.

lText Macros can be added to report page numbers and other information automatically.

Contentl

Import an image of your company logo to display in your construction documents.

lCreate one or more layout template files that can be used whenever you begin a new layout.

lInterfacelWhen designing a layout title block and border, it is helpful to have Grid Snaps toggled on.

l

The Grid Snap Unit also determines how far a selected object is Nudged when the Arrow keys are pressed.

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlSpacebar - Select ObjectslArrow keys - Nudge selected objectl

F6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

Although Temporary Dimensions are toggled off in most of images in this tutorial, it is assumed that they are on for the
purposes of following the steps. Select View> Temporary Dimensions and confirm that there is a check mark in lower rightcorner of the tool icon.

496

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whencreating a layout title block and border, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before drawing a title block and border, you need to define the size and shape of the Drawing Sheet. See Setting up the
Drawing Sheet on page 497.
Grid Snaps are very useful when drawing and positioning CAD objects for a layout title block. You can set the Grid Snap
Unit in the General Layout Defaults dialog. See To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance on page 499.
It is a good idea to set the default line style, weight, and other attributes of CAD objects that you draw on the layout sheet
prior to drawing them. See To set the default CAD line weight and style on page 499.
Before adding text to the layout, be sure that the Rich Text Defaults are set to meet your requirements. See To set the Rich
Text Defaults on page 504.

SETTING UP THE DRAWING SHEETBefore sending views to layout, it is recommended that you set up your drawing sheet and then use the CAD, Text, andediting tools to create a border and title block for your layout pages on one or more Page Templates. For information about
the Drawing Sheet,497

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To set up the layout sheet
1. Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet Setup

to open the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.

2. Specify the Orientation and Size of the Drawing Sheet.
3. The Drawing Scale for layout files should always be 1 in = 1 in (1 mm = 1 mm in metric files).
4. You can also specify the drawing sheet’s Margins if you want.
5. Click OK when you are finished.
6. Select Window> Fill Window

so that you can see the entire drawing sheet.

7. When you are finished, select File> Save.

DRAWING A LAYOUT BORDERThe layout template files that are installed with Chief Architect have a title block and border already drawn in them on
Layout Page 0, which is the default Layout Page Template. You can use these as they are, modify them to suit your needs,
or delete them and create your own.
Although the CAD and Text objects that make up an existing layout border can be edited, it is sometimes easier to simply
create a new border from scratch.
It is often helpful to toggle Grid Snaps off when working certain tasks in a plan file. When working in layout, on the other
hand, Grid Snaps should almost always be toggled on.

498

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance
1. Select Edit> Default Settings, and in the Default Settings dialog click on "Layout" and click the Edit button.

2. In the General Layout Defaults dialog:l

Make sure that Use Snap Grid/Units is checked.

l

Set the Grid Snap Unit to be 1/8" and click OK.

To delete an existing layout border
1. Select View> Drawing Sheetto turn off the display of the Drawing Sheet. This will prevent the Drawing Sheetfrom being selected when the title block and border are group-selected.
2. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down

to go to Page 0 and Zoom

out so you can see the entire title block andborder.
3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click and drag to draw a rectangular selection marquee around the entire

drawing. When you release the mouse button, all of the objects within the selection marquee will be selected as agroup.
4. Select Edit> Delete, click the Delete

edit button, or press the Delete key to delete the entire title block andborder.
5. Select View> Drawing Sheetto turn the display of the Drawing Sheet back on.

As an alternative to deleting an existing title block and border, you can select Tools> Layout> Page Up

to go to an

empty page and draw a new one there. That page should then be specified as a Page Template. See "Layout Page
Templates" on page 485 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.

To set the default CAD line weight and style
1. Select Tools> Layer Settings> Display Options.

2. In the Layout Page Display Options dialog:
3. Click on the "CAD, Default" layer to select it and notice that its attributes can be edited below the list of layers.
4. The default Line Weight of 18 and the solid Line Style are typical for CAD lines on a construction sheet, so click
Cancel to close the dialog without making any changes.

To create a new layout border
1. Make sure that Object Snaps
2. Select Edit> Preferences

are enabled, particularly Endpoint

Snaps.

, then go to the BEHAVIORS panel of the Preferences dialog.

lUnder the Edit Type heading, select Concentric.

lSpecify the Jump value as the distance you would like your border to be drawn from the edge of the drawing
sheet.

lHere, 1/8" is used.

499

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click OK to close the dialog and make the Concentric Edit Behavior active and notice that the mouse pointerdisplays the Concentric icon, reminding you that this non-default behavior is active.
4. Select CAD> Boxes> Rectangular Polyline, then click and drag a rectangle beginning at one corner of thedrawing sheet and ending at the opposite corner.
l

Watch for the red snap indicators that will display at each corner when Endpoint

Snaps are enabled.

5. Click on the rectangular polyline to select it, then:lLook at left side of the Status Bar to confirm that a Standard Polyline is selected.

l

If the Sheet Boundary is selected instead, click the Select Next Object

6. Zoom

edit button.

in on one corner of the polyline, then click and slowly drag a corner edit handle towards its center.

lWhen you reach the your specified Concentric Jump distance, the polyline’s preview outline will resize sothat its edges are that distance from the drawing sheet edges.

lContinue dragging inward and the preview outline will resize again each time you reach the next Concentric
Jump increment.

lWhen you reach the desired Concentric Jump increment, release the mouse button.

l

You can create a double border in a similar manner. With the polyline still selected:lClick the Copy/Pasteledit button.

Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center. A concentric copy of the polyline is madewhen you reach the Concentric Jump distance.

500

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

7. When you are finished, it is a good idea to restore the Default Edit Behavior. To do this, select Edit> Edit
Behaviors> Default.
8. Before moving on, remember to Save

your work.

You can adjust the line weight, style and color for any CAD object in its specification dialog.
If you would like, you can fillet the corners of the border polylines using the Fillet Lines edit tool.

CREATING A TITLE BLOCK
With the border drawn, a title block can be added. Here, a vertical title block is added to the right side of the sheet.

To create a title block frame
1. Select the inner border polyline created above and create a concentrically resized copy inside it:in on one corner of the polyline.

l

Zoom

l

Click the Copy/Pastel

This time, hold down the C key, which is the temporary hotkey for the Concentric edit behavior.

l

Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center. A concentric copy of the polyline is madewhen you reach the Concentric Jump distance.

lHere, two Concentric Jumps are used to resize the polyline by 1/4".

edit button.

2. With the newly created polyline selected, click on its left vertical edge to make it the Selected Edge.
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Selected Edge is from the polyline’s opposite vertical
edge.

501

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. In the inline text field, type 2" and press the Enter key.

With the title block’s area defined, separate frames can be created for the information it will contain.

To add a title block component frame
1. Select the title block frame and create a concentrically resized copy inside it:in on one corner of the polyline.

l

Zoom

l

Click the Copy/Pastel

Hold down the C key to enable the Concentric edit behavior.

l

Click and drag one of the corner edit handles towards the center, and release the mouse button when you reach
the Concentric Jump distance of 1/8".

edit button.

2. Click on the top horizontal edge of the new polyline to make it the Selected Edge, then:
3. Click on the Temporary Dimension that reports how far the Selected Edge is from the polyline’s bottom horizontaledge.
4. In the inline text field, type 1" and press the Enter key.

502

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To replicate component frames
1. Select the component frame and click the Copy/Paste edit button.
2. Click the Point to Point Moveedit button, then:lClick once on the lower left corner of the component frame.

lClick once on the upper left corner of the component frame.

l

A copy of the frame is created, and is positioned so that its lower left corner is snapped to the upper left cornerof the original.

3. With the new component frame selected, press the Up Arrow key one time to nudge it upward 1/8".
The Nudge distance is equal to the file’s Grid Snap Unit.

4. Create a third component frame above the first two using the same process.
5. Make the third frame 4" in height using Temporary Dimensions.
6. Repeat these steps to create:l

A fourth frame 5" in height.

l

A fifth frame 4" in height.

l

A blank space at the top of the title block frame will remain.

503

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

ADDING TITLE BLOCK TEXTText can now be created and centered with in the title block frames.

To set the Rich Text Defaults
1. Select Edit> Default Settings

to open the Default Settings dialog. Click the arrow to the left of "Text, Callouts

and Markers" to expand the category, select "Rich Text", then click the Edit button.
2. In the Saved Rich Text Defaults dialog, click the Edit button.
3. On the RICH TEXT panel of Rich Text Defaults dialog:l

You can specify the default font that you want to use as well as its size. Here, the "Chief Blueprint" font sized
at 1/8" is used.

l

Although you can specify special styles like Bold and Italic, it is usually best to not enable these by default.

l

You can type in the text field; however, whatever is entered in the defaults dialog will appear in all newly
created Rich Text objects and is not recommended.

4. Click OK and then Done to close both dialogs and apply your changes.

504

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To add company information
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in an empty space on the right side of the drawing sheet.

2. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:l

Begin by clicking the Align Centerbutton.

l

In the main text field, type your company name and contact information.

l

To change the size of the company name, highlight it with the mouse and then type the desired size in the text
field above. Here, 3/16" is used instead of 1/8".

lClick OK to close the dialog and create the text at the point where you clicked.

3. Use the triangular Rotate edit handle to rotate the selected objects 90° to the right, so the text faces the right side of
the sheet.

505

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To center text in a frame
1. Click the Center Object

edit button, then:lMove your mouse pointer over left side of the 4" high frame, just above the two 2" frames.

lWhen a horizontal centering axis displays, click once to center the text relative to the 4" frame.

2. With the text still selected, click the Center Object

edit button once more. Next:lMove your mouse pointer over the top edge of the 4" high frame.

lWhen a vertical centering axis displays, click once to center the text relative to the 4" frame.

506

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

Project information can be added to the 5" high frame located just above the company information.
3. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

USING TEXT MACROSText Macros can be used to automatically populate the text with information like the sheet title, sheet number, and thecurrent date.
Each of your layout pages can be assigned its own unique Title, which will display dynamically using the same text object.
For more information, see Layout Page Templates on page 485.

To add a sheet title
1. Create a Rich Text

object to the left of the title block.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:

507

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click the Align Centerbutton.

l

Increase the text size to 1/4".

lClick the Insert Macrol

Browse to Global> Layout Info and select "Layout Page Title".

lNote that the Text object now contains the macro: %layout.title%, then click OK.

button.

4. Notice that the Text object now says "Standard Template". This is the title that was assigned to Page 0 in the Layout
Page Templates tutorial. See "To specify a page template" on page 486 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.
5. Rotate the text so it faces to the right.
6. Use the Center Object

edit tool to center the text inside the frame located just above the project information, as

described in To center text in a frame on page 506.

508

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

There are a number of page number macros, but the most versatile is used here and will allow you to set up custom page
numbering conventions using the Layout Page Information dialog.

To add a sheet number
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in an empty space in the drawing sheet.

2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lSpecify the text size as 1/4".

lClick the Align Centerbutton.

l

Click the Insert Macrobutton.

l

Browse to Global> Layout Info and select "Layout Page Label".

lNote that the Text object now contains the macro: %layout.label%.

3. On the APPEARANCE panel, check Border, then click OK.
4. Notice that only the Text object’s border displays. This is because the current page does not have a Label specified
in the Layout Page Information dialog like it does a Title.

509

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

5. Use the Center Object

edit tool to center the text inside the frame located at the bottom of the title bar, as

described in To center text in a frame on page 506.

6. Go to Page 3 and note that the %layout.label% is now displaying as "A0.1". This is the page number for the General
Notes, created in "To assign page numbers" on page 491 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.

7. Go back to Page 0, select the layout label text object, and click the Open Object

edit button.

8. On the APPEARANCE panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog, uncheck Border and click OK.

510

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To add the current date
1. With the layout label text still selected, click the Copy/Paste
2. Click the Point to Point Moveedit button.

edit button, then:lClick on the top right corner of the frame around the selected text.

lClick on the top right corner of the frame directly above.

l

A copy of the Text is created, centered in the frame above the original.

3. With the newly pasted Text still selected, click the Open Object

edit button.

4. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lDelete the existing macro textlClick the Insert Macrol

Browse to Global> Time Date and select "Short Date".

lNote that the Text object now contains the macro: %date.short% and click OK.

button.

5. The Text object now reports the current date.

6. When you are finished, remember to Save

your work.

INCLUDING A REVISION TABLE
Revisions can be added to any page, and can be listed in a Revision Table.

To place a revision table
1. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Revision Table, then click in the middle of the drawing sheet to place a

Revision Table at that location.

2. Select the Revision Table and rotate it 90° using its edit handle.

511

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

3. Click the Point to Point Moveedit tool:l

Click on the lower left corner of the Revision Table.

lClick on the upper left corner of the border around the sheet title.

4. With the Revision Table still selected, press the Up Arrow key once to move it up 1/8".
5. With the Revision Table still selected, click the Open Object

edit button. On the GENERAL panel of the

Revision Table Specification dialog, specify the Minimum Rows as 7, then click OK.
6. Click the Resize edit handle that displays along the top edge of the Revision Table and drag upwards until it is 1/8"
from the title block frame.

To add a revision to a page
1. To go Page 3 and select Tools> Layout> Edit Page Information.

2. In the Layout Page Information dialog, under the Page Revisions heading, click the New button.
3. In the Revision Specification dialog:lSpecify the Page Range as 3,4.

l

Add a brief label and description, then click OK.

512

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. Notice that the new revision is listed under the Page Revisions heading for Pages 3 and 4.
5. Click OK and note that the Revision Table on Pages 3 and 4 displays the new revision, while on the other pages, itdoes not.
6. Return to Page 3 and select Edit> Undo
7. Remember to Saveto remove the test revision from Pages 3 and 4.

your work.

CREATING A COVER SHEET TEMPLATE
A variation of the title block and border can be created for use on the cover sheet. See "To assign the Cover Sheet
Template" on page 489 of the Layout Page Templates Tutorial.
In this example, the Cover Sheet Template will use the same border as the Standard Sheet Template, but not the title block.
It will instead feature the project name and address, a sheet index, a space for a large presentation view.

To copy the border
1. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down
2. Zoomto go to Page 0.

in on the top left corner of the Drawing Sheet.

3. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the outer border polyline to select it.

4. Hold down the Shift key and click on the inner border polyline to add it to the selection set.
5. Select Edit> Copy.

6. Select Tools> Layout> Page Up

to go to Page 1.

7. Select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position.

8. Note that the new border is positioned inside the Drawing Sheet exactly like the original.

A company logo can be added to the title block by importing and embedding an image.

513

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To import a logo image
1. Zoom in on the space where you would like to display a logo or other image.
2. Select File> Import> Import Picture.

3. In the Import Picture File dialog, browse to a company logo or other image file saved on your computer, select it,
and click the Open button.
4. The imported picture will fill the extents of the current view, and can be edited.
5. Click the Select Objects

button, then click on the imported picture to select it.

6. Click the Open Object

edit button, and on the GENERAL panel of the Picture File Box Specification dialog:l

Check the box beside Save in Plan.

l

Under the Size heading, make sure that Retain Aspect Ratio of is checked.

lSpecify the desired Height and Width.

lHere, a square image is sized at 3" x 3".

lClick OK to close the dialog.

7. With the picture still selected, click the Point to Point Movel

Click on the lower left corner of the image.

l

Click on the lower left corner of the inner border polyline.

514

edit button, then:Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

8. Press the Up Arrow key twice, and the Right Arrow key twice to nudge the image 1/4" in from the border polyline.

Company and project information can be positioned and oriented using the same techniques used to create the standard page
template. See Adding Title Block Text on page 504.

To create a title bar
1. Select CAD> Lines> Draw Line, then click and drag to draw a horizontal line across the length of the innerborder polyline anywhere above the imported picture.

2. Click on the line, then move it down until it snaps to the top edge of the imported picture.
3. With the line still selected, press the Up Arrow key twice to create a 1/4" gap between it and the picture.

515

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

4. Place Rich Text objects with company and project information.

5. Here, the company information is centered along the right vertical edge of the imported logo image. It is Aligned
Leftand positioned 1/4" to the right of logo.
6. The project information is located 1/4" to the left of the inner border polyline, and is Aligned Right.

To add a sheet index
1. Select Tools> Layout> Layout Page Table, then click once in the drawing area to create a layout page table atthat location.
2. Click on the new table to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

3. On the GENERAL panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, specify the table’s Name. Here, "Sheet Index"
is used.
4. Also on the GENERAL panel, organize and name the Columns to Include:lSelect "Description" and click the Remove button.

l

Select "Comments" and click the Remove button.

516

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Bordersl

Select "Label" and click the Rename button.

l

In the Schedule Column Name dialog, type "Sheet" and click OK.

5. On the ATTRIBUTES panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, select "Centered" from the Alignment
drop-down list.
6. On the TEXT STYLE panel:lSelect a Font from the drop-down list.

lSpecify the desired Character Height. Here, 1/4" is used.

l

Click OK.

7. With the table still selected, use the edit handles to resize the columns as you wish.
8. Use the Point to Point Moveedit button and Arrow keys to position the table in the top right corner of theborder.

Because the non-template pages of the layout are currently
blank, no pages are listed in the table. When views, text, or CAD
are added to each page, the table will become populated.

All of the text in a Layout Page Table uses the same Text Style. To create a title with a larger font, use a separate Rich Text
object.

To create a custom layout page table title
1. Select the Layout Page Table, then click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the GENERAL panel of the Layout Page Table Specification dialog, uncheck the box beside Display, to the rightof the Main Title text field, then click OK.
3. With the table still selected, use its edit handles to move downward on screen to make room for a text object aboveit.
4. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text

, then click in the drawing area, near the Layout Page Table.

5. On the RICH TEXT panel of the Rich Text Specification dialog:lSpecify the desired font size. Here, 5/8" is used.

l

Click the Align CenterlType the desired title, then click OK.

button.

6. Use the edit handles, Point to Point Move and Center Object edit tools to position the table and its custom title as
desired.

517

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

7. When you are finished, Save

your work.

The left side of the cover sheet can now be used for one or more presentation views, while the right side will be used by the
Sheet Index as it expands to list sheets.

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed.
When you are finished working on a file and are ready to close it, Save

your work. Before closing it, though, create a

copy of the file with a different name that indicates what it contains so you can distinguish it from other revisions.

To save a layout revision
1. Select File> Save As.

2. In the Save Layout File dialog, make sure that the save location is your Chief Architect Premier X16 Data\Templates
folder.
3. For the File name, type My Layout Template as the name of the file followed by a short description of the current
state of the drawing; for example, My Layout Template_Title Block.
4. Select File> Close All Views.

CREATING A CUSTOM LAYOUT TEMPLATEThe MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE.layout file now has page templates, a title block and a border and is ready for use as thebasis for a new layout file for Chic Cottage.

518

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Title Blocks and Borders

To specify a custom layout template
1. Select Edit> Preferences from the menu.
2. On the NEW PLANS panel of the Preferences dialog:l

Make sure that the radio button next to U.S. Units is selected.

lClick the Browse button to the right of the U.S. Units Layout Template field.

3. In the Select a Layout Template File dialog:lBrowse to Documents/Chief Architect Premier X16 Data/Templates.

lSelect the MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout file and click OK.

4. Settings in the Preferences dialog are saved when you exit out of the program, so now is a good time to close down
the program:l

In Windows, select File> Exit.

l

In macOS, select Chief Architect> Quit.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for creating custom layout borders and title blocks.
To set up the layout sheet498

To set the Grid Snap Unit and Nudge distance499

To delete an existing layout border499

To set the default CAD line weight and style499

To create a new layout border499

To create a title block frame501

To add a title block component frame502

To replicate component frames503

To set the Rich Text Defaults

504

To add company information505

To center text in a frame506

To add a sheet title

507

To add a sheet number509

To add the current date

511

To place a revision table511

To add a revision to a page512

To copy the border513

To import a logo image514

To create a title bar

515

To add a sheet index

516

To create a custom layout page table title

517

To save a layout revision

518

519

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To specify a custom layout template

519

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 27 - Title Blocks and Borders
What are two things that the Snap Grid Unit controls?
l

The Snap Grid Unit controls the interval at which objects are drawn, resized, and moved.

l

It also controls how far they are Nudged using the arrow keys on the keyboard.

What are three ways to enable the Concentric Edit Behavior?
l

The Concentric Edit Behavior can be enabled on the Behaviors panel of the Preferences dialog.

l

The different Edit Behaviors can also be enabled in the menus at Edit> Behaviors.

l

It can also be enabled temporarily by holding down the C key on the keyboard.

What edit tool lets you align an object along an axis that runs through another object’s side?
l

The Center Object edit tool allows you to align a selected object along an axis that runs along another object's side or
its midline.

What edit tool lets you snap the corner of one object to a point on another object?
l

The Point to Point Move edit tool lets you move an object by clicking on a point on that object, then clicking on adifferent point somewhere else, including on another object.

How do you specify two different font sizes in a single Rich Text object?
l

To change the size of part of the text, highlight it with the mouse on the Text panel of the Rich Text Specification
dialog and then type the desired size in the text field above.

Describe how a company logo can be added to a layout page.
l

A company logo can be added to the title block by importing and embedding an image. Select File> Import> ImportPicture to do this.

Name two uses for text macros on a layout page.
l

The layout page title macro, %layout.title%, will report the current page’s title.

l

There are also a variety of page number macros.

What are two types of tables that are available for use in layout files?
lLayout Revision Tables and Layout Page Tables are the two types of tables available in layout files.

Where can you specify the template file used when a new layout is created?
l

You can specify the default layout template file used when a new layout is created on the New Plans panel of thePreferences dialog.

Sending Views to Layout
With a layout template file set up, views can now be sent to layout and arranged on pages for printing.

LEARNING OBJECTIVESThis lesson describes best practices in Chief Architect for sending views to layout. Concepts introduced include:520

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

File Management521

Layout Links to Plan Files

521

Productivity Tips

521

Setting the Defaults

522

Sending Plan Views to Layout

522

Sending Section and Elevation Views to Layout

528

Sending Perspective Views to Layout

535

Printing Layout Files

537

Creating File Revisions

538

FILE MANAGEMENT
This tutorial continues where the Layout Page Templates tutorial left off. At this point, both the My Layout Template_Page
Templates and MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE layout files contain the same information, and you could open either one andcontinue working. However, My Layout Template_Page Templates.layout was created specifically to serve as a revision orarchive file so it will be left unchanged. Similarly, MY LAYOUT TEMPLATE has been specified as a layout template fileand should not have views sent directly to it.
Instead of working in either of those files, select File> New Layout. Notice that the new, untitled layout file features thecustom title block and border that you created in the Title Blocks and Borders tutorial and that the Project Browser lists its
pages using the Layout Page Information that you specified in the Layout Page Templates tutorial.

To save a new layout file
1. Select File> Save As. In the Save Plan File dialog, browse to your Documents folder.

2. Navigate into your Chic Cottage folder so that it becomes the Save location for your layout file.
3. For the File name, type CHIC COTTAGE. You have now created the main layout file for the Chic Cottage project.
It is a very good idea to save your files often as you work, and this guide reminds you to do so regularly.

LAYOUT LINKS TO PLAN FILESIn order to send any view to layout, first open both the destination layout file and the plan file. Once a view has been sentfrom a plan file to a layout, the files are considered to be linked. To help avoid breaking layout links, it is recommended thatthese two files have the same name and be saved in the same folder in your computer.

PRODUCTIVITY TIPS
As you learn how to send views to layout, keep in mind these tips to improve your productivity.

Drawing and EditinglWhen set up correctly, layer sets like the Plot Plan Set and Electrical Set can meet your needs while working and also
when sending views to layout for printing.

Interfacel

Use the information in the Project Browser to send different types of views to the correct layout page quickly.

521

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Keyboard HotkeyslF1 - Help for the current contextlCtrl/⌘ + U - Send to LayoutlSpacebar - Select ObjectslArrow keys - Nudge selected objectl

F6 - Fill Windowl

Ctrl/⌘ + Tab - Select Next Tabl

Ctrl/⌘ + E - Open Object edit toollCtrl/⌘ + S - Save

SETTING THE DEFAULTSIn Chief Architect, the initial attributes of most objects can be specified prior to actually drawing them using Default
Settings. Setting defaults early can improve efficiency and also helps to avoid introducing errors into the drawing. Whensending views to layout, there are several defaults of particular importance.
Before sending views to layout, it is a good idea to create a layout template that meets your needs, including the proper
sheet size, page organization, and a title block with your company information. See Layout Page Templates on page 485
and Title Blocks and Borders on page 495.
Views sent to layout may use different scales. To save time, make sure that the Drawing Scale that you expect to use mostfrequently is set as the default in the plan. See To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views on page 522.
The Drawing Scale of the layout file itself, however, should always be 1 in = 1 in. See "To set up the layout sheet" on page498 of the Title Blocks and Borders Tutorial.
Each view sent to layout is contained in a Layout Box. You can set the Layout Box Defaults to use Line and Fill Styles thatmeet your needs. You can also set up the defaults for Layout Box labels so they report the information you need. See
Sending Views to Layout on page 520.

SENDING PLAN VIEWS TO LAYOUT
Most construction documents have multiple plan views sent to layout for a variety of purposes. Here, two examples, a siteplan and electrical plan, will be sent.

To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views
1. Select File> Open Planand open the CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT plan saved in your Chic Cottage folder.

2. Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet Setup.

3. In the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog:lSpecify the Drawing Scale as the most common scale that your layout views will use.

lHere, 1/4 in = 1 ft will be used.

l

Click OK to close the dialog and apply your change.

4. Saveyour work.

522

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To send plan views to layout
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down, which is located in the top toolbar by default, and select "Floor

Plan View Dimensioned" from the drop-down list.
2. Select the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser
Next:

l

Click the arrow next to the "Pages" folder to expand the list of your customized layout pages.

lAs you send views to layout, refer to this list to determine which page to send each view to. The floor plan for
Floor 1, for example, should be sent to Page 6.

523.

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

3. Select File> Send to Layout

to open the Send to Layout dialog:lUnder Choose Layout, notice that the open layout file, CHIC COTTAGE, is selected as the destination layout
file.

l

Under Send Position, type Page Number 6 and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Floor 1 Plan.

l

Leave Show Layout Page checked so that when you click OK, the layout window will become active.

l

Under Send Options, select Entire Plan/View.

l

Make sure that Link Saved Plan View is checked. This means that once sent to layout, the view will show
information as specified for the "Floor Plan View Dimensioned" saved plan view.

l

Under Scaling, notice that the default scale of 1/4 in = 1 ft is used by default.

524

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

4. Click OK to send the view to the center of the specified layout page.

Notice that the layout box has a label underneath it that reports its name. This label can be customized. See To customize alayout box label on page 533, below.

To send more plan views to layout
1. Select Window> Select Next Tab to return to plan view.
2. Click the Saved Plan View Control
3. Select File> Send to Layout

drop-down and select "Electrical Plan View" from the list.

to open the Send to Layout dialog:l

CHIC COTTAGE.layout is still selected as the destination layout file.

lSpecify Page Number 9 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for an
Electrical Plan.

l

Confirm that Link Saved Plan View is checked.

lNote that the Scaling is still set to the default of 1/4 in = 1 ft.

l

Click OK to send the view to the specified page.

525

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Additional plan views can be sent to layout in a similar manner. A site plan is also a type of plan view, but uses a different
drawing scale than other plan views.

To send a site plan to layout
1. Click the Saved Plan View Control

drop-down and select "Plot Plan View" from the list.

2. Select Window> Fill Window.

3. Select File> Send to Layout

to open the Send to Layout dialog:l

Notice that CHIC COTTAGE.layout is selected as the destination layout file.

l

Under Send Position, type Page Number 4 and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Site Plan.

l

Leave Show Layout Page checked so that when you click OK, the layout window will become active.

l

Under Send Options, select Entire Plan/View.

lConfirm that Link Saved Plan View is checked. This means that once sent to layout, the view will show
information as specified for the "Plot Plan View" saved plan view.

526Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to LayoutlUnder Scaling, notice that the default scale of 1/4 in = 1 ft is used by default. Site plans are typically a lotlarger than a floor plan, though, so specify 1 ft = 100 ft instead.

4. Click OK to send the view to the center of the specified layout page.
5. A message will warn you that the view is too large to fit on the page at the specified scale. Click OK.
It’s not uncommon to move, rotate, and/or resize a view once it is on the layout page.

To rotate, resize, and move a layout view
1. Click on the plot plan layout view on the layout page to select it, then rotate it 90° clockwise:lMove your mouse pointer over the large triangular Rotate handle.

l

Click and drag the handle in a clockwise direction around the outside of the layout view.

lWhen the view box has a portrait orientation and the road is located on the left side of the page, release the mousebutton.

2. With the view still selected, crop its extents:l

Click and drag the small Resize handles located on each side of the view inward to make the view smaller.

l

You can use Temporary Dimensions to make fine adjustments to the view box’s size.

3. With the view still selected, center the view inside the sheet border:l

Click the Center Object

edit button.

lMove the mouse pointer over the top edge of the large inner border polyline surrounding the plot plan view.

lWhen the inner border polyline becomes highlighted and a dashed vertical centering axis displays at the
midpoint of its top edge, click once.

l

The door becomes aligned with the center of the Room Divider.

l

Repeat these steps to center the view along the left edge of the white Drawing Sheet.

4. Click and drag the small Move Label edit handle to move the view’s label from the left side of the view to thebottom center.

5. When you are finished, Savethe work you have done so far in the layout file.

527

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

You can use the Text Tools to add a legal lot description, directions to the site, and any other notes that you may need on asite plan page.

SENDING SECTION AND ELEVATION VIEWS TO LAYOUT
Cross Section/Elevation, Back Clipped Cross Section

and Wall Elevation

views can also be sent to layout.

Saved cross section/elevation views are listed in the Project Browser and can be sent to layout at any time.

To send a section view to layout
1. Switch to the Project Browser side window by clicking on its tab. If it is not open, select View> Project Browser.
2. Under the "CHIC COTTAGE-CURRENT.plan" heading:l

Click the arrow next to the "Cross Sections" folder to expand the list of saved cross section/elevation views.

lNotice that the "Stair Section" created in the Interior Stairs tutorial is listed, as is the Wall Elevation created in
the Appliances and Fixtures tutorial. See "Working in Cross Section Views" on page 70 of the Interior Stairs
Tutorial.

3. Right-click on the saved "Stair Section" and select Open View from the contextual menu.

4. Select File> Send to Layout

to open the Send to Layout dialog:lConfirm that CHIC COTTAGE.layout is still selected as the destination layout file.

lSpecify Page Number 8 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for
Sections.

l

Change the Scaling to 1/2 in = 1 ft.

l

Click OK to send the view to the specified page.

528

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

To send an elevation view to layout
1. Select 3D> Create Orthographic View> Back Clipped Cross Section, then create an elevation view of theright side of the structure:lClick to place the camera location in the terrain, outside the roof overhang area.

l

Make sure that the camera’s line of sight extends into but not past the front porch stairs.

lMake sure that the camera’s line of sight is perfectly horizontal.

2. Zoomin and use the CAD and Text tools to add any annotations that the view might require, such as roof

heights, pitches, material specifications, or other notes.

529

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

3. Select 3D> Edit Active View

, and in the Cross Section/Elevation Specification dialog:lGive the view a short, descriptive Name such as "Exterior Elevation - Right".

lNotice that the Saved check box under the Name field becomes checked automatically.

l

Click OK.

4. Now is a good time to Savethe plan file, so your new elevation camera is saved in the file.

5. Select File> Send to Layout

to open the Send to Layout dialog.

530

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to LayoutlConfirm that CHIC COTTAGE.layout is still selected as the destination layout file.

lSelect Page Number 7 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for
Elevations.

lSelect the Plot Lines radio button and check the box beside Color Fill.

l

Under Scaling, use the default 1/4 in = 1 ft drawing scale.

l

Click OK to send the view to layout.

6. An Information message will inform you that the view is too large to fit on the drawing sheet. The layout box can beresized to fit the page in a moment, so click OK.

Notice that images like trees are not included in Plot Line views sent to layout.

To change a layout view’s Camera View Options
1. Click on the elevation view on the layout page to select it, then click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LINKED VIEW panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog:l

Notice that information about the view that the selected box is linked to is reported and can be changed if needbe.

lUnder "Camera View Options", select the Live View radio button and click OK.

531

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

Live Views offer a number of benefits; however, they must be linked to a saved camera view. If the Exterior Elevation Right camera were deleted, its layout view box would be empty.
All views sent to layout can be moved, cropped, and even rotated.

To crop and move a layout box
1. Click on the elevation view on the layout page to select it.
2. Click and drag the view box’s left, right, and top edges inward so the box only displays the house and a few plan
feet of the terrain on either side.
3. Click and drag the square Move edit handle at the view box’s center to position it in one corner of the layout page.

532

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

4. You can go to page 8 and move the Stair Section view, as well.

In construction documents, it is common for section and elevation views to have callout labels that include both an identifier
for the view along with the page where information relevant to that view can be found in a plan view.

To customize a layout box label
1. Select the Stair Section view and click the Open Object

edit button.

2. On the LABEL panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog:l

Notice that layout box labels can use callouts, markers, or regular text.

lClick the Edit button to the right of the Use Callout radio button.

3. The Callout Label Specification dialog also provides numerous ways to customize both label information and style.
4. On the CALLOUT panel, notice that the preview pane on the right shows a callout with cross section line and several
pieces of text:l

The text inside the shape is the Callout Label set on the CALLOUT panel, which is using the %referenced_
view_callout_label% macro. This reports the Stair Section's callout label: "S1".

l

The Text Above Line is set on the ATTRIBUTES panel and uses the %automatic_label% macro. This reports theview's name, "Stair Section", which was set in the Interior Stairs on page 64 tutorial.

l

The Text Below Line is also set on the ATTRIBUTES panel and uses the %box_scale% macro. This reports thescale that was assigned to the view when it was sent to layout.

5. The callout shape can also include a second line of text below the Callout Label. Still on the CALLOUT panel:l

Check the Automatic box to the right of the Text Below Line setting, which is currently blank.

lAdditional text will be added to the callout shape when the label is linked to a view.

6. On the LINK panel, click the Link button.

533

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

7. In the Link View dialog, which opens next:l

In the tree list on the left, under "Chic Cottage.layout", click the arrow next to "Pages".

lClick on "Page 6 - A1.3 - Floor 1 Plan", then click OK.

8. Returning to the Callout Label Specification dialog, the preview now shows two rows of text in the callout shape.
The Text Below Line is now present, and reports the Page Label of layout page that the callout is linked to.

9. On the ATTRIBUTES panel, under "Callout Arrows" heading:lSelect the Large radio button.

l

Check the box beside Filled.

l

Set the Number of Arrows to 1.

l

The arrow's direction can be adjusted using its edit handle in a moment.

10. You may also want to:lIncrease the Cross Section Line Length to better accommodate the arrow.

lChange the Alignment of the Text Above Line to "Away From Callout".

lWhen you are satisfied with the appearance of the callout, click OK.

534

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

11. Returning to the LABEL panel of the Layout Box Specification dialog, notice that the Position Reference is "Bottom
Center". You can choose a different Reference from the drop-down list if you wish, then click OK.
12. When you are finished, Savethe work you have done so far in the layout file.

Once a full size cross section/elevation view has been cropped and moved, there is typically room to send additional views
to the same page if you wish.

SENDING PERSPECTIVE VIEWS TO LAYOUT
Perspective views add visual appeal and clarity to your documentation. Sending a presentation view as a static image rather
than a dynamic view allows you to easily control its size.

To send a perspective view to layout
1. Return to plan view.
2. Select 3D> Create Perspective View> Full Camera

and create a 3D view.

3. Orbit the camera to an angle that you like, then select 3D> Edit Active View.

4. On the CAMERA panel of the Perspective Full Overview Specification dialog, type a short, descriptive Name for thecamera, such as "Cover Sheet View" and click OK.

535

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

5. Select File> Send to Layout

to open the Send to Layout dialog.

lConfirm that CHIC COTTAGE.layout is still selected as the destination layout file.

lSpecify Page Number 2 as the Send Position and confirm in the Project Browser that this page is set up for the
Cover Sheet.

l

Under Send Options, select the Current Screen as Image radio button.

l

Notice that nearly all of the options available for the previous views sent to layout are now unavailable.

lClick OK to send the view to the specified page.

6. Click the Select Objectslbutton, then click on the view sent to page 2 to select it.

Notice that in the Status Bar, it is described as a Picture File Box rather than a Layout Box.

536

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

7. Use the box’s edit handles to resize and crop the image as needed:lClick and drag a corner Resize handle to change the size of the picture box while maintaining its aspect ratio.

lClick and drag a side Reshape handle to crop the extents of the picture within the box.

8. When you are finished, Savethe layout file.

Repeat this process for any other camera views you may want to send to layout. Or, try using a different Rendering
Technique such as Technical Illustration or Hand Drawn Lines.

PRINTING LAYOUT FILES
Layout files can be printed on a local printer or plotter, or to a PDF file. A PDF, or Portable Document Format file saves allof the printable information associated with a document such as a layout and makes it available for both viewing andprinting without using the software originally used to create it. PDFs are easy to create and provide you with an efficient
way to share your work with others or send documents to a print service.
Chief Architect has a built-in PDF writer, which you can select as your printer in any of the program’s Print dialogs.
Alternatively, you can print to PDF using a PDF writer installed on your computer.

To print to PDF
1. Select File> Print> Print.

2. In the Print Layout dialog:lSelect "Chief Architect Save as PDF" from the Destination Name drop-down list.

l

Make sure that the Paper Size is ARCH D (24" x 36").

lConfirm that all the other settings in the dialog meet your needs.

lClick the Save as PDF button.

3. In the Choose PDF File Name dialog:lSpecify a short, descriptive File name such as CHIC COTTAGE FINAL.

lNavigate to your Documents directory and open the Chic Cottage folder to make it the save location, then click
the Save button.

537

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layout

CREATING FILE REVISIONS
Saving revisions of your files allows you to develop different ideas for a project as well as create a history of your work thatyou can refer back to when needed. Generally speaking, there are few reasons to create revisions of a layout file. It’s notcommon for your page organization to require radical changes. And, because most views sent to layout update
automatically, they are a reflection of the current state of the working drawing.
If, however, you create more than one final version of a plan, multiple versions of the layout may be required as well. For
example, if you were to create construction drawings for Chic Cottage with dormers as well as without, you would need two
layouts: CHIC COTTAGE and CHIC COTTAGE DORMERS.

REVIEW
This lesson describes the best practices for sending views to layout.
To save a new layout file521

To set the default Drawing Scale for plan views522

To send plan views to layout

523

To send more plan views to layout

525

To send a site plan to layout

526

To rotate, resize, and move a layout view527

To send a section view to layout

528

To send an elevation view to layout529

To change a layout view’s Camera View Options

531

To crop and move a layout box

532

To customize a layout box label533

To send a perspective view to layout

535

To print to PDF

537

Assessment Questions
Tutorial 28 - Sending Views to Layout
Where do you set the default drawing scale for all views sent to layout from a given plan file?
lViews sent to layout may use different scales. To save time, make sure that the Drawing Scale that you expect to use
most frequently is set as the default in the plan. This is done in the plan file’s Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.

How is the information in the Project Browser helpful when sending views to layout?
l

As you send views to layout, you can refer to the list of layout pages to determine which page to send each view to.
The page number can then be specified in the Send to Layout dialog.

What is one difference between Live Views and Plot Line views sent to layout?
l

Images are included in Live Views sent to layout, but not Plot Line views.

lLive Views, however, must be linked to a saved camera view whereas Plot Line views do not. If a Live View’s
originating view is deleted, its layout view box would be empty.

What kind of view sent to layout can be resized using its corner edit handles?

538

Chief Architect Premier X16 Tutorial Guide - Sending Views to Layoutl

The Current Screen as Image option in the Send to Layout dialog produces a static picture box rather than a view
linked to the model. Picture boxes can be resized and their contents will get larger or smaller.

lWhen a layout box is resized, on the other hand, its contents are cropped.

539